HP Color LaserJet 3000 Printer series Technical Reference

Add to My manuals
418 Pages

advertisement

HP Color LaserJet 3000 Printer series Technical Reference | Manualzz

HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer

Software Technical Reference

HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer

Software Technical Reference

Copyright and license

©2005 Copyright Hewlett-Packard

Development Company, L.P.

Reproduction, adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws.

The information contained herein is subject to change without notice.

The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.

Edition 1, 11/2005

Trademark credits

Adobe®, Adobe Photoshop®, Acrobat®,

PostScript®, and the Acrobat logo® are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

Corel® is a trademark or registered trademark of Corel Corporation or Corel

Corporation Limited.

EnergyStar® and the Energy Star logo® are US registered marks of the United States

Environmental Protection Agency.

FireWire® FireWire is a trademark of Apple

Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Java™ is a US trademark of Sun

Microsystems, Inc.

Linux is a U.S. registered trademark of Linus

Torvalds.

Microsoft®, Windows®, and Windows NT® are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation.

PANTONE*® is *Pantone, Inc.'s checkstandard trademark for color.

Pentium® is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.

UNIX® is a registered trademark of The

Open Group.

Table of contents

1 Purpose and scope

Introduction.............................................................................................................................................1

HP Color LaserJet 3000.........................................................................................................................4

Printing-system software........................................................................................................................7

System requirements.............................................................................................................7

Windows................................................................................................................7

Macintosh..............................................................................................................7

Linux......................................................................................................................7

UNIX......................................................................................................................8

Supported operating systems ...............................................................................................8

Standalone drivers ...............................................................................................8

Print driver support in other operating systems.....................................................8

Availability..............................................................................................................................9

Printing-system software on the Web...................................................................9

Printing-system software .....................................................................9

Software component availability ........................................................10

In-box printing-system software CDs .................................................................11

HP LaserJet software CD, Windows partition ....................................11

HP LaserJet software CD, Macintosh partition...................................12

CD versions........................................................................................12

HP LaserJet documentation.................................................................................................................18

HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide.................................................................19

Hewlett-Packard Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 Printing-System Install Notes................20

HP Embedded Web Server User Guide..............................................................................20

HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide......................................................................................21

2 Software description

Introduction...........................................................................................................................................23

Printing-system software......................................................................................................................24

Windows software features..................................................................................................24

Printing system and installer...............................................................................24

HP Color LaserJet 3000 printing-system software CD for

Windows systems ..............................................................................24

Installer features.................................................................................26

HP LaserJet print drivers.....................................................................................27

HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation drivers.....................................27

Print-driver version numbers for Windows operating systems...........28

Macintosh printing-system software....................................................................................29

Mac OS 9 Classic support...................................................................................30

ENWW iii

iv

Macintosh printing system...................................................................................30

Driver Configuration for Windows.........................................................................................................31

Driver autoconfiguration.......................................................................................................31

Bidirectional communication................................................................................................31

Enterprise AutoConfiguration...............................................................................................31

Update Now.........................................................................................................................33

HP Driver Preconfiguration..................................................................................................34

Lockable features ...............................................................................................35

Continuous export ..............................................................................................36

HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool.............................................................................................37

Color Access Control............................................................................................................................38

International Color Consortium profiles................................................................................................40

PANTONE color profiles.......................................................................................................................41

HP Easy Printer Care...........................................................................................................................42

Installation options...............................................................................................................42

Access.................................................................................................................................43

Find Other Printers..............................................................................................................44

My HP Printers screen – Overview tab................................................................................49

HP Easy Printer Care – Support tab....................................................................................53

Maintenance Tools..............................................................................................55

Troubleshooting Tools.........................................................................................58

HP Embedded Web Server .................................................................................................................59

Access to the HP EWS........................................................................................................59

The HP EWS frame.............................................................................................................60

Information tab.....................................................................................................................60

Links to off-product solutions...............................................................................................61

Device Status screen ..........................................................................................................61

Configuration Page .............................................................................................................62

Settings tab..........................................................................................................................64

Configure device..................................................................................................................65

Alerts....................................................................................................................................66

Security................................................................................................................................68

Restrict Color.......................................................................................................................69

Networking tab ....................................................................................................................70

Configuration section..........................................................................................72

Security section...................................................................................................72

Diagnostics section.............................................................................................72

Network settings .................................................................................................72

HP Printer Utility for Macintosh............................................................................................................73

Access to the HP Printer Utility............................................................................................73

Supplies Status....................................................................................................................77

Device Information...............................................................................................................80

HP Support..........................................................................................................................81

Upload Fonts.......................................................................................................................83

File Upload...........................................................................................................................83

Update Firmware.................................................................................................................85

Duplex mode........................................................................................................................85

Color Usage.........................................................................................................................85

Trays Configuration.............................................................................................................86

Lock Resources...................................................................................................................87

ENWW

Stored Jobs..........................................................................................................................87

E-mail Alerts........................................................................................................................88

Network Settings..................................................................................................................89

Rendezvous Setting.............................................................................................................91

Supplies Management.........................................................................................................92

Restrict Color.......................................................................................................................92

Additional Settings...............................................................................................................96

HP Web Jetadmin................................................................................................................................97

3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows

Introduction...........................................................................................................................................99

Access to print drivers in Windows 98 and Windows Me...................................................................101

Properties driver tabs.........................................................................................................101

Help system........................................................................................................................................103

What's this? Help...............................................................................................................103

Context-sensitive Help.......................................................................................................103

Incompatible Options messages .......................................................................................103

Bubble Help.......................................................................................................................104

Finishing tab features.........................................................................................................................105

Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................106

Default Print Settings........................................................................................106

User Guide Print Settings .................................................................................109

Document Options.............................................................................................................109

Print on Both Sides...........................................................................................110

Automatically printing on both sides ................................................110

Manually printing on both sides........................................................111

Flip Pages Up....................................................................................................112

Booklet Printing.................................................................................................113

Book and Booklet Printing................................................................113

Pages per Sheet...............................................................................................114

Print Page Borders............................................................................................115

Page Order........................................................................................................115

Document preview image..................................................................................................116

Print Quality.......................................................................................................................116

Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver..................................116

Current Setting.................................................................................117

Graphic Settings...............................................................................117

Font Settings....................................................................................117

Output Settings.................................................................................117

Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver..................................117

Current Setting.................................................................................118

Graphic Settings...............................................................................118

Font Settings ...................................................................................118

Output Settings.................................................................................119

Effects tab features............................................................................................................................120

Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................121

Fit To Page........................................................................................................................121

Print Document On ...........................................................................................121

Scale to Fit........................................................................................................121

% of Normal Size..............................................................................................122

ENWW v

vi

Document preview image..................................................................................................122

Watermarks.......................................................................................................................122

Current Watermarks..........................................................................................123

First Page Only.................................................................................................123

Edit…................................................................................................................123

Current Watermarks.........................................................................124

Watermark Message........................................................................125

Message Angle.................................................................................125

Document preview image.................................................................125

Font Attributes..................................................................................125

Default watermark settings...............................................................126

Paper tab features..............................................................................................................................128

Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................129

Paper Options....................................................................................................................129

Size is................................................................................................................129

Custom..............................................................................................................130

Name................................................................................................131

Save, Delete, or Rename.................................................................132

Custom size (width and height controls)...........................................133

Custom width and height control limits.............................................133

Dynamic measurement units ...........................................................134

Close................................................................................................134

Source is...........................................................................................................134

Type is ..............................................................................................................135

Use Different Paper/Covers..............................................................................136

Front Cover.......................................................................................136

First Page.........................................................................................137

Other Pages.....................................................................................138

Last Page.........................................................................................138

Back Cover.......................................................................................139

Document preview image..................................................................................................140

Product image....................................................................................................................140

Job Storage tab features....................................................................................................................142

Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................144

Status dialog box...............................................................................................................145

Job Storage Mode.............................................................................................................145

Off.....................................................................................................................145

Proof and Hold .................................................................................................145

Private Job........................................................................................................145

Quick Copy .......................................................................................................146

Stored Job.........................................................................................................146

PIN.....................................................................................................................................147

Job Notification Options.....................................................................................................147

User Name.........................................................................................................................147

Job Name..........................................................................................................................147

Using job-storage features when printing..........................................................................148

Releasing a job-storage print job......................................................................148

Deleting a job-storage print job.........................................................................149

Basics tab features ............................................................................................................................150

Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................151

ENWW

ENWW

Copies................................................................................................................................151

Orientation ........................................................................................................................151

Document preview image..................................................................................................152

About…..............................................................................................................................152

Color tab features...............................................................................................................................154

Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................155

Color Options.....................................................................................................................155

Automatic..........................................................................................................155

Manual..............................................................................................................155

General.............................................................................................................156

Neutral Grays....................................................................................................157

Halftone.............................................................................................................157

Print in Grayscale..............................................................................................157

Color Themes....................................................................................................................158

RGB Color.........................................................................................................158

Default (sRGB).................................................................................158

None.................................................................................................158

Custom Profile..................................................................................158

CMYK Color (PS Emulation Unidriver only)......................................................158

Default CMYK+.................................................................................158

SWOP...............................................................................................159

Euroscale..........................................................................................159

DIC...................................................................................................159

Custom Profile..................................................................................159

Document preview image..................................................................................................159

Configure tab features .......................................................................................................................160

Printer Model.....................................................................................................................161

Paper Handling Options.....................................................................................................162

Duplexing unit...................................................................................................162

Allow Manual Duplexing....................................................................................162

Mopier Enabled ................................................................................................163

Mopier mode and collation...............................................................163

Optional Paper Sources ...................................................................................163

Other Options....................................................................................................................164

Storage..............................................................................................................164

Fonts.................................................................................................................165

Allow Scaling from Large Paper........................................................................166

Alternative Letterhead Mode.............................................................................166

Ignore Application Collation..............................................................................166

Printer Memory..................................................................................................166

Include Types in Application Source List .........................................................167

Automatic configuration.....................................................................................................167

Printer image.....................................................................................................................167

HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features.......................................................................168

Access to print-driver settings in Windows 98 and Windows Me.......................................168

PS 3 emulation support for the HP Color LaserJet 3000...................................................168

Help system.......................................................................................................................169

What's this Help................................................................................................169

Context-sensitive Help......................................................................................169

Paper tab features.............................................................................................................169

vii

viii

Paper size.........................................................................................................170

Layout...............................................................................................................171

Orientation.........................................................................................................172

Paper source.....................................................................................................172

Copies...............................................................................................................172

Unprintable Area…............................................................................................172

More Options….................................................................................................173

About …............................................................................................................173

Restore Defaults...............................................................................................174

Graphics tab features........................................................................................................174

Resolution ........................................................................................................175

Color Control.....................................................................................................175

Halftoning..........................................................................................................176

Special..............................................................................................................176

Scaling..............................................................................................................176

Restore Defaults...............................................................................................176

Fonts tab features..............................................................................................................177

Send TrueType fonts to printer according to the Font Substitution Table.........177

Font Substitution Table.....................................................................177

Always use built-in printer fonts instead of TrueType fonts...............................178

Always use TrueType fonts...............................................................................178

Send Fonts As…..............................................................................178

Restore Defaults...............................................................................179

Device Options tab features..............................................................................................179

Available printer memory..................................................................................181

Printer features..................................................................................................181

HPPJLEncoding...............................................................................182

Economode......................................................................................182

Job storage.......................................................................................182

User Name.......................................................................................184

PIN digit 1 (for Private Job)..............................................................184

PIN digit 2 (for Private Job)..............................................................184

PIN digit 3 (for Private Job)..............................................................184

PIN digit 4 (for Private Job)..............................................................184

Print Color as Gray...........................................................................184

Collate..............................................................................................184

Fit to Page........................................................................................185

Color Options....................................................................................185

Color Themes for RGB Color...........................................................185

Color Themes for CMYK Color.........................................................185

Edge Control.....................................................................................186

Text Neutral Grays...........................................................................186

Text Halftone....................................................................................186

Graphic Neutral Grays......................................................................186

Graphic Halftone...............................................................................187

Photographs Neutral Grays..............................................................187

Photographs Halftone.......................................................................187

Watermark (Pages per Sheet)..........................................................187

Print Watermark................................................................................187

Watermark........................................................................................187

ENWW

Watermark Font................................................................................188

Watermark Size................................................................................188

Watermark Angle..............................................................................188

Watermark Style...............................................................................188

Watermark Color..............................................................................189

Watermark Intensity..........................................................................189

Using job-storage features when printing..........................................................189

Releasing a job-storage print job......................................................190

Deleting a job-storage print job.........................................................190

Installable options.............................................................................................190

Tray 3...............................................................................................191

Duplex Unit (for 2-sided Printing).....................................................191

Mopier Mode.....................................................................................191

Printer Hard Disk..............................................................................191

Job storage.......................................................................................192

VMOption. This option shows the amount of virtual memory (RAM) in the product....................................................................................192

Restore Defaults...............................................................................................192

PostScript tab features......................................................................................................192

PostScript output format....................................................................................193

PostScript header..............................................................................................194

Print PostScript error information......................................................................194

PostScript timeout values..................................................................................194

Advanced….......................................................................................................194

PostScript Language Level...............................................................195

Bitmap compression.........................................................................195

Data format.......................................................................................196

Send CTRL+D before job.................................................................196

Send CTRL+D after job ...................................................................196

Restore Defaults...............................................................................................196

4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows

Introduction.........................................................................................................................................197

Access to print drivers........................................................................................................................199

Printing Preferences driver tabs........................................................................................199

Properties driver tabs.........................................................................................................200

Help system........................................................................................................................................201

What's this? Help...............................................................................................................201

Context-sensitive Help.......................................................................................................201

Incompatible Print Settings messages...............................................................................201

Advanced tab features.......................................................................................................................203

Paper/Output.....................................................................................................................204

Copy Count ......................................................................................................204

Collated.............................................................................................................204

Graphic..............................................................................................................................205

Image Color Management.................................................................................205

True Type Font..................................................................................................205

Document Options.............................................................................................................205

Advanced Printing Features..............................................................................205

Print Optimizations ...........................................................................................206

ENWW ix

x

PostScript Options............................................................................................206

Printer Features................................................................................................207

Layout Options..................................................................................................208

Paper/Quality tab features..................................................................................................................209

Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................210

Default Print Settings........................................................................................210

User Guide Print Settings..................................................................................213

Type new Quick Set name here .......................................................................214

Paper Options....................................................................................................................214

Size is................................................................................................................215

Custom Paper Size...........................................................................................215

Name................................................................................................216

Paper size.........................................................................................216

Units.................................................................................................217

Custom width and height control limits.............................................217

Source is...........................................................................................................217

Type is...............................................................................................................218

Use Different Paper/Covers...............................................................................................219

Front Cover.......................................................................................................219

First Page..........................................................................................................220

Other Pages......................................................................................................221

Last Page..........................................................................................................222

Back Cover........................................................................................................223

Document preview image..................................................................................................225

Print Quality.......................................................................................................................225

EconoMode.......................................................................................................225

HP Digital Imaging............................................................................................225

Effects tab features............................................................................................................................228

Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................229

Resizing Options................................................................................................................229

Actual Size........................................................................................................229

Print Document On ...........................................................................................229

Scale to Fit .......................................................................................................229

% of Normal Size..............................................................................................230

Document preview image..................................................................................................230

Watermarks.......................................................................................................................231

Current watermarks...........................................................................................232

Watermark Message.........................................................................................232

Message Angle.................................................................................................232

Font Attributes...................................................................................................233

Default watermark settings................................................................................234

Finishing tab features.........................................................................................................................235

Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................236

Document Options.............................................................................................................236

Print on Both Sides...........................................................................................236

Automatically printing on both sides ................................................237

Manually printing on both sides........................................................237

Flip Pages Up....................................................................................................239

Booklet layout....................................................................................................239

Book and Booklet Printing................................................................239

ENWW

ENWW

Pages per Sheet...............................................................................................240

Print Page Borders............................................................................................240

Page Order........................................................................................................240

Document preview image..................................................................................................241

Orientation.........................................................................................................................241

Job Storage tab features....................................................................................................................243

Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................245

Status group box................................................................................................................246

Job Storage Mode.............................................................................................................246

Off.....................................................................................................................246

Proof and Hold .................................................................................................246

Private Job........................................................................................................247

Quick Copy........................................................................................................247

Stored Job.........................................................................................................247

Require PIN.......................................................................................................................248

Job Notification Options.....................................................................................................248

User Name.........................................................................................................................248

Job Name..........................................................................................................................249

Using job-storage features when printing..........................................................................249

Releasing a job-storage print job......................................................................250

Deleting a job-storage print job.........................................................................250

Color tab features...............................................................................................................................251

Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................252

Color Options.....................................................................................................................252

Automatic..........................................................................................................252

Manual..............................................................................................................252

General.............................................................................................................253

Neutral Grays....................................................................................................254

Halftone.............................................................................................................254

Color Themes....................................................................................................................254

Default (sRGB)..................................................................................................255

None..................................................................................................................255

Custom Profile...................................................................................................255

Document preview image..................................................................................................255

Services tab features..........................................................................................................................256

Internet Services................................................................................................................257

Device services..................................................................................................................257

Device Settings tab features..............................................................................................................258

Form to Tray Assignment..................................................................................................259

Font Substitution Table......................................................................................................259

External Fonts....................................................................................................................260

Installing external fonts.....................................................................................261

Removing external fonts...................................................................................261

PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings............................................................................262

Available PostScript Memory............................................................................262

Output Protocol.................................................................................................262

Send Ctrl-D Before Each Job............................................................................263

Send Ctrl-D After Each Job ..............................................................................263

Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray...............................................................263

Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray.......................................................263

xi

Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts...............................................263

Job Timeout......................................................................................................263

Wait Timeout.....................................................................................................263

Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline.....................................................264

Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline ...................................................264

Installable Options.............................................................................................................264

Automatic Configuration....................................................................................264

Tray 3................................................................................................................265

Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing) ....................................................................265

Allow Manual Duplexing....................................................................................265

Printer Memory..................................................................................................265

Printer Hard Disk...............................................................................................265

Job storage.......................................................................................................265

Mopier Mode.....................................................................................................265

Mopier mode and collation................................................................................266

Postscript Passthrough (PS Emulation Unidriver only).....................................266

About tab features..............................................................................................................................268

5 Installing Windows printing-system components

Introduction.........................................................................................................................................269

Font support.......................................................................................................................................270

Basic fonts ........................................................................................................................270

Default fonts.......................................................................................................................270

Installation instructions.......................................................................................................................276

General installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, and XP operating systems ....................276

Installing from the printing-system CD..............................................................276

Installing from a network or from downloaded files ..........................................276

Detailed Windows installation............................................................................................277

Using the Help, Back, Next, and Cancel buttons..............................................277

Modifying a pre-existing installation..................................................................278

Direct-connect installation through a USB or parallel port................................278

Basic, Full, and Custom Installation dialog box sequence ...............................278

Installing print drivers by using Add Printer.......................................................299

Installer Customization Wizard for Windows.....................................................300

Running the Installer Customization Wizard.....................................300

Dialogs..............................................................................................301

Distribution........................................................................................313

Point and Print installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, XP, and Server

2003..................................................................................................................313

Setting a default printer......................................................................................................314

6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems

Introduction.........................................................................................................................................315

Macintosh component descriptions....................................................................................................316

HP LaserJet PPDs.............................................................................................................316

PDEs..................................................................................................................................316

HP Embedded Web Server...............................................................................................316

Install notes........................................................................................................................316

Online help.........................................................................................................................316

Screen fonts.......................................................................................................................317

xii ENWW

Installing the Macintosh printing system.............................................................................................318

Installing the HP LaserJet printing-system software for the Macintosh OS.......................318

Setting up an AppleTalk networked printer with Mac OS 9. V9.2.2 (Mac OS X

Classic)..............................................................................................................................319

Setting up a printer with Mac OS X V10.4.........................................................................320

Setting up a printer with Mac OS X V10.3.........................................................................327

Setting up an IP/LPR networked Printer with Mac OS 9.x.................................................328

Uninstalling the Macintosh printing system........................................................................................329

In-box disk layout...............................................................................................................................330

Mac OS X Classic installation............................................................................................................331

Main Install dialog-box sequence......................................................................................331

Mac OS X installation.........................................................................................................................332

Main Install dialog box sequence.......................................................................................332

7 Engineering Details

Introduction.........................................................................................................................................337

File to E-mail utility.............................................................................................................................338

HP Easy Printer Care.........................................................................................................................340

Availability..........................................................................................................................340

Uninstall options................................................................................................................340

HP Software Update..........................................................................................................340

Media attributes..................................................................................................................................341

Media sources and destinations........................................................................................341

Media-source commands..................................................................................................341

Driver-supported media sizes............................................................................................342

Driver-supported media types............................................................................................343

Custom paper sizes...........................................................................................................344

Media-type commands......................................................................................................345

Remote firmware update ...................................................................................................................346

Determining the current level of firmware .........................................................................346

Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site......................................................346

Downloading the new firmware to the product...................................................................346

Printer messages during the firmware update ..................................................................347

Downloading custom color profiles....................................................................................348

Remote firmware update by using FTP through a browser...............................................349

Remote firmware update by using FTP on a direct network connection...........................350

Windows operating systems.............................................................................350

Macintosh operating systems............................................................................351

Remote firmware update through a local Windows port ...................................................352

Windows 98 or Windows Me.............................................................................352

Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or

Windows Server 2003 ......................................................................................353

Remote firmware update through a USB port....................................................................354

Remote firmware update through a Windows network .....................................................354

Remote firmware update for UNIX systems .....................................................................355

Remote firmware update by using the HP Printer Utility....................................................355

Remote firmware update by using the HP LaserJet Utility (Mac OS 9.x only)...................356

Remote firmware update by using the LPR command .....................................................357

Remote firmware update through HP Web Jetadmin .......................................................357

Printing print-ready documents .........................................................................................................359

ENWW xiii

Print-ready file printing by using FTP through a browser...................................................359

Print-ready file printing by using FTP on a direct network connection...............................359

Windows operating systems.............................................................................360

Macintosh operating systems............................................................................361

Print-ready printing by using a local Windows port............................................................361

Windows 98 or Windows Me.............................................................................362

Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or

Windows Server 2003.......................................................................................362

Print-ready file printing in a Windows network...................................................................363

Print-ready file printing in UNIX systems...........................................................................363

Print-ready file printing by using the LPR command .........................................................363

Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems...................................................................364

Job-stream output .............................................................................................................364

PCL 6 raster compression ................................................................................................364

PJL/PJL Encoding.............................................................................................................365

Job tracking.......................................................................................................................365

Connectivity/Printing..........................................................................................................366

Bidirectional communication .............................................................................................366

HP Driver Preconfiguration ...............................................................................................367

Bundle support...................................................................................................................367

Tray and paper assignment...............................................................................................368

Installable options .............................................................................................................368

Printer services .................................................................................................................369

UI features ........................................................................................................................369

Help features ....................................................................................................................369

Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................370

Media sizes........................................................................................................................370

Media types.......................................................................................................................371

Job storage .......................................................................................................................371

Print quality and resolution................................................................................................372

Reordering Options............................................................................................................372

Resizing options................................................................................................................373

Color settings.....................................................................................................................373

Watermarks ......................................................................................................................374

Alternative source/paper type............................................................................................374

Printing destination............................................................................................................375

Finishing options and duplexing........................................................................................375

Other document options....................................................................................................375

Font support.......................................................................................................................376

Postscript-specific features................................................................................................376

Index...................................................................................................................................................................379

xiv ENWW

List of tables

Table 4-3

Table 4-4

Table 4-5

Table 5-1

Table 5-2

Table 6-1

Table 7-1

Table 7-2

Table 7-3

Table 7-4

Table 7-5

Table 7-6

Table 7-7

Table 2-3

Table 2-4

Table 2-5

Table 2-6

Table 2-7

Table 3-1

Table 3-2

Table 3-3

Table 3-4

Table 3-5

Table 3-6

Table 3-7

Table 3-8

Table 4-1

Table 4-2

Table 1-1

Table 1-2

Table 1-3

Table 1-4

Table 1-5

Table 1-6

Table 1-7

Table 1-8

Table 1-9

Table 2-1

Table 2-2

Software technical reference overview...........................................................................................1

HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer features.........................................................................................4

Software component availability for HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer............................................10

CD AM – Americas and Europe....................................................................................................13

CD WE – Western Europe............................................................................................................14

CD NE – Northern Europe, Arabic, and Russian..........................................................................15

CD EE – Eastern Europe..............................................................................................................16

CD AS – Asia................................................................................................................................17

Documentation availability............................................................................................................18

Print drivers included with the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer.....................................................28

Availability of automatic discovery and driver configuration through bidirectional communication in Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003..................................31

EAC availability in Microsoft Windows and Microsoft Share.........................................................32

EAC availability in Novell Netware environments ........................................................................33

Operating systems that support HP Driver Preconfiguration .......................................................36

Color access control tools.............................................................................................................38

Printer Usage Report....................................................................................................................56

Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer..............................107

Page orientation..........................................................................................................................113

Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks...............................................................127

Name drop-down menu text strings............................................................................................132

PCL 6 custom media sizes .........................................................................................................133

Close dialog-box text strings.......................................................................................................134

Printer-model configuration settings............................................................................................161

Driver Mopier mode and collation settings..................................................................................163

Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer..............................211

PCL 6 custom media sizes..........................................................................................................217

Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks...............................................................234

Page orientation..........................................................................................................................239

Driver mopier mode and collation settings .................................................................................266

Default fonts................................................................................................................................270

Additional PS emulation fonts.....................................................................................................272

Adding a printer in Macintosh operating systems.......................................................................319

HP Color LaserJet 3000 media sources and destinations .........................................................341

Media-source commands ...........................................................................................................341

Supported media sizes and attributes.........................................................................................342

Supported input media types......................................................................................................343

PCL 6 custom media sizes .........................................................................................................344

Media-type commands................................................................................................................345

Troubleshooting a firmware update ............................................................................................347

ENWW xv

Table 7-8 Troubleshooting a firmware update failure .................................................................................347

Table 7-9 Update messages.......................................................................................................................348

Table 7-10 Driver support for the job-stream output feature.........................................................................364

Table 7-11 PCL 6 color raster compression support ....................................................................................364

Table 7-12 Printer Job Language (PJL) and PJL encoding..........................................................................365

Table 7-13 Driver support for job tracking.....................................................................................................365

Table 7-14 Driver support for connectivity features ......................................................................................366

Table 7-15 Driver support for the bidirectional communication features ......................................................366

Table 7-16 Driver support for HP Driver Preconfiguration ............................................................................367

Table 7-17 Bundle support............................................................................................................................367

Table 7-18 Tray and paper assignment........................................................................................................368

Table 7-19 Driver support for installable options...........................................................................................368

Table 7-20 Printer services (Services tab)....................................................................................................369

Table 7-21 Driver support for UI features......................................................................................................369

Table 7-22 Driver support for Help features..................................................................................................369

Table 7-23 Driver support for Print Task Quick Sets.....................................................................................370

Table 7-24 Driver support for media sizes....................................................................................................370

Table 7-25 Driver support for media types....................................................................................................371

Table 7-26 Driver support for the job-storage features ................................................................................371

Table 7-27 Print-quality and resolution features ...........................................................................................372

Table 7-28 Driver support for the reordering options....................................................................................372

Table 7-29 Resizing options..........................................................................................................................373

Table 7-30 Color settings..............................................................................................................................373

Table 7-31 Driver support for watermarks feature ........................................................................................374

Table 7-32 Driver support for the alternate source/paper type feature.........................................................374

Table 7-33 Driver support for the printing-destination feature.......................................................................375

Table 7-34 Duplexing....................................................................................................................................375

Table 7-35 Other document options..............................................................................................................375

Table 7-36 Font support................................................................................................................................376

Table 7-37 Driver support for postscript-specific features ............................................................................376

xvi ENWW

List of figures

Figure 1-1

Figure 2-1

Figure 2-2

Figure 2-3

Figure 2-4

Figure 2-5

Figure 2-6

Installation software CD printer-documentation screen................................................................18

Installation software CD browser..................................................................................................25

My HP Printers screen..................................................................................................................44

Step 1 of 3: Start Search screen...................................................................................................45

Advanced Search Settings screen................................................................................................45

Searching for printers, please wait.. screen..................................................................................46

Step 2 of 3: Verify Printer Found screen.......................................................................................46

Figure 2-7

Figure 2-8

Step 2 of 3: Select Printers screen................................................................................................47

Step 3 of 3: Customize Settings screen........................................................................................47

Figure 2-9 Alert Settings screen.....................................................................................................................48

Figure 2-10 MY HP Printers — HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer......................................................................49

Figure 2-11 Overview tab.................................................................................................................................50

Figure 2-12 HP Easy Printer Care Help screen................................................................................................51

Figure 2-13 Supplies Ordering screen..............................................................................................................52

Figure 2-14 Transfer printer information to HP InstantSupport? screen...........................................................52

Figure 2-15 Welcome to HP SureSupply screen..............................................................................................53

Figure 2-16 Support tab....................................................................................................................................54

Figure 2-17 Support Help screen.....................................................................................................................55

Figure 2-18 Welcome to HP Software Update screen......................................................................................57

Figure 2-19 Checking for updates… screen.....................................................................................................57

Figure 2-20 HP EWS Information tab – Device Status screen.........................................................................62

Figure 2-21 HP EWS Information tab – Configuration Page screen, 1 of 3.....................................................63

Figure 2-22 HP EWS Information tab – Configuration Page screen, 2 of 3.....................................................64

Figure 2-23 HP EWS Information tab – Configuration Page screen, 3 of 3.....................................................64

Figure 2-24 HP EWS Settings tab – Configure Device screen.........................................................................66

Figure 2-25 HP EWS Settings tab – Alerts screen, 1 of 2................................................................................67

Figure 2-26 HP EWS Settings tab – Alerts screen, 2 of 2................................................................................68

Figure 2-27 HP EWS Settings tab – Security screen.......................................................................................69

Figure 2-28 HP EWS Networking tab – Network Settings screen....................................................................71

Figure 2-29 Select Printer screen – printer not selected..................................................................................74

Figure 2-30 Connection Type screen...............................................................................................................75

Figure 2-31 Select Printer screen – printer selected........................................................................................76

Figure 2-32 Printer Status screen.....................................................................................................................77

Figure 2-33 Supplies Status screen.................................................................................................................78

Figure 2-34 Supplies Information screen..........................................................................................................78

Figure 2-35 Order Supplies link........................................................................................................................79

Figure 2-36 Paper Status screen......................................................................................................................80

Figure 2-37 Device Information screen............................................................................................................81

Figure 2-38 HP Online Support screen............................................................................................................82

Figure 2-39 HP Instant Support link.................................................................................................................82

ENWW xvii

Figure 2-40 Upload Fonts screen.....................................................................................................................83

Figure 2-41 File Upload screen........................................................................................................................84

Figure 2-42 Print Color Usage Job Log screen................................................................................................85

Figure 2-43 Trays Configuration screen...........................................................................................................86

Figure 2-44 Lock Resources screen.................................................................................................................87

Figure 2-45 Enable Job Storing screen............................................................................................................88

Figure 2-46 E-mail Alerts screen......................................................................................................................89

Figure 2-47 IP Settings screen.........................................................................................................................90

Figure 2-48 Rendezvous screen......................................................................................................................91

Figure 2-49 Replace Supplies screen..............................................................................................................92

Figure 2-50 Restrict Color Use screen.............................................................................................................93

Figure 2-51 Restrict Color Use – User tab.......................................................................................................94

Figure 2-52 Restrict Color – new user..............................................................................................................94

Figure 2-53 Restrict Color Use – Application tab.............................................................................................95

Figure 2-54 Restrict Color – new user..............................................................................................................95

Figure 2-55 Additional Settings screen.............................................................................................................96

Figure 3-1 A typical constraint message with an OK button.........................................................................103

Figure 3-2

Figure 3-3

A typical page with a Bubble Help icon.......................................................................................104

The default Finishing tab.............................................................................................................105

Figure 3-4

Figure 3-5

Figure 3-6

Figure 3-7

Print on Both Sides Instructions dialog box.................................................................................112

Printing a booklet........................................................................................................................114

Page-order preview images .......................................................................................................115

Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver...........................................116

Figure 3-8

Figure 3-9

Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver...........................................118

Effects tab...................................................................................................................................120

Figure 3-10 Preview images – Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right).......................................121

Figure 3-11 Watermark Details dialog box.....................................................................................................124

Figure 3-12 Paper tab ....................................................................................................................................128

Figure 3-13 Paper Options group box (default)..............................................................................................129

Figure 3-14 Custom Paper Size dialog box....................................................................................................130

Figure 3-15 Front Cover options.....................................................................................................................136

Figure 3-16 First Page options ......................................................................................................................137

Figure 3-17 Other Pages options...................................................................................................................138

Figure 3-18 Last Page options.......................................................................................................................139

Figure 3-19 Back Cover setting......................................................................................................................139

Figure 3-20 Job Storage tab...........................................................................................................................144

Figure 3-21 Basics tab....................................................................................................................................150

Figure 3-22 About This Driver dialog box.......................................................................................................152

Figure 3-23 Color tab......................................................................................................................................154

Figure 3-24 Color Settings dialog box............................................................................................................156

Figure 3-25 Configure tab...............................................................................................................................160

Figure 3-26 More Configuration Options dialog box ......................................................................................164

Figure 3-27 Configure Font Cards dialog box................................................................................................165

Figure 3-28 Paper tab.....................................................................................................................................170

Figure 3-29 Custom-designed size dialog box...............................................................................................171

Figure 3-30 Page dimensions in inches.........................................................................................................172

Figure 3-31 Unprintable Area dialog box........................................................................................................173

Figure 3-32 More Paper Options dialog box...................................................................................................173

Figure 3-33 About dialog box.........................................................................................................................174

Figure 3-34 Graphics tab................................................................................................................................175

xviii ENWW

Figure 3-35 Image Color Management dialog box.........................................................................................176

Figure 3-36 Fonts tab.....................................................................................................................................177

Figure 3-37 Font Substitution Table ..............................................................................................................178

Figure 3-38 Send Fonts As… dialog box........................................................................................................178

Figure 3-39 Device Options tab......................................................................................................................180

Figure 3-40 PostScript tab..............................................................................................................................193

Figure 3-41 Advanced PostScript Options dialog box....................................................................................195

Figure 4-1

Figure 4-2

Figure 4-3

Figure 4-4

Figure 4-5

Figure 4-6

Figure 4-7

Figure 4-8

An Incompatible Print Settings message....................................................................................202

The default appearance of the Advanced tab ............................................................................203

Paper/Quality tab........................................................................................................................209

Paper Options group box............................................................................................................214

Custom Paper Size dialog box....................................................................................................216

Front Cover options.....................................................................................................................219

First Page options.......................................................................................................................221

Other Pages options...................................................................................................................222

Figure 4-9 Last Page options.......................................................................................................................223

Figure 4-10 Back Cover options.....................................................................................................................224

Figure 4-11 HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box........................................................................................226

Figure 4-12 Effects tab...................................................................................................................................228

Figure 4-13 Preview images – Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right) ......................................230

Figure 4-14 Watermark Details dialog box.....................................................................................................231

Figure 4-15 Finishing tab................................................................................................................................235

Figure 4-16 Print on Both Sides Instructions dialog box.................................................................................238

Figure 4-17 Page-order preview images .......................................................................................................241

Figure 4-18 Job Storage tab...........................................................................................................................245

Figure 4-19 Color tab......................................................................................................................................251

Figure 4-20 Color Settings dialog box............................................................................................................253

Figure 4-21 Services tab................................................................................................................................256

Figure 4-22 Device Settings tab.....................................................................................................................258

Figure 4-23 Font Substitution Table ..............................................................................................................260

Figure 4-24 HP Font Installer dialog box .......................................................................................................261

Figure 4-25 About tab.....................................................................................................................................268

Figure 5-1 Are you sure you want to cancel the installation? dialog box......................................................277

Figure 5-2

Figure 5-3

Cancel dialog box........................................................................................................................277

Language Selection dialog box...................................................................................................278

Figure 5-4

Figure 5-5

Figure 5-6

Figure 5-7

Welcome to the HP Color LaserJet 3000 Setup Wizard dialog box ...........................................279

Setup Error – Unsupported Operating System...........................................................................279

Software License Agreement dialog box.....................................................................................280

Printer Connection dialog box.....................................................................................................280

Figure 5-8

Figure 5-9

Searching dialog box...................................................................................................................281

Firewall Detected dialog box.......................................................................................................282

Figure 5-10 Printer Not Found dialog box......................................................................................................283

Figure 5-11 Printers Found dialog box...........................................................................................................284

Figure 5-12 Printer Found dialog box.............................................................................................................285

Figure 5-13 Confirm Network Settings dialog box..........................................................................................285

Figure 5-14 Confirm Changing Setting dialog box..........................................................................................286

Figure 5-15 Check Printer Connection dialog box..........................................................................................287

Figure 5-16 Specify Printer dialog box...........................................................................................................287

Figure 5-17 Printer Settings dialog box..........................................................................................................288

Figure 5-18 Set Port Name dialog box...........................................................................................................289

ENWW xix

Figure 5-19 Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box............................................................................................290

Figure 5-20 Installation Type dialog box.........................................................................................................290

Figure 5-21 Drivers dialog box.......................................................................................................................291

Figure 5-22 Driver Details dialog box.............................................................................................................292

Figure 5-23 Additional Software dialog box....................................................................................................292

Figure 5-24 Additional software Details dialog box........................................................................................293

Figure 5-25 Ready to Install dialog box .........................................................................................................294

Figure 5-26 Printer PropertiesGeneraltab......................................................................................................294

Figure 5-27 Printer Properties Sharing tab.....................................................................................................295

Figure 5-28 Additional Drivers dialog box.......................................................................................................296

Figure 5-29 Installing dialog box.....................................................................................................................296

Figure 5-30 Finish dialog box.........................................................................................................................297

Figure 5-31 HP Color LaserJet 3000 Next Steps dialog box..........................................................................297

Figure 5-32 Test Page dialog box..................................................................................................................298

Figure 5-33 HP Registration screen...............................................................................................................299

Figure 5-34 Welcome to the HP Color LaserJet 3000 Installation Customization Wizard screen..................301

Figure 5-35 Language Selection dialog box...................................................................................................301

Figure 5-36 Installer Customization Wizard Welcome dialog box..................................................................302

Figure 5-37 Language dialog box...................................................................................................................302

Figure 5-38 Printer Port dialog box.................................................................................................................303

Figure 5-39 Browse for Printer dialog box......................................................................................................304

Figure 5-40 Printer Connection dialog box.....................................................................................................304

Figure 5-41 Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box...................................................................................................305

Figure 5-42 Port Creation Options dialog box................................................................................................306

Figure 5-43 Drivers dialog box.......................................................................................................................306

Figure 5-44 Driver Details dialog box.............................................................................................................307

Figure 5-45 Additional Software dialog box....................................................................................................308

Figure 5-46 Additional software Details dialog box........................................................................................308

Figure 5-47 Custom Installer Location dialog box..........................................................................................309

Figure 5-48 Ready to Create Installer dialog box...........................................................................................309

Figure 5-49 Printer Properties General tab....................................................................................................310

Figure 5-50 Printer Properties Sharing tab.....................................................................................................311

Figure 5-51 Additional Drivers dialog box.......................................................................................................311

Figure 5-52 Installing dialog box.....................................................................................................................312

Figure 5-53 Finish dialog box.........................................................................................................................312

Figure 6-1

Figure 6-2

Figure 6-3

Figure 6-4

Printer Browser screen................................................................................................................320

Installable Options screen...........................................................................................................321

Printer Browser screen – Default Browser tab............................................................................323

More Printers screen...................................................................................................................324

Figure 6-5

Figure 6-6

Figure 6-7

Figure 6-8

IP Printer tab...............................................................................................................................325

Printer List screen.......................................................................................................................326

Select Printer screen...................................................................................................................327

hp LaserJet 3000 CD-ROM icon.................................................................................................332

Figure 6-9 hp LaserJet Software screen......................................................................................................332

Figure 6-10 HP Color LaserJet v.5.5.0.040 icon............................................................................................332

Figure 6-11 Authenticate dialog box...............................................................................................................333

Figure 6-12 HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer startup-screen dialog box ..................................................333

Figure 6-13 License dialog box......................................................................................................................334

Figure 6-14 Easy Install dialog box................................................................................................................334

Figure 6-15 HP LaserJet Installer dialog box (custom install) .......................................................................335

xx ENWW

Figure 6-16 Installing dialog box ....................................................................................................................335

Figure 6-17 LaserJet ReadMe icon................................................................................................................336

Figure 6-18 Installation success message.....................................................................................................336

Figure 7-1 File to E-mail – sample e-mail message with files attached........................................................339

ENWW xxi

xxii ENWW

1 Purpose and scope

Introduction

This software technical reference (STR) provides information about and troubleshooting tips for the

HP Color LaserJet 3000 printing-system software.

This STR is prepared in an electronic format to serve as a quick-reference tool for Customer Care Center

(CCC) agents, support engineers, system administrators, management information systems (MIS) personnel, and HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer end users, as appropriate.

The following information is included in this STR:

Descriptions of drivers and platforms, with system modifications

Procedures for installing and uninstalling software components

Descriptions of various topics that are associated with the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer, including engineering details

The following table describes the structure of this STR.

Table 1-1

Software technical reference overview

Chapter

Chapter 1, Purpose and scope

Chapter 2, Software description

Content

This chapter contains basic information about the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer and its software:

Overview of the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer

Printing-system software overview, including the following topics:

System requirements

Supported operating systems

Availability

● HP LaserJet software documentation

This chapter provides an overview of the printing-system software installer and print drivers.

This chapter also contains general information about other software features, including the following topics:

Driver configuration for Windows®

● HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool

ENWW Introduction 1

Table 1-1

Software technical reference overview (continued)

Chapter Content

Chapter 3, HP traditional print drivers for

Windows

Chapter 4, HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows

International Color Consortium (ICC) profiles

PANTONE*® color profiles

HP Easy Printer Care (a new HP software feature for Windows operating systems)

HP Embedded Web Server

HP Printer Utility for Macintosh (a new HP software feature for Mac OS X)

● HP Web Jetadmin

This chapter provides detailed descriptions of the HP traditional PCL 6, PCL 5, and postscript emulation print drivers for Windows 98 and Windows Millennium

Edition (Windows Me).

This chapter also contains information about using job-storage features when printing, including the following topics:

Releasing a job-storage print job

● Deleting a job-storage print job

This chapter provides detailed descriptions of the HP traditional PCL 6, PCL 5, and postscript emulation print unidrivers for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and

Windows Server 2003.

Chapter 5, Installing Windows printingsystem components

Chapter 6, Installation for Macintosh operating systems

Chapter 7, Engineering details

This chapter also contains information about using job-storage features when printing, including the following topics:

● Releasing a job-storage print job

Deleting a job-storage print job

This chapter provides instructions for installing the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer in Windows operating systems by using various installation methods.

This chapter provides Instructions for installing the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer in Macintosh operating systems.

This chapter contains information about the following special topics:

● File to E-mail utility

HP Easy Printer Care

● Media attributes

Remote firmware update

● Printing print-ready documents

Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems

For additional information about the location of information within these chapters, see the table of contents. An index is provided in the back of this STR.

2 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW

Additional detailed information about the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printing-system software is published in an addendum to this STR. The following information is available only in the addendum:

Lists of installed files

System-modification information, such as changes to the registry and registry keys

● Descriptions of known software issues and solutions

ENWW Introduction 3

HP Color LaserJet 3000

The following table contains descriptions of the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer features that are discussed in this STR. Product configurations might vary among countries/regions.

Table 1-2

HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer features

Models

Performance

Memory

User interface

Supported printer personalities

Hard-disk features

● Base model: HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer (part number Q7533A)

HP Color LaserJet 3000n printer (part number Q7534A)

● HP Color LaserJet 3000dn printer (part number Q7535A)

HP Color LaserJet 3000dtn printer (part number

Q7536A)

● Prints up to 30 pages per minute (ppm) for letter-sized paper and up to 29 ppm for A4-sized paper in monochrome and up to 15 ppm in color.

First page prints in 15 seconds or less. The printer can be set to wake from sleep mode at a specific time each day.

64 megabytes (MB) of memory for the

HP Color LaserJet 3000; 128 MB for the HP Color

LaserJet 3000n; and 256 MB for the HP Color

LaserJet 3000dn and the HP Color LaserJet 3000dtn printer models.

Memory specification: The HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer uses 200-pin small outline dual inline memory modules (SODIMM) that support 128 or 256 MB of random-access memory (RAM).

Two open EIO slots

● Can be expanded to 512 MB of double data-rate synchronous random access memory (DDR-SRAM) plus

32 MB of memory on the formatter board

Optional hard-disk drive can be added in an EIO slot

● Two-line back-lit graphical display on control panel

Enhanced Help with animated graphics

● Embedded Web server to gain access to support and order supplies (network-connected printers)

● HP PCL 6

HP PCL 5c

● PostScript® (PS) 3 emulation

Portable document format (PDF)

● Full job-storage features

Proof and hold

● Private jobs

4 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW

ENWW

Table 1-2

HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer features (continued)

● Quick copy

Stored jobs

Mopier mode

Environmental features

Fonts

Paper handling

Personal identification number (PIN) printing

● Fonts and forms

Sleep-mode setting

● High content of recyclable components and materials

Energy Star® compliant

● Restrictions of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive compliant

Internal fonts are available for both printer command language (PCL) and postscript emulation.

● Printer-matching screen fonts in TrueType® format are available on the printing-system software CD

HP Web Jetadmin-supported forms and fonts are on the disk.

Prints on media sizes from 148 mm x 210 mm (5.83

inches x 8.27 inches) up to 216 mm x 356 mm

(8.5 inches x 14 inches) (Legal size)

Tray 1 can process heavy-weight media from 60 g/m

2

to

220 g/m 2 (16 lb to 60 lb), as well as standard 80-lb cover stock.

● Tray 2 and the optional trays can process media up to

120 g/m 2 (32 lb) in weight

● Prints on a wide range of media types, including HP photo media, glossy papers, transparencies, heavy stock, labels, and envelopes

Features adjustable gloss level on page by choosing the appropriate glossy-media type

● Standard 100-sheet multipurpose paper tray (tray 1) supports Letter, Legal, Executive, 8.5 x 13, B5 (JIS),

Executive (JIS), A4, and custom media

Standard 250-sheet paper feeder (tray 2) supports Letter,

Legal, Executive, 8.5 x 13, B5 (JIS), Executive (JIS), A4, and custom media

● Additional 500-sheet paper feeder (tray 3) supports

Letter, Legal, Executive, 8.5 x 13, B5 (JIS),

Executive (JIS), A4, and custom media

Standard 250-sheet face-down output bin

● The duplexing unit for automatic two-sided printing

(duplexing) is standard on the HP Color LaserJet 3000dn and HP Color LaserJet 3000dtn printers.

Automatic duplexing of 120-g/m 2 (32-lb) paper at full speed produces up to 30 sides (15 sheets) per minute.

HP Color LaserJet 3000 5

Table 1-2

HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer features (continued)

Accessories ● Optional printer hard disk, which provides storage for fonts and macros as well as additional features for job storage

Connectivity

Supplies

Dual inline memory modules (DIMM)

● Flash memory slots for additional fonts and firmware upgrades

Additional 500-sheet paper feeder (tray 3)

● Enhanced input/output (EIO) card slots for optional connectivity (Network connection through an

HP Jetdirect embedded print server is standard on the

HP Color LaserJet 3000n, HP Color LaserJet 3000dn, and HP Color LaserJet 3000dtn models.)

Universal serial bus (USB) 2.0 connection

● HP Jetdirect embedded print server for network connectivity without using an EIO slot

Bidirectional parallel cable interface (IEEE 1284Bcompliant); available with the optional 1284B parallel EIO card (part number J7972G)

The supplies status page contains information about toner level, page count, and estimated pages remaining.

● High-capacity no-shake cartridge with automatic tonerseal removal feature

The printer checks for authentic HP print cartridges when a cartridge is installed.

● Internet-enabled supply-ordering capabilities through the

HP Embedded Web Server

6 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW

Printing-system software

This section contains information about the following topics:

System requirements

Supported operating systems

Availability

System requirements

The section lists system requirements for installing and using the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printingsystem software on each of these supported operating systems:

Windows

Macintosh

Linux

UNIX

Windows

Pentium® or compatible processor

Windows 98, Windows Me, or Windows 2000: 333-MHz processor with 64 MB RAM

Windows XP: 333-MHz processor with 128 MB RAM

● Windows Server 2003: 550-MHz processor with 128 MB RAM (Standard Edition) and 220 MB of available hard-disk space

Minimum 16-color/grayscale display with 640x480 pixel resolution (video graphics array [VGA])

● Onboard parallel port, USB port, or network connection

CD-ROM drive or internet connection

Macintosh

PowerPC processor

Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic), with 96 MB RAM

Mac OS X V10.1.5 and later, with 128 MB RAM and 160 MB of available hard-disk space

CD-ROM drive or internet connection

Linux

For information about Linux support for the printer, see the following HP Linux Web site:

● www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting

ENWW Printing-system software 7

UNIX

For information about UNIX® support for the printer, see the following Web sites:

● www.hp.com/go/jetdirectunix_software

● www.hp.com/go/unixmodelscripts

Supported operating systems

Windows operating systems provide full-featured support for the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer.

Operating systems that are not described in this STR provide varying levels of functionality.

Throughout this STR, Windows XP is used to denote Windows XP Home Edition, Windows XP

Professional, and Windows Server 2003 unless noted otherwise.

Information relating to networking functions is specific to products that have network capabilities.

If the computer is running a 64-bit Windows operating system, you must install the corresponding 64-bit print driver. For instructions, see

Installing print drivers by using Add Printer .

The HP Color LaserJet 3000 has not been tested with and is not supported in the Windows 3.1x or

Windows 95 operating systems.

The Windows NT® 4.0 operating system does not support the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer. Print drivers for the product are not included on the printing-system software CD and are not available on the

Web. Other drivers might work on the printer, but some print-driver features and functions might not be available.

For more information about the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer, go to the following Web site: www.hp.com/support/clj3000

Standalone drivers

The following operating systems support the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printing-system software, including the HP traditional PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation drivers and unidrivers:

Windows 98

Windows Me

Windows 2000 (Service packs 1 and 2)

Windows XP Home Edition (32-bit)

● Windows XP Professional (Service Pack 1 and later; 32-bit and 64-bit)

Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit)

Print driver support in other operating systems

The HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer is also supported in the following operating environments:

Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic)

Mac OS X (V10.1.5 or later)

Linux. For more information, go to the following Web site:

8 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW

ENWW www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting

● UNIX. For more information, go to the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/jetdirectunix_software

UNIX model scripts. Available only on the Web at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/unixmodelscripts .

Windows Terminal Server

Citrix Terminal Server. For more information, go to the following Web site: h20000.ww2.hp.com/bizsupport/TechSupport/Document.jsp

Alternatively, go to the HP.com Web site and search for “c00213455”.

Windows Cluster Server 8

HP OpenVMS. For more information, go to the following Web site: h71000.www7.hp.com/openvms/print/

Tru64 UNIX printing. For more information, go to the following Web site: h30097.www3.hp.com/printing/

SAP printing. For more information, go to the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/sap/print

HP Install Network Printer Wizard (INPW). Available only on the Web at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/inpw_software

Availability

This section provides information about the availability of the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printing-system software and related software and firmware. Printing-system software on a CD is available from

HP fulfillment centers.

Printing-system software on the Web

All software that is contained on the installation CD is also available on the Web.

Web deployment is the preferred method for obtaining the latest software. The Web site offers an option for automatic e-mail notification about new software releases.

NOTE

This STR describes drivers that are shipped with the printing-system software CD. This

STR does not describe any drivers that might be released for use by support personnel.

Printing-system software

The HP Color LaserJet 3000 printing-system software is available for download at www.hp.com/go/ clj3000_software .

Printing-system software 9

NOTE

Only 32-bit print drivers are available on the printing-system software CD. If the computer is running a 64-bit operating system, you must install a 64-bit print driver. The 64-bit print drivers for Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 are available on the Web at www.hp.com/go/ clj3000_software .

For information about driver support in various operating systems, see Supported operating systems .

For more information about installing print drivers for Windows, see

Installing Windows printingsystem components .

Software component availability

The following table lists the availability of HP LaserJet software components by operating system.

These drivers are available at the HP Web site: www.hp.com/go/clj3000_software

NOTE

All of the listed components are available both on the printing-system software CD and on the Web, except for Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 64-bit drivers and components, which are available only on the Web.

Table 1-3

Software component availability for HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer

Component

Drivers

HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver and HP Traditional

PCL 6 Driver

HP PCL 6 Unidriver, HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver, and HP PCL 5 Unidriver

PS Emulation Unidriver x

PS Emulation Driver (Windows 98 and

Windows Me)

HP Driver Preconfiguration x x

Installer

Common Windows Installer

Installer Customization Wizard

CD Browser

Add Printer Wizard install

Web Registration

Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic) postscript printer definition (PPD) files

Mac OS X V10.1.5 and later x x x x x

Windows 98 and

Windows Me

Windows 2000,

Windows Server

2003, and

Windows XP (32bit)

Windows XP and

Windows Server

2003 (64-bit)

Macintosh

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

10 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW

ENWW

NOTE

The HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver is a new driver. It has not been available on legacy HP

LaserJet products.

In-box printing-system software CDs

The software CD for the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer contains a variety of files for installing the printing-system software on the computer. This section describes the files that are available on the software CD and provides additional information about support and availability.

The HP Color LaserJet 3000 printing-system software CD is divided into two partitions, one for each of the following operating systems:

Windows

● Macintosh

The files in each partition include documentation files and files that are required in order to install and uninstall the printing-system components.

HP LaserJet software CD, Windows partition

The root directory in the Windows partition of the software CD contains the AUTORUN.EXE file, the

SETUP.EXE file, and the following directories and support files:

Autorun

● Drivers

Fonts

● HP Easy Printer Care

HP Print Usage Report

● hw

Manuals

● PortMonitor

System32

● Temp

WebReg

The printing-system files for each language reside in the following directories:

Drivers

● Manuals

NOTE

File layouts differ by language for each regional version of the software CD.

To view the files, insert the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printing-system software CD, right-click Start, click

Explore, and then select the CD-ROM drive.

Printing-system software 11

HP LaserJet software CD, Macintosh partition

The files contained in the Macintosh partition of the HP LaserJet software CD are grouped by language and reside in the following directories:

Mac OS X (installer for the Mac OS X operating system)

Mac OS 9 (installer for the Mac OS 9 operating system)

PDF

NOTE

File layouts differ by language for each regional version of the software CD.

CD versions

The HP Color LaserJet 3000 printing-system software CD is available in five versions, each of which contains printing-system software in various languages, as follows:

CD AM – Americas and Europe (Part No. Q7533-60101):

● CA = Catalan (Català)

DE = German (Deutsch)

● EN = English

ES = Spanish (Español)

● FR = French (Français)

IT = Italian (Italiano)

● NL = Dutch (Nederland)

PT = Brazilian Portuguese (Português)

CD WE – Western Europe (Part No. Q7533-60102):

DA = Danish (Dansk)

● EN = English

FI = Finnish (Suomi)

● HE = Hebrew

NO = Norwegian (Norsk)

● SV = Swedish (Svenska)

CD NE – Northern Europe, Arabic, and Russian (Part No. Q7533-60103):

● AR = Arabic

EN = English

● EL = Greek

FR = French (Français)

12 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW

ENWW

RU = Russian (Russ)

● TR = Turkish (Turkçe)

CD EE – Eastern Europe (Part No. Q7533-60104):

CS = Czech (Cesky)

EN = English

HU = Hungarian (Magyar)

PL = Polish (Polski)

● SK = Slovak

CD AS – Asia (Part No. Q7533-60105):

EN = English

ID = Indonesian (Bahasa)

JA = Japanese

KO = Korean

● TH = Thai

ZHCN = Simplified Chinese

ZHTW = Traditional Chinese

Each of the following tables lists one of the software CD versions, along with the printing-system software components that are supported in each language.

NOTE

Drivers for various languages do not necessarily correspond to geographic countries/ regions. European languages, for instance, are distributed on three CDs.

Table 1-4

CD AM – Americas and Europe

Component

HP Traditional Postscript 3

Emulation Driver

HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver

HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver

HP PCL 6 Unidriver

HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver

HP PCL 5 Unidriver

PS Emulation Unidriver

Common Windows Installer

Add Printer Wizard Installer

Installer Customization Wizard x x x x x

CA

x x x x x x x x x

DE

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

EN

x

ES

x

FR

x

IT

x

NL

x

PT

x x x x x x x x x x

Printing-system software 13

Table 1-4

CD AM – Americas and Europe (continued)

Component CA DE EN

CD Browser

HP Easy Printer Care

Printer Usage Report

HP Printer Utility for Macintosh

HP Driver Preconfiguration

Fonts

HP Web Registration

HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3

800 User Guide (.PDF file)

HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3

800 User Guide (.CHM file)

HP Jetdirect Administrator's

Guide

Hewlett-Packard Color

LaserJet 3000/3600/3800

Printing-System Install Notes x

HP Embedded Web Server User

Guide x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

ES

x x x x x x x x x x x

IT

x x x x x x x x x x x

FR

x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Table 1-5

CD WE – Western Europe

Component

HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation

Driver

HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver

HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver

HP PCL 6 Unidriver

HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver

HP PCL 5 Unidriver

PS Emulation Unidriver

Common Windows Installer

Add Printer Wizard Installer

Installer Customization Wizard

CD Browser

HP Easy Printer Care

Printer Usage Report

HP Printer Utility for Macintosh x x x x x x x x x x x x x

DA

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

EN

x

FI

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

HE

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

NO

x

PT

x x x x x x x x x x x

NL

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

SV

x

14 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW

ENWW

Table 1-5

CD WE – Western Europe (continued)

Component DA

HP Driver Preconfiguration

Fonts

HP Web Registration

HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User

Guide (.PDF file) x

HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User

Guide (.CHM file) x

HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide

Hewlett-Packard Color

LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 Printing-

System Install Notes

HP Embedded Web Server User Guide x x x x x x

EN

x x x x x x x x

Table 1-6

CD NE – Northern Europe, Arabic, and Russian

Component

HP Traditional Postscript 3

Emulation Driver

HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver

HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver

HP PCL 6 Unidriver

HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver

HP PCL 5 Unidriver

PS Emulation Unidriver

Common Windows Installer

Add Printer Wizard Installer

Installer Customization Wizard

CD Browser

HP Easy Printer Care

Printer Usage Report

HP Printer Utility for Macintosh

HP Driver Preconfiguration

Fonts

HP Web Registration

HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800

User Guide (.PDF file) x x x x x x x x x x x x

AR

x

EN

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

EL

x x x x

FI

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

FR

x x x x

NO

x x x x x x x

HE

x x x x x x

SV

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

TR

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

RU

x

Printing-system software 15

Table 1-6

CD NE – Northern Europe, Arabic, and Russian (continued)

Component AR EN EL

x x x HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800

User Guide (.CHM file)

HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide

Hewlett-Packard Color

LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 Printing-

System Install Notes

HP Embedded Web Server User

Guide x x x x x

Table 1-7

CD EE – Eastern Europe

Component CS

HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation

Driver

HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver

HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver

HP PCL 6 Unidriver

HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver

HP PCL 5 Unidriver

PS Emulation Unidriver

Common Windows Installer

Add Printer Wizard Installer

Installer Customization Wizard

CD Browser

HP Easy Printer Care

Printer Usage Report

HP Printer Utility for Macintosh

HP Driver Preconfiguration

Fonts

HP Web Registration

HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800

User Guide (.PDF file)

HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800

User Guide (.CHM file)

HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

EN

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

HU

x x x

FR

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

PL

x x x

RU

x x x x x x x x x x x x x

SK

x x

TR

x

16 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW

ENWW

Table 1-7

CD EE – Eastern Europe (continued)

Component CS

x Hewlett-Packard Color

LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 Printing-

System Install Notes

HP Embedded Web Server User

Guide

EN

x x

Table 1-8

CD AS – Asia

Component EN

HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation

Driver x

HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver x

HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver

HP PCL 6 Unidriver

HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver

HP PCL 5 Unidriver

PS Emulation Unidriver

Common Windows Installer x x x x x x

Add Printer Wizard Installer

Installer Customization Wizard

CD Browser

HP Easy Printer Care

Printer Usage Report

HP Printer Utility for Macintosh

HP Driver Preconfiguration

Fonts x x x x x x x x x x

HP Web Registration

HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800

User Guide (.PDF file)

HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800

User Guide (.CHM file)

HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide

Hewlett-Packard Color

LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 Printing-

System Install Notes

HP Embedded Web Server User

Guide x x x x

ID

x x

JA

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

HU

x

PL

x

SK

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

KO

x x x x x x x x x x x x x

TH

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

ZHTW

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

ZHCN

x x

Printing-system software 17

HP LaserJet documentation

The following figure shows the printer-documentation screen, which appears when you click Printer

Documentation on the main screen of the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printing-system software CD.

Figure 1-1

Installation software CD printer-documentation screen

The following table lists the availability of HP Color LaserJet 3000 printing-system documentation by operating system.

Table 1-9

Documentation availability

Document

HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide (.PDF file)

HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide (.CHM file)

Hewlett-Packard Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 Printing-System

Install Notes

HP Embedded Web Server User Guide

HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide

x x x x x

Windows 98/

Me

x x x x x

Windows 2000/XP/

Server 2003

Macintosh

x x x

18 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW

ENWW

Access to HP LaserJet documents depends on the type of document and its location:

● Some documents can be opened from the CD Browser.

Some documents appear on the software CD and can be opened by navigating to the folder where they reside.

● Some documents are available on the Web through links in the CD Browser or CD folders.

Documents are available in the following file formats:

Portable Document Format (.PDF). The HP Color LaserJet 3000 printing-system software CD includes Adobe Acrobat Reader for viewing online documentation.

Compiled HTML (.CHM). When you click a documentation link to a .CHM document, a Microsoft

HTML Viewer opens the file on the computer screen.

Hypertext Markup (.HTM). When you click a documentation link to an .HTM document, a Web browser opens the file on the computer screen.

Rich Text format (.RTF). This is a text file. You can navigate to files and open them in Microsoft

Word or Microsoft WordPad.

HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide

The HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide describes the basic product features.

To view this guide from the software CD, follow these steps:

1.

In the main screen of the CD browser, click Printer Documentation.

2.

Click User Guide (Interactive).

The guide opens as a Windows Help file (.CHM file). This readable, onscreen version of the guide is provided in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).

You can also gain access to the file by following these steps:

1.

Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive.

2.

Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.

3.

Open the file that has the appropriate file name:

CLJ3000_USE_XXWW.CHM

NOTE

The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. For instance, the file name for the French version of the guide is CLJ3000_USE_FRWW.CHM

The HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide is provided as a .PDF file, which you can print. To print the guide, follow these steps:

1.

In the CD Browser, click Printer Documentation.

2.

Click User Guide (Printer Friendly). The guide opens.

3.

Print the guide.

HP LaserJet documentation 19

You can also gain access to the file by following these steps:

1.

Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive.

2.

Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.

3.

Open the file that has the appropriate file name:

CLJ3000_USE_XXWW.PDF

NOTE

The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. For instance, the file name for the French version of the guide is CLJ3000_USE_FRWW.PDF

When you have the file open, you can click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to another location.

Hewlett-Packard Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 Printing-System

Install Notes

The Hewlett-Packard Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 Printing-System Install Notes (in .HTM format) contains important information about product features, instructions for installing the printing-system software, and technical assistance.

To view this guide from the software CD, follow these steps:

1.

In the main screen of the CD browser, click Printer Documentation.

2.

Click Install Notes.

You can also gain access to the file by following these steps:

1.

Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive.

2.

Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.

3.

Open the file that has the appropriate file name:

CLJ3000_INSTALL-NOTE_XXWW.HTM

NOTE

The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. For instance, the file name for the French version of the document is CLJ3000_INSTALL-NOTE_FRWW.HTM.

HP Embedded Web Server User Guide

The HP Embedded Web Server User Guide (in .PDF format) provides information about device status, settings, and networking for the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer.

To view this guide from the software CD, follow these steps:

1.

In the main screen of the CD browser, click Printer Documentation.

2.

Click Embedded Web Server Guide.

20 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW

ENWW

You can also gain access to the file by following these steps:

1.

Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive.

2.

Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.

3.

Open the file that has the appropriate file name:

CLJ3000_EWS_XXWW.PDF

NOTE

The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. In French, the file name is

CLJ3000_EWS_FRWW.PDF.

When you have the file open, you can click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to another location.

HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide

The HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide is a network administrator's guide (in .PDF format) that contains information about connecting the product directly to a network.

To view this guide from the software CD, follow these steps:

1.

In the main screen of the CD browser, click Printer Documentation.

2.

Click HP Jetdirect Guide.

You can also gain access to the file by following these steps:

1.

Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive.

2.

Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.

3.

Open the file that has the appropriate file name:

HPJDIAG_XXWW.PDF

NOTE

The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. In French, the file name is

HPJDIAG_FRWW.PDF.

When you have the file open, you can click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to another location.

HP LaserJet documentation 21

22 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW

2 Software description

Introduction

The HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer comes with software and installers for Microsoft Windows and

Apple Computer, Inc., Macintosh systems. Linux and UNIX systems are supported, and software is available on the Web. For information about specific system installers, drivers, and components, see the section that corresponds to that system.

NOTE

The HP Toolbox is not available on the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer.

This chapter contains information about the following topics:

Printing-system software

Driver Configuration for Windows

HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool

Color Access Control

International Color Consortium profiles

PANTONE color profiles

HP Easy Printer Care

HP Embedded Web Server

HP Printer Utility for Macintosh

HP Web Jetadmin

ENWW Introduction 23

Printing-system software

This section contains information about the following topics:

Windows software features

Macintosh printing-system software

Windows software features

This section contains information about the following topics:

Printing system and installer

HP LaserJet print drivers

Printing system and installer

The following sections contain information about the printing-system software and the installer on the software CD that came with the product.

HP Color LaserJet 3000 printing-system software CD for Windows systems

For the Microsoft Windows environment (Windows 98, Windows Millennium Edition (Windows Me),

Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003), the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printing-system software CD provides an interactive CD browser that you can use to install the print drivers and related components, and to gain access to online user documentation, a customization utility, Adobe® Acrobat®

Reader software, and optional HP software.

The following figure shows the main screen of the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printing-system software

CD, which appears when you insert the printing-system software CD in a CD-ROM drive. If the screen does not appear when you insert the software CD, follow these steps to open the CD browser:

1.

Click Start.

2.

Click Run.

3.

Click Browse…. and navigate to the root directory of the software CD.

4.

Double-click the SETUP.EXE file to start the installer.

24 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

ENWW

Figure 2-1

Installation software CD browser

The main screen of the software CD contains installation options in the upper-left panel and documentation options in the lower-left panel. As you move the cursor over each option, a description of the option appears above the product image.

NOTE

The options on your product might differ from the illustration.

Install Printer. The installation wizard guides you through the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printing-system software installation. You are given the choice of performing a Basic Installation, a Full Installation, or a Custom Installation. If you select Basic Installation, only the necessary software is installed. If you select Custom Installation, you can select the components that you want to install.

Installer Customization Wizard. Use this wizard to customize the HP Color LaserJet 3000 installer by presetting the installation options in a response file. The installer that you have customized can then be used for silent, unattended installation.

HP Easy Printer Care Software. Use this option to install the HP Easy Printer Care. This printer maintenance tool helps track and maintain the printers by providing information about status, alert notifications, usage, and supplies for one or more printers.

Register Product. Use this option to register your product online. After Web registration, you can gain access to support and services, manage your profile, and sign up for free support alerts, driver notices, and personalized newsletters.

Printing-system software 25

Printer Documentation. Use this option to view the HP Color LaserJet 3000 user documentation. The following document options are available when you click this option:

User Guide (Interactive)

User Guide (Printer Friendly)

Install Notes

Embedded Web Server Guide

HP Jetdirect Guide

Color Printing Access and Usage

NOTE

If the system on which you are installing the product does not have Adobe Acrobat

Reader 4.0 or later installed, click any of the links to documentation that is in portable document format (.PDF) to open a version of Adobe Acrobat Reader that runs from the

HP Color LaserJet 3000 printing-system software CD. The CD Browser version of Acrobat

Reader is in English only, but can be used to open localized versions of .PDF documents. The

Adobe Acrobat Reader software is not installed on the computer and can only run while the printing-system software CD is in the CD-ROM drive. Adobe Acrobat Reader is also available at the following Web site: www.adobe.com

.

Support. To increase productivity and get the most use from your HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer, you can view a list of optional software programs and links to HP Web sites. The following options are available:

Click HP Web Jetadmin to download HP Web Jetadmin software from the Web for a Web browserbased network-management tool.

● Click Color Printing Access and Usage to enable or disable color printing and to track color usage.

Click Color Matching Information for information about simulating PANTONE* MATCHING

SYSTEM colors and installing International Color Consortium (ICC) color profiles for the

HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer.

● Click Supplies for information about ordering HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer supplies.

Click Product Information for HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer support information and updates.

● Click hp.com to go to the HP home Web page for information about products and services, support, drivers, and HP online stores.

Installer features

The common installer is designed to provide a simple and consistent installation method for the product.

The common installer is available for the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and

Windows Server 2003 operating systems.

26 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

ENWW

The common installer offers the following features:

● The HP Color LaserJet 3000 printing-system software CD features an interactive software

interface. See HP Color LaserJet 3000 printing-system software CD for Windows systems .

Network connection is integrated so that you can install drivers and connect to a networked product in a single process.

The selection dialog box sets the operating-system language as the default language (for

Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 only). You can use the installer to select any of the languages on the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printing-system software CD.

The HP Color LaserJet 3000 printing-system software CD also includes the following features:

● The HP LaserJet Uninstaller Utility

The HP Customization Utility for custom installations

All of the Windows system components are installed by using the HP Color LaserJet 3000 series printing-system installer. The installer automatically detects the language of choice and the operating system. You can select the type of installation that you prefer: Basic Installation, Full Installation, or

Custom Installation.

HP LaserJet print drivers

HP Color LaserJet 3000 print drivers provide the printing features and communication between the computer and the product. The printing system includes software for end users and network administrators who are working in the following operating environments:

Microsoft Windows 98 and Windows Me

Windows 2000, Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit), and Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit)

Apple Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic), and Mac OS X (V10.1.5 and later)

In Windows operating systems, automatic configuration, driver updates after a new configuration, and preconfiguration features are available with the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer.

NOTE

For the latest information about the printing-system software components, see the readme files on the CD. For additional information about installing the printing-system software, see the Hewlett-Packard Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 Printing-System Install Notes on the printing-system software CD.

All of the drivers provide access to the paper-handling and print-quality features, and are described in chapters 3 and 4 of this STR.

HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation drivers

All of the Windows drivers are supported by Microsoft 32-bit operating systems. Separate versions of the HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers are available for Windows XP and

Windows Server 2003 64-bit operating systems. These 64-bit drivers are not included on the printingsystem software CD, but they can be downloaded from the following HP Web site: www.hp.com/go/clj3000_software

Printing-system software 27

The following drivers are available on the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printing-system software CD:

● The HP PCL 6 Unidriver for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003

HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003

HP PCL 5 Unidriver for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003

The HP Postscript 3 Emulation Unidriver (the PS Emulation Unidriver) for Windows 2000,

Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003

The HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver for Windows 98 and Windows Me

The HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver for Windows 98, and Windows Me

The HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver (the PS Emulation Driver) for Windows 98 and

Windows Me

NOTE

If you select a Full Installation during installation of the printing-system software, the

HP PCL 6 Unidriver is installed by default for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and

Windows Server 2003, and the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver is installed by default for

Windows 98 and Windows Me.

Table 2-1

Print drivers included with the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer

Operating System 1

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS emulation

Windows 98 and Windows Me

Windows 2000

Windows XP

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Windows Server 2003 X X X

1

Macintosh OS X

Not all product features are available from all drivers or operating systems. See the online Help in your driver for information about the features that are available.

Print-driver version numbers for Windows operating systems

Access to print-driver version numbers varies, depending on the operating system in which the

HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer is installed.

NOTE

For a list of HP Color LaserJet 3000 print drivers, updated HP printing-system software, and product-support information, go to: www.hp.com/go/clj3000_software

The Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating systems support the HP PCL 6,

PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers. If you are using an HP unidriver in a Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 environment, follow these steps to find driver-version information:

1.

Click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

28 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

ENWW

3.

Click Printers and Faxes (in Windows XP and Windows Server 2003) or Printers (in Windows

2000).

4.

Right-click the printer icon.

5.

Click Properties.

6.

Click the About tab.

The Windows 98 and Windows Me operating systems support the HP Color LaserJet 3000 PCL 6 and

PCL 5 traditional print drivers and the PS Emulation Driver.

If you are using an HP traditional PCL driver, follow these steps to gain access to the print driver version number:

1.

Click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

3.

Click Printers.

4.

Right-click the product name.

5.

Click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs.

6.

Click the HP logo in the lower-left corner of the following HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver or

HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver tabs:

Finishing

Effects

Paper

Job Storage

Basics

Color

Configure

The PS Emulation Driver software provides postscript feature support for the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer. To gain access to the print-driver version number, follow these steps:

1.

Click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

3.

Click Printers.

4.

Right-click the product name.

5.

Click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs.

6.

Click About.

Macintosh printing-system software

This section discusses the following topics:

Printing-system software 29

Mac OS 9 Classic support

Macintosh printing system

Mac OS 9 Classic support

HP does not fully support Mac OS 9 (Mac OS X Classic). It is not a native operating system but a virtual operating system running on top of Mac OS X (HP software is designed and tested for native operating systems). Additionally, no support is offered for Virtual PC, which is also a virtual operating system.

Information that HP has about specific issues related to the Mac OS X Classic environment or printdriver files can be relayed to customers.

At this time, support offered for Mac OS 9 Classic is on a "best effort" basis. HP understands that because certain Apple computers might not offer native Mac OS 9, Classic is the only option. "Best effort" support will attempt the following:

Installation of the software and hardware

Test installation to verify that the software and hardware work

Limited troubleshooting

When problems arise within the Mac OS X Classic environment, HP uses the following resources to resolve the problem:

Internal resources, such as knowledge-base systems, engineers, and the resource desk

Apple support

The Web

Known solutions

If these resources do not resolve the problem, contact Apple or the virtual-operating-system vendor.

While issues that occur with virtual operating systems are not supported, HP continues to offer full support for its products in native Mac OS 9, where the supplied product software is designed to support

Mac OS 9 and is within the normal support period.

Macintosh printing system

The HP Color LaserJet 3000 printing system for Macintosh is composed of the Print Center for

Mac OS X (V10.1.5 and later) and the Apple LaserWriter driver for Mac OS 9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic), which are provided with the operating system, and HP-created PPD files. The driver uses these files to determine the features and postscript commands that the product supports. Bidirectional support in

AppleTalk connections supports autoconfiguration of the software. The following are components that can be installed:

The HP Color LaserJet Installer for Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic) and Mac OS X V10.1.5

and later

SYSTEM/EXTENSIONS/PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS (for Mac OS X Classic)

LIBRARY/PRINTERS/PPDS/CONTENTS/RESOURCES/LANGUAGE.LPROJ (for Mac OS X)

The HP Printer Selector (for Mac OS X V10.1.5 and later)

Install notes

30 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

Driver Configuration for Windows

The HP LaserJet PCL 6 and PCL 5 traditional drivers for Windows and the HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and

PS emulation unidrivers feature bidirectional communication technology which, in supported environments, provide automatic discovery and driver configuration for product accessories at the time of installation.

Some accessories that are automatically discovered and configured include the duplexing unit, optional paper trays, printer hard disk, and dual inline memory modules (DIMMs).

Driver autoconfiguration

Automatic discovery and driver configuration through bidirectional communication occurs in the following circumstances:

When a print driver is installed by using Enterprise AutoConfiguration (EAC)

When using the Update Now feature for a driver that is already installed

However, as shown in the following table, driver autoconfiguration and EAC are not available in

Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 operating systems over a direct connection when the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer is installed by using the Add Printer Wizard.

Table 2-2

Availability of automatic discovery and driver configuration through bidirectional communication in

Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003

Connection type

Network

Direct connection

Add Printer Wizard install

Yes

No

Common installer

Yes

Yes

Bidirectional communication

In environments that support bidirectional communication, the computer communicates with the product during installation, determines the physical configuration, and then configures the driver accordingly.

Bidirectional communication is the capability of the product to respond to data inquiries from the computer and report information back, such as what type of print media is available or what accessories are connected to the product. Bidirectional communication depends on the network operating system and on the type of connection that exists between the computer and the HP Color LaserJet 3000. If the connection does not have this capability (that is, if it has no bidirectional mode), it can only accept commands from the host and cannot report information back to the host computer.

Enterprise AutoConfiguration

Enterprise AutoConfiguration (EAC) uses bidirectional communication to provide autoconfiguration functionality for installation of the print driver over a network, whether you use the installer on the printingsystem software CD or the Add Printer wizard to install the driver. Driver installation that includes EAC is configured with the same settings as the physical configuration of the product. Configuration occurs without user interaction.

If bidirectional-communication software has been installed previously, EAC is not activated, and the preexisting bidirectional-communication software is used to configure the print driver.

ENWW Driver Configuration for Windows 31

If bidirectional communication software has not been installed, EAC installs bidirectional-communication software that allows it to communicate with the product and automatically match the print driver with the actual product configuration. EAC is activated during installation of the driver or whenever the Update

Now feature is used.

If the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer configuration changes after installation, the driver can be automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that support bidirectional

communication by using the Update Now feature. For more information, see Update Now .

The following tables show the availability of EAC for various operating systems and network environments that support bidirectional communication.

Table 2-3

EAC availability in Microsoft Windows and Microsoft Share

Method Connection type Microsoft Windows

98 Me NT 4.0

2000 XP

Microsoft Share

1

2000/XP host with

2000/XP client

NT 4.0

host with

NT 4.0

client

Installer Direct connect

Network

Parallel

USB

Jetdirect

Standard

TCP/IP x

IPX/SPX x x TCP/IP

(HP)

TCP/IP

(MS)

IPX/SPX

(HP) x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

2

2

2

2

2

Add

Printer

Direct connect

Network

Parallel

USB

Jetdirect

Standard

TCP/IP

IPX/SPX x x

TCP/IP

(HP) x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

2

2

TCP/IP

(MS) x x x x

2

1

2

IPX/SPX

(HP) x x x x x x x

2

This column represents the following Microsoft Share configurations: 1. Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 Server host with Windows NT 4.0, Windows 98, or Windows Me client. 2. Windows NT 4.0 host with Windows 2000, Windows XP,

Windows Server 2003, Windows 98, or Windows Me client. 3. Windows 98 or Windows Me host with any client.

In this environment, client machines use Point and Print to download the configured driver from the host.

32 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

Table 2-4

EAC availability in Novell Netware environments

Method Connection type Novell

Netware 4.x

Bindery queue

NDS queue

Netware 5.x

Bindery queue

NT 4.0

Installer Direct connect Parallel

USB

Network Jetdirect

Standard

TCP/IP

IPX/SPX

TCP/IP (HP)

TCP/IP (MS

1 )

x x x x

1

IPX/SPX (HP)

Bidirectional functionality is supported only with the client software from Novell. It is not supported with Microsoft Client Service for NetWare.

Update Now

If you have modified the configuration of the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer since installation, the driver can be automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that support bidirectional communication. Use the Update Now feature to automatically reflect the new configuration in the driver.

For example, if the product is installed and an optional paper-handling accessory is added later, use the

Update Now feature to query the product and update the settings to match the new product configuration.

The feature automatically updates the registry and changes the configuration information that appears on the Configure tab if you are using an HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver or HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver, and on the Device Settings tab if you are using an HP PCL 6, PCL 5, or PS emulation unidriver.

NOTE

The Update Now feature is not available with the HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation

Driver.

To activate the Update Now feature if you are using an HP PCL 6, PCL 5, or PS emulation unidriver, follow these steps:

1.

Click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

3.

Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows

Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).

4.

Right-click the product name.

5.

Click Printing Preferences.

6.

Click Device Settings.

7.

If necessary, click Installable Options to expand it and show the options.

ENWW Driver Configuration for Windows 33

8.

In the Automatic Configuration drop-down menu, select Update Now.

9.

Click OK to save the setting.

NOTE

The Update Now feature is not supported in environments where shared Windows 2000 or Windows XP clients are connected to Windows 2000 or Windows XP hosts.

To activate the Update Now feature if you are using an HP traditional PCL 6 or PCL 5 driver, follow these steps:

1.

Click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

3.

Click Printers.

4.

Right-click the product name.

5.

Click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs.

6.

Click Device Settings.

7.

Click the Configure tab.

8.

In the Automatic Configuration group box, click Update Now.

9.

Click OK to save the setting.

HP Driver Preconfiguration

HP Driver Preconfiguration is a software architecture and set of tools that permits HP printing-system software to be customized and distributed in managed corporate printing environments. Using HP Driver

Preconfiguration, information technology (IT) administrators in corporate and enterprise environments can preconfigure the printing and device defaults for HP print drivers before installing the drivers in the network environment.

HP Driver Preconfiguration is most beneficial when configuring print drivers for multiple workstations or print servers for print queues that share the same configuration. Two types of features can be configured:

● device settings

● printing-preferences settings

The driver is configured to match the product hardware so that access to all of the product accessories through the driver is enabled correctly (for example, for duplexing units and additional input trays). Most driver feature settings can also be configured.

HP Driver Preconfiguration configures the driver to match the accessories that are installed on the product, or to match the settings that IT administrators make in the configuration (.CFG) file (for example, optional trays, total amount of memory, job-storage settings, or mopier settings).

The preconfiguration process consists of three basic steps:

● driver acquisition

● driver preconfiguration

● driver installation and deployment

34 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

ENWW

These steps can be accomplished in different ways, depending on the tool that is being used to define the configuration.

The configuration process for driver preconfiguration is supported through three distinct tools. All three are designed with the same basic user-interface (UI) controls for interacting with the .CFG file, but are packaged differently, either to support established product installation workflows or to leave the deployment and installation of the driver entirely up to the user. The following tools support driver preconfiguration:

HP Driver Configuration Editor. The HP Driver Configuration Editor is a small standalone

Windows software program that the administrator can use to open the .CFG file that is associated with a particular driver and make modifications that are applied when that driver is installed on the target computer. It is intended for use in environments that have an established process for deploying drivers. This is the preconfiguration tool of choice to support any Novell or HP Print Server

Appliance (PSA) Point and Print environments. It is used in the way that any ordinary Windows software program is used.

The HP Driver Configuration Editor is available at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/hpdpc_sw

The HP Web Jetadmin Driver Configuration Plugin. HP Web Jetadmin provides a queuecreation program that can be used to create printer queues on any Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 or workstation. The HP Web Jetadmin Driver Configuration Plugin adds a number of screens to the existing queue-creation workflow from which the drivers that are being installed for the queues can be customized as part of the process. The plug-in is limited to Internet

Explorer browsers. Netscape Navigator is not supported.

The HP Web Jetadmin Driver Configuration Plugin is available at the following Web site: www.hp.com/sbso/tpm/web_jetadminplugin.html

HP Customization Utility/Silent Installer. The Customization Utility features an install-time mode of HP Driver Preconfiguration. IT administrators can use the utility to preconfigure the drivers for a printing-system software driver installation that uses the silent installer.

For detailed information about gaining access to and installing these tools, see the HP Driver

Preconfiguration Support Guide at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/hpdpc_sw

Lockable features

The following driver features can be locked to prevent end-users from changing settings:

Print on Both Sides (duplex). The options are True or False.

Print in Grayscale. The options are Disable or Enabled.

Media Type. The options include all the media types that the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer

supports (see Media attributes in the Engineering Details chapter).

Paper Source. The options are Printer Auto Select, Manual Feed (Tray 1), Tray 1, or Tray 2.

When a feature is locked, the selected default option is the only option that is available to users.

Generally, the feature is unavailable in the driver UI after it has been locked.

Driver Configuration for Windows 35

Continuous export

The term "continuous export" refers to the ability of the driver to copy the latest driver settings back to the working copy of the preconfiguration file. Using this feature, the exported values can be transferred when a compatible version of the driver is used to upgrade the print driver. For instance, if the orientation is set to Landscape in a driver originally installed in Windows 2000, then the orientation setting automatically remains Landscape when the operating system is upgraded to Windows XP or

Windows Server 2003. The continuous export feature functions transparently from the user's perspective and works only between drivers of identical product models.

NOTE

Not all of the driver parameters can be exported; however, the exportable components are always the same as the components that can be preconfigured.

The following table shows drivers and operating systems that support HP Driver Preconfiguration.

Table 2-5

Operating systems that support HP Driver Preconfiguration

Windows Server 2003

N/A

Driver Windows 98 Windows Me Windows 2000

HP Traditional

PCL 6 Driver

HP Traditional

PCL 5 Driver

PS Emulation

Driver

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

N/A

N/A

N/A

1

HP PCL 6

Unidriver

HP PCL 5

Unidriver

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Yes

Yes

1

PS Emulation

Unidriver

N/A N/A Yes

N/A: Not applicable; the driver is not supported in this operating system.

Windows XP

N/A

N/A

N/A

Yes

Yes

Yes

N/A

N/A

Yes

Yes

Yes

36 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool

The HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool is a Web-based diagnostic software that you can use to determine whether you are using the correct and most current print driver for the

HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer. Two methods are available to gain access to the HP Driver Diagnostic

Printer Check Tool:

1.

Open an Internet browser.

2.

Go to the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/drivercheck

1.

Open an Internet browser.

2.

Go to the HP Business Support Center (BSC) at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/bsc

3.

Click the self-help resources link on the left navigation bar.

4.

Click automatic driver checker to run the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool.

When the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool runs, the products that are currently installed on the computer appear in a list. When you select the HP product that you would like to check, the HP Driver

Diagnostic Printer Check Tool gathers information about your product, drivers, and system setup in order to diagnose the software driver configuration and check the print driver. The tool then verifies whether you are using the latest driver, informs you if you are using an incorrect driver for the HP product, and lets you know if an updated driver version is available for the product. If an updated driver is available, you can download and install the latest driver version by clicking it.

The data that the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool gathers is stored anonymously so that HP can analyze and continuously improve its diagnostic tools. No private data is gathered from the computer.

ENWW HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool 37

Color Access Control

The HP Color LaserJet 3000 has the ability to monitor and control color print-job use. The following table shows various tools that can be used to control color-printing access.

Table 2-6

Color access control tools

Tool

HP Embedded Web Server

HP Web Jetadmin

Color usage job log

HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver

Product control panel

Description

The HP Embedded Web Server (HP EWS) is a Web-browserbased utility that provides an interface to the printer that you can use to change printer settings, including color access control settings. No special software needs to be installed or configured. It allows you to set color printing restrictions and view a log of color printing use. The HP EWS is designed for one-to-one printer configuration monitoring and management.

For more information, see

HP Embedded Web Server

in this chapter.

The HP Web Jetadmin provides an interface to the printer through a Web browser on single network-administration servers. Use HP Web Jetadmin to manage HP Jetdirectconnected products within an intranet.

For more information, see the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin

The color usage job log shows color and monochrome print job statistics for a printer.

For more information, see

HP Easy Printer Care

in this chapter.

In Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating environments, use the HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver to limit the color printing capabilities of the

HP Color LaserJet 3000.

The HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver is a full-featured print driver.

For more information , see

HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows in this STR.

Use the product control panel to restrict color use in networkconnected printers.

For more information, see the following procedure

To restrict color-printing access to a network-connected HP Color LaserJet 3000 from the product control panel, follow these steps:

1.

Press (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus.

2.

Press (the up button) and (the down button) to scroll to CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press

.

3.

Press and to scroll to SYSTEM SETUP, and then press .

38 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

4.

Press and to scroll to RESTRICT COLOR USE, and then press .

5.

Press and to scroll to one of the following options:

ENABLE COLOR . This is the default setting. Use of color-printing features is unrestricted.

COLOR IF ALLOWED . Network administrators can use this setting to allow color-printing to certain users and restrict it for other users. User privileges can be set using HP EWS. For more information, see the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide.

DISABLE COLOR. This setting denies the use of color-printing features to all users.

ENWW Color Access Control 39

International Color Consortium profiles

HP provides cyan-magenta-yellow-black (CMYK) (HP3000C.ICM) and standard red-green-blue (sRGB)

(HP3000R.ICM) International Color Consortium (ICC) profiles with the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer.

The CMYK profile can only be used with a postscript driver; the sRGB profile can be used with any of the HP Color LaserJet 3000 print drivers. The profiles are available at the following HP Web site: www.hp.com/support/clj3000

The ICC profiles describe the way color will be interpreted in the default CMYK and RGB modes. These profiles can be used for color conversions in a color-managed workflow. The sRGB profile matches the default RGB mode (sRGB), which is enabled with the Default (sRGB) or Color setting in either a PCL or postscript driver. The printer interprets CMYK data according to the Specifications for Web Offset

Publications (SWOP) simulation when Default CMYK+ is the selected CMYK Color setting in the postscript driver, and a more accurate SWOP rendering can be produced by selecting the SWOP setting.

This standard defines how a particular set of CMYK ink colors should behave. Emulation for Dainippon

Press (DIC) and Euro-standard CMYK inks used in Asia and Europe are also available and can be selected from the print driver.

40 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

PANTONE color profiles

Most software programs that support the use of PANTONE* colors for graphic objects will include the

PANTONE* name in the postscript output along with the color values that are assigned to the object.

For best results, select a software program that uses PANTONE* palette in a CMYK workspace, and print with one of the following postscript drivers:

PS Emulation Unidriver in Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003

PS Emulation Driver in Windows 98 and Windows Me

When SWOP is selected as the CMYK Color setting, these CMYK values provides a good reproduction of the PANTONE* 4C spot-color simulations.

PANTONE* provides device- and software-specific palettes for some HP Color LaserJet products. Using the custom colors in these palettes can provide an alternative match to the 4C spot-color simulation.

However, files that use these palettes are not portable to other devices.

PANTONE* Application Palettes are available at the following Web site: www.hp.com/support/clj3000

Vector graphics, such as company logos that are created in PANTONE* Application Palettes, can be imported into Microsoft Word, PowerPoint, or other Microsoft Office software programs. The color program must create an encapsulated postscript (.EPS) file of the image that will be imported. Use the

Insert file function to import the file into the Office document.

NOTE

Cutting and pasting from the clipboard does not work. These tasks do not preserve the

PANTONE* name or the CMYK palette value.

ENWW PANTONE color profiles 41

HP Easy Printer Care

HP Easy Printer Care is a new standalone software program that manages from one to 15 printers. It enables you to view the status of all HP printers, set up printer and status alerts, generate printer usage reports, and reorder supplies.

NOTE

At this time, the HP Easy Printer Care Software is only available on the Web at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare

Installation options

The following methods are available for installing HP Easy Printer Care software:

Standalone installation, from the Web. This method is recommended for ensuring that the latest version of HP Easy Printer Care is installed. The software is available at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare

CD Browser. From the main installation screen of the software CD, select HP Easy Printer

Care. This method is recommended in cases where HP Easy Printer Care software is the only component that you want to install.

NOTE

At this time, the HP Easy Printer Care Software is only available on the Web at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare

Full installation. Select this path from the CD software installer. This method installs the full set of drivers and software, including status, alerting, and troubleshooting tools (HP Easy Printer Care).

This method is recommended for computers in a direct-connect or a home/small network environment.

NOTE

At this time, the HP Easy Printer Care Software is only available on the Web at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare

Custom installation. Select this path from the CD software installer. HP Easy Printer Care is one of the components that can be selected for installation.

NOTE

At this time, the HP Easy Printer Care Software is only available on the Web at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare

Next Steps, during installation. After the drivers have been installed using the printing system installer, a dialog appears that provides an opportunity to install HP Easy Printer Care, if it is not already installed.

NOTE

At this time, the HP Easy Printer Care Software is only available on the Web at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare

42 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

To install HP Easy Printer Care directly from the printing-system software CD, follow these steps:

NOTE

At this time, the HP Easy Printer Care Software is only available on the Web at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare

1.

Insert the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printing-system software CD in the CD-ROM drive.

2.

Click HP Easy Printer Care Software. The HP Easy Printer Care screen appears.

ENWW

3.

Click OK to proceed with the installation.

When you perform a default installation of the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer over a direct USB or parallel connection by using the printing-system software CD, HP Easy Printer Care is automatically installed. Using this method, HP Easy Printer Care also discovers any HP printers that have been installed on the computer over the network by selecting Find Other Printers on the left pane of the My

HP Printers screen.

When you install the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer over a direct USB or parallel connection that does not use a DOT4 port (for instance, by using the Add Printer Wizard), HP Easy Printer Care does not automatically discover the printer. For USB or parallel connections, the print driver must be installed by using the printing-system software CD in order for the requires DOT4 port to be installed.

When you install the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer over a transmission control protocol/internet protocol (TCP/IP) network connection by using the printing-system software CD, HP Easy Printer Care is an option for a Custom Installation. It is not an option for a Basic Installation or a Full Installation over a network.

HP Easy Printer Care is not supported over Novell Netware (IPX/SPX) network connections.

Access

To gain access to the HP Easy Printer Care, follow these steps:

1.

Click Start.

2.

Select All Programs.

3.

Select Hewlett-Packard.

HP Easy Printer Care 43

4.

Select HP Easy Printer Care.

5.

Click Start HP Easy Printer Care. The Easy Printer Care screen appears.

Figure 2-2

My HP Printers screen

If the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer is connected directly through a USB or parallel DOT4 port, an icon for the product appears in the main pane of the Easy Printer Care screen (see

Figure 2-10 MY HP

Printers — HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer ).

If the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer is connected over a network, click Find Other Printers.

Find Other Printers

Click Find Other Printers on the left pane of the My HP Printers screen to open the Step 1 of 3: Start

Search screen.

44 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

Figure 2-3

Step 1 of 3: Start Search screen

If you know the TCP/IP address of the printer, type the address in the Search for field and then click

Next.

To conduct a search for printers over a network, select the General search (searches for all HP

printers on your network) option.

Click Advanced Search Properties to open a screen that you can use to select the number of “hops” that the system makes. The Advanced Search Settings screen appears.

Click Cancel on this and on any other screen where it appears to return to the main HP Easy Printer

Care screen.

ENWW

Figure 2-4

Advanced Search Settings screen

When you click Next on the Find Other Printers screen, the Searching for printers, please wait.. screen appears.

HP Easy Printer Care 45

Figure 2-5

Searching for printers, please wait.. screen

When a printer has been found, one of two screens appears: the Step 2 of 3: Verify Printer Found screen or the Step 2 of 3: Select Printers screen. The screens are shown in the following figures.

Figure 2-6

Step 2 of 3: Verify Printer Found screen

If the results do not list the printer, click Previous to search again.

If the printer that you want is listed, click Next. See Figure 2-8 Step 3 of 3: Customize Settings screen .

46 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

Figure 2-7

Step 2 of 3: Select Printers screen

Select the printer in the Available Printers: pane and click the green double-arrows button. The model name moves to the Printers to Add: pane.

Click Next to add the printer. The Step 3 of 3: Customize Settings screen appears.

ENWW

Figure 2-8

Step 3 of 3: Customize Settings screen

Click Alert Settings to open the Alert Settings screen.

HP Easy Printer Care 47

Figure 2-9

Alert Settings screen

Turn alert notification on and off by selecting an option in the Settings for: field.

Under Printer Alerts, select the kind of alert notifications that you want to receive:

Printer cannot print

● Printer has a problem, but can continue

If you want to be notified of problems only when printing to the product, select Only if I am printing to

this printer (user mode).

If you are an administrator or are responsible for ordering printer supplies, select Anytime problems

occur (maintainer mode).

Under Notification Method, select one of the following options:

● Popup dialog

Desktop alert

Click Save to save your alert-notification settings. The My HP Printers screen appears.

48 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

Figure 2-10

MY HP Printers — HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer

My HP Printers screen – Overview tab

Click the printer icon to open the Overview tab.

ENWW HP Easy Printer Care 49

Figure 2-11

Overview tab

The Overview tab shows the following information under Device Status:

● Printer name

Printer TCP/IP address

● A graph showing usage for each color print cartridge

A list of any problems that require attention

Click (the help button) to open the HP Easy Printer Care Help screen.

50 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

ENWW

Figure 2-12

HP Easy Printer Care Help screen

The Overview Help screen provides an overview of the Device Status and Cartridges sections of the

Overview tab.

Under Supplies Status on the Overview tab, the following information is provided about print media:

Location (by tray)

Type (media type)

Size (media size)

Status (OK, Out)

Under Cartridges, the following information is provided for each color cartridge:

● Print Cartridge (color)

Estimated Status (percentage)

● Pages Remaining

HP Part Number

Click Supplies Ordering… to open the Supplies Ordering screen.

HP Easy Printer Care 51

Figure 2-13

Supplies Ordering screen

Select the appropriate check boxes under Order for each supply that you want. In the Quantity field, type the quantity that you want to order.

Click Print Shopping List for a hard-copy list of the supplies that you are ordering.

Click Shop Online for Supplies if you have access to the Web and would like to place an online order.

The Transfer printer information to HP InstantSupport? screen appears.

Figure 2-14

Transfer printer information to HP InstantSupport? screen

52 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

If you click Yes, please send my printer information, only information and status about your printer will be sent; no personal information will be shared. If you click No, let me provide my printer

information, no information is sent. The Welcome to HP SureSupply screen opens.

ENWW

Figure 2-15

Welcome to HP SureSupply screen

On the Supplies Ordering page, click Cancel to return to the My HP Printers screen.

If the status of the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer changes after you open the HP Easy Printer Care screen (for instance, if you have sent a print job to the product), click (the refresh button) in the upper-right corner of any screen where it appears.

HP Easy Printer Care – Support tab

On the My HP Printers screen, click the Support tab to open the Support screen.

HP Easy Printer Care 53

Figure 2-16

Support tab

Click (the help button) to open the Support Help screen.

54 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

ENWW

Figure 2-17

Support Help screen

The Support Help screen provides an overview of the Device Status, Maintenance Tools, and

Troubleshooting Tools sections of the Support tab.

On the Support tab, click Supplies Ordering to open the Supplies Ordering screen. The Transfer

printer information to HP InstantSupport? screen opens. See Figure 2-14 Transfer printer information to HP InstantSupport? screen

and the following instructions to proceed with your order.

Maintenance Tools

The following tools are available in the Maintenance Tools pane:

● Printer Usage Report

Advanced Tools & Settings

● Software Update

HP Easy Printer Care 55

Click Printer Usage Report to open a screen that provides information about print jobs that have been sent to the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer. The Printer Usage Report screen has three tabs:

By Date/Time

By User

By Application

The following table shows the information that is available on each of the printer-usage report tabs.

Table 2-7

Printer Usage Report

Printer Usage Report tab

By Date/Time

By User

By Application

Print-job information

Date/Time

Host

User

Job Name

Application

Color Sides

Mono Sides

Sheets Used

User

Total Jobs

Color Sides

Mono Sides

Sheets Used

Application

Total Jobs

Color Sides

Mono Sides

Sheets Used

To export the printer-usage report into a file that can be opened in Microsoft Excel or other database software program, follow these steps:

1.

Click File.

2.

Click Export.

3.

Select the file format that you want to export the printer-usage report in, and then click OK.

Click the Advanced Tools & Settings option to open the HP Embedded Web Server. For more information, see

HP Embedded Web Server or consult the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide.

56 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

NOTE

HP Easy Printer Care software is a Windows application and does in itself not require any browser support. The link to the HP Embedded Web Server, however uses a Web browser.

If you have access to the Internet, click Software Update to open the Web browser and find information about the latest software for the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer. The Welcome to HP Software

Update screen appears.

Figure 2-18

Welcome to HP Software Update screen

Click Next to check for software updates. The Checking for updates… screen appears.

ENWW

Figure 2-19

Checking for updates… screen

HP Easy Printer Care 57

If software updates are available, a Web page opens with information about the updates. HP Software

Update finds updates for both print-drivers and HP Easy Printer Care.

You can also go directly to the following URL for software updates: www.hp.com/go/clj3000_software

In the Troubleshooting Tools pane of the Support tab, click Browse online information to find additional information about the product on the HP Web site.

In the Troubleshooting Tools pane of the Support tab, click Contact a support specialist to open a

Web page where you can supply information about the product and receive customized support. You can send an instant message, an e-mail, or submit a problem and view the case status online. The page also provides telephone numbers for HP customer care centers.

Troubleshooting Tools

The following tools are available in the Troubleshooting Tools pane of the Support tab:

Run online diagnostics

Browse online information

Contact a support specialist

You can use the Run online diagnostics tool to communicate with an HP Web site that analyzes the product and looks for problems. When you click the Run online diagnostics option, the Transfer

printer information to HP InstantSupport? screen appears. For more information, see

Figure 2-14

Transfer printer information to HP InstantSupport? screen .

58 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

HP Embedded Web Server

The HP Embedded Web Server (HP EWS) is a standard feature on the following

HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer models when they are connected through a network:

HP Color LaserJet 3000n

HP Color LaserJet 3000dn

HP Color LaserJet 3000dtn

The base model, the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer, can use the HP EWS if an optional EIO Jetdirect card is installed.

The HP EWS provides a simple, easy-to-use solution for one-to-one product management. Instead of installing management software, such as HP Web Jetadmin, use HP EWS for remote management in offices that have a limited number of products. The only requirement is that the management console must have a supported Web browser.

In environments that have a larger number of products, in which one-to-one management is impractical, the HP Embedded Web Server and HP Web Jetadmin work together to provide scalable remote product management. Use HP Web Jetadmin for consolidated management tasks when you want to perform operations on a selected set of products. For such environments, HP provides hooks between the

HP EWS and HP Web Jetadmin so that you can configure HP EWS features on multiple products in one operation. For example, you can set the security password for the HP EWS simultaneously on a cluster of products.

For additional information and a copy of the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide, go to: www.hp.com/ support/clj3000 .

Access to the HP EWS

To open the HP EWS and view information about the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer, open a supported

Web browser and type the product transmission control protocol/internet protocol (TCP/IP) address or host name in the address field.

To find the product TCP/IP address, look for IP Address on the Embedded Jetdirect page, in the TCP/

IP section. To find the host name of the product, look for Host Name in the TCP/IP section.

You also can view information about an installed HP Jetdirect print server by clicking the Networking tab in the HP EWS window.

The TCP/IP address also appears on the product configuration page (the Embedded Jetdirect page), which you can print from the product control-panel display. Follow these steps to print an Embedded

Jetdirect page:

1.

Press (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus.

2.

Press (the up button) and (the down button) to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press

.

3.

Press and to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION.

4.

Press to print the configuration page.

ENWW HP Embedded Web Server 59

The HP EWS frame

Each screen in the HP EWS has a frame that contains a top banner, three category tabs, a left-aligned navigation menu bar, and a main-content area. Selecting one of the category tabs causes the corresponding left-aligned navigation bar to appear. The left-aligned navigation menu includes links to content that is appropriate for that tab. The main-content area shows information and opens options in response to navigation-tab selections and menu-bar selections.

See the following sections for more information about each tab or area:

Information tab

Settings tab

Networking tab

Information tab

The following information is available on the HP EWS Information tab. To view the information, click the menu items on the left side of the HP EWS Information tab.

NOTE

If an HP EWS password has been set, the Information tab is the only visible tab until the user logs in. See

Security for more information.

Not all of the screens on the tab are included in this document. For more information, see the

HP Embedded Web Server User Guide.

Device Status. This screen provides current status information about the product.

Configuration Page. This screen provides information about the product configuration.

Supplies Status. This screen provides information about the print cartridge and the total pages that have been printed, and the serial number of the product.

Event log. This screen provides information about reported printer errors.

Usage page. This screen provides a page count for each size of media that has passed through the device, as well as the number of duplexed pages that have been printed.

Diagnostics Page. The Diagnostics Page screen provides information about calibration, color density, and parameters.

Device Information. This screen shows device information, such as the product TCP/IP address and serial number.

Control Panel. This screen shows the product control panel.

Color Usage Job Log. The Color Usage Job Log screen provides information about users, print jobs, and software programs that have printed to the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer.

Print. Use this screen to print documents that are print-ready, such as those generated by a "print to file" driver option, .PCL documents, .PS documents, .PDF files, and text (.TXT) files.

60 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

Links to off-product solutions

Links on the HP EWS screens provide an easy way to locate information or complete tasks.

hp instant support. This link connects to a set of dynamic Web resources that help you solve specific problems and determine additional services that might be available for the product. Specific status and configuration information about the product is retained and directed to the "Solve a

Problem" Web site. This site offers targeted support content and messages to help resolve problems as quickly as possible.

Order Supplies. This link connects to an HP product supplies screen from which you can order genuine HP supplies for the product.

Product Support. This link connects to an HP product-support screen from which you can search for information, contact the HP customer care home page, or find additional resources for the product.

Device Status screen

Status information, such as whether the product is online or the toner is low, is available through a Web browser on a computer that is linked directly to the product. You can view this information without going to the product to identify the status. The following figure shows how this information is presented on the product Web page.

ENWW HP Embedded Web Server 61

Figure 2-20

HP EWS Information tab – Device Status screen

Configuration Page

You can gain access to the HP Color LaserJet 3000 configuration page remotely through the HP EWS.

The HP EWS Configuration Page screen provides configuration information about the product in the same way as the configuration page that is printed from the product. The following figures show an example of a configuration page viewed remotely through the HP EWS.

62 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

Figure 2-21

HP EWS Information tab – Configuration Page screen, 1 of 3

NOTE

This figure is provided only as an example.

ENWW HP Embedded Web Server 63

Figure 2-22

HP EWS Information tab – Configuration Page screen, 2 of 3

NOTE

This figure is provided only as an example.

Figure 2-23

HP EWS Information tab – Configuration Page screen, 3 of 3

NOTE

This figure is provided only as an example.

Settings tab

The following information is available on the HP EWS Settings tab. To view the information, click the menu items on the left side of the HP EWS Settings tab. The Settings tab is shown in the

Configure device section.

64 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

ENWW

Not all of the screens on the tab are shown in this document. For more information, see the

HP Embedded Web Server User Guide.

Configure Device. Use the Configure Device screen to print product information pages and configure the product remotely.

E-mail Server. Use the E-mail Server screen to configure e-mail settings for outgoing e-mail.

Alerts. IT administrators can configure the product to send alerts in e-mail messages to anyone.

AutoSend. Use the AutoSend screen to send product configuration and supplies-usage information periodically to your service provider.

Security. Use the Security screen to manage security for the product.

Edit Other Links. Use the Edit Other Links screen to add or customize up to five links to the Web sites of your choice.

Device Information. Use the Device Information screen to provide a name of your choice for the product, assign an asset number, and configure the company name, the person to contact about the product, and the physical location of the product.

Language. Use the Language screen to select the language in which the HP EWS screens appear.

Date & Time. Use this page to set the correct date and time for the product.

Wake Time. Wake time can be set to turn on the product at a certain time on a daily basis. Only one wake-time setting can be established per day; however, each day can have a different wake time. The sleep-mode delay can also be set on this page.

Restrict Color. Use the Restrict Color screen to restrict color printing for all users and software programs or for specified users and software programs.

Configure device

You can obtain product configuration information through a Web browser by opening the HP EWS screen and changing the basic configuration information on the Settings tab. Security and password controls give management information systems (MIS) managers the level of control that they require within their network environments. The following figure shows an example of product options that can be configured remotely.

HP Embedded Web Server 65

Figure 2-24

HP EWS Settings tab – Configure Device screen

Alerts

The product can automatically send e-mail alerts about printing problems or job status to specified e-mail addresses. For example, if toner is low, the product can notify the person who is responsible for ordering or changing the print cartridge. If a product failure occurs, the product can send an e-mail alert directly to the person who is responsible for fixing the problem. These e-mail alerts can be configured to be sent to any device that can accept e-mail, such as digital phones, pagers, and personal digital assistants

(PDAs). In large environments, administrators can route e-mail addresses to list-servers or uniform resource locators (URLs) for expanded notification.

66 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

ENWW

Figure 2-25

HP EWS Settings tab – Alerts screen, 1 of 2

NOTE

This figure is provided only as an example.

HP Embedded Web Server 67

Figure 2-26

HP EWS Settings tab – Alerts screen, 2 of 2

NOTE

This figure is provided only as an example.

Security

The HP EWS screens that appear, and the settings on them, vary according to how you gain access to the HP EWS: as a general user, an IT administrator, or a service provider. To control access to the

HP EWS screens, set a password on the Security page.

68 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

ENWW

Figure 2-27

HP EWS Settings tab – Security screen

In a password-protected HP EWS, only the Information tab is available to users who do not log in by using the password. If no password is set (which is the default configuration), all of the tabs are visible.

If a password has been set, you must log on as an IT administrator or a service provider to gain access to the protected HP EWS tabs (Settings and Networking).

Restrict Color

The Restrict Color screen is shown in the following figure.

HP Embedded Web Server 69

Use the Restrict Color screen to set color-printing access for the printer and to configure permissions by user and software program. For more information about using this screen, see the HP Embedded

Web Server User Guide.

Control over color printing with the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer is possible in a variety of ways. For more information, go to the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/coloraccess

Networking tab

The HP EWS Networking tab is shown in the following figure.

70 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

NOTE

Not all of the screens on the tab are shown in this document. For more information, see the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide.

ENWW

Figure 2-28

HP EWS Networking tab – Network Settings screen

The menu on the left side of the screen contains other networking options under three categories:

Configuration

Security

Diagnostics

HP Embedded Web Server 71

For more information, see the HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide.

Configuration section

Network Settings

Other Settings

Privacy Settings

Select Language

Security section

Settings

Authorization

Mgmt. Protocols

Diagnostics section

Network Statistics

Protocol Info

Configuration Page

Network settings

From the Networking tab, you can enable and configure the following network protocols:

TCP/IP

Internetwork packet exchange/Sequenced packet exchange (IPX/SPX)

AppleTalk

Data link control/logical link control (DLC/LLC)

Simple network management protocol (SNMP)

72 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

HP Printer Utility for Macintosh

The HP Printer Utility is a software program that gives you access to the product in Mac OS X.

The HP Printer Utility is available only in Mac OS X V10.1.5 and later. The HP Printer Utility does not work when it is installed by using the AppleTalk protocol. Use IP, Bonjour or Rendezvous to enable the

HP Printer Utility.

The following topics are discussed in this section:

Access to the HP Printer Utility

Supplies Status

Device Information

HP Support

Upload Fonts

File Upload

Update Firmware

Duplex mode

Color Usage

Trays Configuration

Lock Resources

Stored Jobs

E-mail Alerts

Network Settings

Rendezvous Setting

Supplies Management

Restrict Color

Additional Settings

Access to the HP Printer Utility

In Mac OS X V10.3, follow these steps to gain access to the HP Printer Utility:

1.

Open the Finder.

2.

Find and double-click Printers. The Select Printer screen appears.

In Mac OS X V10.4, follow these steps to gain access to the HP Printer Utility:

1.

Click Go.

2.

Click Utilities.

3.

Double-click HP Printer Selector. The Select Printer screen appears.

ENWW HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 73

Figure 2-29

Select Printer screen – printer not selected

If the product does not appear, click More Printers…. The Connection Type screen appears.

74 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

ENWW

Figure 2-30

Connection Type screen

Select the connection type (USB, TCP/IP, or AppleTalk). The product name appears under Device

Name.

On the Connection Type screen, click Add. The Select Printer screen appears, showing printer information.

To open the HP Printer Utility directly, select the printer and click Launch Utility.

HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 75

Figure 2-31

Select Printer screen – printer selected

On the Select Printer screen, click Settings… to open the Device Status screen in the HP EWS. For more information about the HP EWS, see

HP Embedded Web Server in this guide.

To open the HP Printer Utility, select the product and click Launch Utility.

If the HP Printer Utility software detects a condition that might need attention, the Printer Status screen appears.

76 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

Figure 2-32

Printer Status screen

Address the condition and click OK to close the screen. The HP Printer Utility opens.

The following sections describe the screens and features that are available in the HP Printer Utility.

Supplies Status

The HP Printer Utility opens to the Supplies Status screen.

ENWW HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 77

Figure 2-33

Supplies Status screen

Click Detailed Supplies Information… to open the Supplies Information screen.

Figure 2-34

Supplies Information screen

78 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

Use the scroll button to see information about the color print cartridges.

If you have Internet access and click Order HP Supplies, a screen appears that explains the ordering process and describes the kind of information that can be sent about your product to facilitate the ordering of supplies.

ENWW

Figure 2-35

Order Supplies link

Click the Hewlett-Packard Online Privacy Statement link to open a screen that shows the HP privacy statement.

You can continue ordering supplies without sending product information by clicking the continue

without sending this information link.

To send a message to HP, click the contact HP link.

On the Supplies Status screen, click Media to see the status of the trays.

HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 79

Figure 2-36

Paper Status screen

You can also order supplies from this screen by clicking Order HP Supplies.

Device Information

Click Device Information in the menu on the left to find the product service ID (if assigned), the firmware version, and the serial number.

80 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

ENWW

Figure 2-37

Device Information screen

The product configuration page shows other settings; click Print Configuration Page to print it.

Click the printer icon in the lower-left corner to see information about another installed printer. This action

relaunches the HP Printer Utility so that you can select another printer (see Figure 2-29 Select Printer screen – printer not selected

).

HP Support

Click HP Support to open the HP Online Support screen.

HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 81

Figure 2-38

HP Online Support screen

If you have Internet access, you can connect to HP support pages over the Web from this screen.

Click the Instant Support screen to open the HP Instant Support Web page.

Figure 2-39

HP Instant Support link

Click the Hewlett-Packard Online Privacy Statement link to open a screen that shows the HP privacy statement.

Click the Product Support link if you do not want to send information to HP but would like to receive generic product support.

82 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

Click Continue to open a page where you can select the product and find further information about product support.

Click Cancel to return to the HP Online Support screen in the HP Printer Utility.

On the HP Online Support screen, click Order Supplies Online to open the Order Supplies Web page

(see Figure 2-35 Order Supplies link ).

The Online Registration link is not available at this time.

Upload Fonts

In the Configuration Settings menu, click Upload Fonts to gain access to fonts that you can upload to the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer.

ENWW

Figure 2-40

Upload Fonts screen

The drop-down menu in the Upload Fonts pane has the following options:

Memory. Fonts that are available in the printer memory are listed.

Disk. Select this option to shows any fonts that are installed on the product hard disk or flash disk.

By default, no fonts are stored on either of these disks. To upload fonts, select the font name and click Add

File Upload

On the Configuration Settings menu, click File Upload to open the File Upload screen.

HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 83

Figure 2-41

File Upload screen

The File Upload command is supported for file types that can be sent directly to the printer without first being opened through a software program. Some files can be uploaded to the product, but some cannot.

Documents in the following file formats can be printed by using a command line. That is, they do not need to be opened in a software program that supports the file format (such as the Adobe Acrobat or

Acrobat Reader programs for .PDF files), but can be sent directly to the product by using the File

Upload command.

HP LaserJet printer command language (.PCL)

● Portable document format (.PDF)

Postscript (.PS)

● Text (.TXT)

On the File Upload screen, click Choose… to open a navigation screen. Locate the file you want to upload and click Open.

On the File Upload screen, click Display response from the device to see whether the upload was successful. If the file loads successfully, no message appears.

On the navigation screen, select the file and click Open. The file name appears in the File Upload screen of the HP Printer Utility. Click Upload.

84 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

Update Firmware

Select Update Firmware to locate a firmware upgrade file and install it on the product. Browse to the firmware file on the screen that appears and click Open. The Update Firmware screen shows the file name. Click Update. For more information about performing remote firmware upgrades, see

Remote firmware update in this STR.

For information about firmware updates in Mac OS 9 operating systems, see Remote firmware update by using the HP LaserJet Utility (Mac OS 9.x only) .

Duplex mode

For the HP Color LaserJet 3000dn and HP Color LaserJet 3000dtn printer models, the Configuration

Settings menu includes a Duplex Mode setting. Click this setting to open the Duplex Mode screen.

Use the Enable Duplex Mode command to print internal diagnostic and test pages on both sides of the page.

1.

Select Duplex Mode to open the Duplex Mode screen.

2.

Select the Enable Duplex Mode check box. This box is clear by default.

3.

Click Apply Now to enable printing on both sides of the page.

Color Usage

Click Color Usage in the Configuration Settings menu to open a screen and print a color-usage job log.

ENWW

Figure 2-42

Print Color Usage Job Log screen

HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 85

Click Print Color Usage Log to print a page that shows information about users, print jobs, and software programs that have printed to the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer. In additions, the color-usage log lists the following details about print jobs:

Date and time

Total number of jobs

Mono (monochrome, or black-and-white) sides

Color sides

● Media sheets

Trays Configuration

The Trays Configuration screen is shown in the following figure.

Figure 2-43

Trays Configuration screen

1.

Select Trays Configuration to change media size and type for each of the trays installed on your product.

2.

To change the media size, select a tray and then select a different media size in the Default Media

Size drop-down menu.

3.

To change the media type, select a tray and then select a different media type in the Default Media

Type drop-down menu.

4.

Click Apply Now to save the settings.

86 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

Lock Resources

Select Lock Resources to lock certain features of the HP Color LaserJet 3000

ENWW

Figure 2-44

Lock Resources screen

In Control Panel Access Level, select one of the following settings:

No Locking provides full control of the product.

Minimal Locking provides control over paper-handling features.

Moderate Locking blocks changes in the product configuration.

Maximal Locking prevents users from changing product control-panel settings.

In the lower pane, select the Lock check box for the mass-storage unit that you want to lock.

WARNING!

Click Initialize selected mass-storage unit only if you want to erase all data that is currently stored on the hard drive. You cannot undo this action.

Stored Jobs

Select Stored Job to change the Enable Job Storing setting. This setting is selected by default. Click to clear the check box to disable the job-storing feature.

HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 87

Figure 2-45

Enable Job Storing screen

You can type a PIN for your job in the Enter Secure Job PIN field.

Select the number of copies in the Copies to Print field.

Select a stored job and click Print to print the job.

Select a stored job and click Delete to delete the job.

For information about releasing and deleting stored jobs at the product control panel, see

Releasing a job-storage print job

.

E-mail Alerts

Select E-mail Alerts to configure the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer to send e-mail notifications to users.

If a user name and password have been set, you might need to obtain them from the IT administrator.

For more information, see the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide.

88 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

ENWW

Figure 2-46

E-mail Alerts screen

Click Open E-mail Alerts Settings to open the HP EWS. The HP EWS opens to the Setup screen on the Alerts tab, where you can set notifications. For information about configuring notifications, see

Alerts .

Network Settings

Select Network Settings to open the IP Settings screen.

HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 89

Figure 2-47

IP Settings screen

Select one of the following options in the Configuration drop-down menu:

DHCP

BootP

Manual

You can also use this screen to modify the following settings:

Host Name

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Default Gateway

To save new settings, click Apply Now.

To view and change other network settings, click Additional Network Settings.

If a user name and password have been set, you might need to obtain them from your IT administrator.

For more information, see the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide.

The HP EWS opens to the Network Settings screen. For information about this screen, see

Networking tab in this STR.

90 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

Rendezvous Setting

Select Rendezvous Setting to open the Rendezvous Setting screen. Rendezvous is enabled by default.

To disable Rendezvous, click to clear the Enable Rendezvous check box and then click Apply Now.

ENWW

Figure 2-48

Rendezvous screen

The following options are available in the The highest priority service drop-down menu:

Port 9100 (default)

IPP

LPD-RAW

LPD-TEXT

LPD-AUTO

LPD-BINPS

LPD-Queue5

LPD-Queue6

LPD-Queue7

LPD-Queue8

HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 91

LPD-Queue9

LPD-Queue10

After you select a new setting, click Apply Now to save it.

Supplies Management

Click Supplies Management in the Configuration Settings menu to open the Replace Supplies screen.

Figure 2-49

Replace Supplies screen

The settings on this screen prompt the printer to stop printing at a certain threshold (a specific number of pages in the tray). By default, the Stop At Supply Out setting is selected.

To prompt the printer to stop printing at a different threshold, select Stop at Supply Low and type a value in the Low Threshold (0-100) field. When the number of sheets in the tray reaches this value, the printer stops printing.

You can also specify the printer behavior when the color print cartridges run out. By default, the

Continue Printing in Black-Only Mode is selected. To prompt the printer to stop instead of continuing to print using the black cartridge, select Stop.

Click Apply Now to save the new settings.

Restrict Color

Click Restrict Color in the Configuration Settings menu to open the Restrict Color Use screen.

92 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

ENWW

Figure 2-50

Restrict Color Use screen

On the Restrict Color Use tab, select one of the following options:

Enable Color. Select this option to print all print jobs in color.

Color If Allowed (selected by default). Select this option to allow the user and the software program control over whether print jobs are printed in color.

Disable Color. Select this option to print only in black.

Click Apply Now to save new settings.

To restrict color by user, click the User tab.

HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 93

Figure 2-51

Restrict Color Use – User tab

To set user permissions, select a user and then, in the Default User Permissions drop-down menu, select one of the following options:

Black Only

Color

Click Apply Now to save new settings.

To add a new user, click Add.

Figure 2-52

Restrict Color – new user

Type the new user name in the User Name field.

On the Permissions drop-down menu, select one of the following options:

Black Only

Color

94 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

Click Add to add the new user.

Click Cancel to close the dialog box without adding a new user.

To restrict color usage by software program, click the Application tab on the Restrict Color Usage screen.

Figure 2-53

Restrict Color Use – Application tab

To set software-program permissions, select a program and then, on the Default User Permissions drop-down menu, select one of the following options:

Black Only

Color

Click Apply Now to save new settings.

To add a new software program, click Add.

ENWW

Figure 2-54

Restrict Color – new user

HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 95

Type the new software-program name in the Application Name field.

On the Permissions drop-down menu, select one of the following options:

Black Only

Color

Click Add to add the new software program.

Click Cancel to close the dialog box without adding a new software program.

Additional Settings

Select Additional Settings to gain access to the HP EWS.

Figure 2-55

Additional Settings screen

To open the HP EWS, click Open Embedded Web Server.

For information about HP EWS settings, see

HP Embedded Web Server

or consult the HP Embedded

Web Server User Guide.

96 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

HP Web Jetadmin

Use the HP Web Jetadmin and a browser to manage HP Jetdirect-connected products within an intranet.

HP Web Jetadmin is a browser-based management tool, and should be installed only on a single network-administration server.

To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin and for the latest list of supported host systems, go to the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin

ENWW HP Web Jetadmin 97

98 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW

3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows

Introduction

This chapter describes the features of the traditional print drivers for the HP Color LaserJet 3000 in

Windows 98 and Windows Me.

NOTE

For a comparison of features between the HP unidrivers and HP traditional print drivers in various operating systems, see

Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems

.

You can control print jobs from several places:

● the product control panel

● the software program print dialog box

● the driver user interface

Generally, for features that are duplicated in more than one location (for instance, you can select the media input tray from any of them), settings that are established in the software program take precedence over print-driver settings. Print-driver settings, in turn, override product control-panel settings.

When you install the print drivers by using the printing-system installer in Windows 98 or Windows Me, the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver is installed by default. You can install the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver by performing a Custom Installation.

NOTE

Windows NT 4.0 does not support the HP Color LaserJet 3000 print drivers, but you can use print drivers for legacy HP products whose feature sets closely match the

HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer feature set. For instance, you can use the HP Color LaserJet

4650 drivers, but some print-driver features might be missing and color quality might be compromised. HP does not support the use of any print driver other than the driver that is supplied for the product. When you install the print drivers in Windows NT 4.0, you must use the Add

Printer installation method to install the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and the HP Traditional

PCL 5 Driver.

This chapter describes the options that are available on each tab of the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver Properties print-driver interface. It also shows the tabs that are available on the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver interface for Windows 98 and Windows Me.

This chapter also describes differences between the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and the HP Traditional

PCL 5 Driver.

The chapter contains the following sections:

ENWW Introduction 99

Access to print drivers in Windows 98 and Windows Me

Help system

Finishing tab features

Effects tab features

Paper tab features

Job Storage tab features

Basics tab features

Color tab features

Configure tab features

HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features

100 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

Access to print drivers in Windows 98 and Windows Me

Depending on the operating system on which you are installing the print drivers, you can gain access to the print drivers and different print-driver interfaces in several ways.

To gain access to the print-driver settings from within most software programs, follow these steps:

1.

Click File.

2.

Click Print.

3.

Click Properties.

The appearance and names of the driver tabs can vary, depending on the operating system. These driver settings apply only while that software program is open.

Properties driver tabs

In Windows 98 and Windows Me, you have access to a single set of driver tabs. To gain access to the print drivers, follow these steps:

1.

Click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

3.

Click Printers.

4.

Right-click the product name.

5.

Click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs.

The settings that you make on these driver tabs control print-job output and become the default settings for all software programs. The following print-driver tabs are available in Windows 98 and Windows Me:

General tab

Details tab

Color Management tab

Sharing tab

Finishing tab

Effects tab

Paper tab

Job Storage tab

Basics tab

Color tab

Configure tab

ENWW Access to print drivers in Windows 98 and Windows Me 101

Only product-specific HP driver tabs are described in this STR; the other driver tabs are part of the operating system. The following tabs are described:

Finishing

Effects

Paper

Job Storage

Configure

Basics

Color

Configure

The Job Storage tab is available only when the Job Storage Enable setting is selected on the tab. The settings take effect only after you click OK on the Configure tab.

102 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

Help system

The HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver include a full-featured Help system to provide assistance with printing and configuration options.

What's this? Help

Windows 98 and Windows Me support What's this? Help. You can gain access to What's this? Help messages in any of the following ways:

Right-click a control and then click What's this?. A pop-up Help window appears.

Click the ? button at the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an arrow with a question mark. When you use this special cursor to select a control, the pop-up Help window for that feature appears.

Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.

Context-sensitive Help

When you click the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, a context-sensitive Help message appears.

Incompatible Options messages

Incompatible Options settings (constraint) messages are unsolicited messages that appear in response to specific print-driver selections. These messages alert you to selections that are illogical or impossible given the product capabilities or the current settings of other controls. For example, if you click Print on Both Sides and then change the media type to Transparency, a message appears asking you to resolve this conflict.

NOTE

Constraint messages are limited, and the underlying software architecture might accept some settings that are illogical or impossible for the product to perform. Sending a job with incompatible settings can lead to unexpected results. If print jobs do not print as expected, check the product documentation for the product capabilities.`

ENWW

Figure 3-1

A typical constraint message with an OK button

Whenever a constraint message appears with the OK and Cancel buttons, the interpretation of the buttons is as follows:

Click OK to accept the change that was just made. The driver then resets the conflicting control to a setting that is compatible with the new value.

● Click Cancel to reject the change that was just made. The control returns to its previous value.

Help system 103

Bubble Help

Bubble Help features a graphical icon that resembles a cartoon speech bubble with a lowercase "i" in it, representing the international symbol for information. The following figure shows a Bubble Help icon on a driver tab.

Figure 3-2

A typical page with a Bubble Help icon

The bubble typically appears next to a control that is unavailable, although it can also accompany an available control if an important note concerning its use is available within the Help. Moving the pointer over the bubble changes the arrow to a gloved hand, which indicates that the area underneath the pointer is selectable. When the bubble is selected by using either the mouse or the keyboard, a message box appears that contains a brief explanation about why the control is disabled and what can be done to enable it. If the control is not disabled, the message is a tip or a precaution that you should be aware of when using that particular feature.

104 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

Finishing tab features

To gain access to the Finishing tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps:

1.

Click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

3.

Click Printers.

4.

Right-click the product name.

5.

Click Properties.

6.

Click the Finishing tab.

Use the Finishing tab to print on both sides of the page, to control the printed output on the page, and to print booklets. The following figure shows the Finishing tab.

ENWW

Figure 3-3

The default Finishing tab

The Finishing tab contains the following controls:

Print Task Quick Sets

Document Options

Document preview image

Print Quality

Finishing tab features 105

Print Task Quick Sets

The first group box in the upper portion of the Finishing tab is Print Task Quick Sets. Because they are all the same control, any change to the Print Task Quick Sets group box that is made on the tab affects the Print Task Quick Sets group boxes on all of the Properties driver tabs that have the Print

Task Quick Sets settings:

Finishing

Effects

Paper

Job Storage

Basics

Color

Use the Print Task Quick Sets setting to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all of the other print driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset by network-administrator settings or user-defined printing specifications (such as media size, pages per sheet, and so on).

By default, the Print Task Quick Sets menu is set to Type new Quick Set name here. When you change any of the default settings on any of the Properties driver tabs and you want to save the configuration as a Print Task Quick Set, highlight the words Type new Quick Set name here, type the name you want for your new Print Task Quick Set, and then click Save. The Print Task Quick Sets are saved in the system registry. To delete a Print Task Quick Set, select it in the drop-down menu and click

Delete.

NOTE

Administrators can predefine Print Task Quick Sets for their users. These administrator

Print Task Quick Sets are defined on the server and are available to users, but usually cannot be modified by users. Users can also define Print Task Quick Sets for their own use.

You can store a maximum of 25 Print Task Quick Sets on a particular system. If you attempt to save more, a message box appears that contains the following message: There are too many Print Task

Quick Sets defined. Please delete some before adding new ones.

The following settings are available in the Print Task Quick Sets drop-down menu:

Default Print Settings

User Guide Print Settings

Default Print Settings

When you select Default Print Settings, nearly all of the settings are restored to the combination that existed after the driver was installed (the original settings). However, if the attribute combinations that are associated with watermark definitions, custom media sizes, or the other quick sets have been changed or deleted, the original settings for those items are not restored.

The following table shows the default settings for Print Task Quick Sets. See HP Driver

Preconfiguration for information about preconfigurable driver settings.

106 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Table 3-1

Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer

Driver feature Feature setting location U.S. English Print

Task Quick Sets for

Default values

Preconfigurable

1

Print on Both Sides

Flip Pages Up

Finishing tab, Document Options group box

Finishing tab, Document Options group box

Watermark message angle (angle)

Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box

(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)

Available, not selected

Unavailable, not selected

Yes

Yes

Booklet Printing

Pages per Sheet

Print Page Borders

Page Order

Print Quality

Current Setting

Finishing tab, Document Options group box

Finishing tab, Document Options group box

Finishing tab, Document Options group box

Finishing tab, Document Options group box

Unavailable, Off

1

Unavailable

Unavailable

Finishing tab, Print Quality group box

Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box

(Click Details on Finishing tab.)

Default

This is the “Default” setting

Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box

(Click Details on Finishing tab.)

Automatic Raster Compression

(HP Traditional

PCL 6 Driver only)

Rendering Mode

(HP Traditional

PCL 5 Driver only)

Send Truetype as

Bitmaps

Output Settings

Print Document On

Size to print on

Scale to Fit

Watermarks

Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box

(Click Details on Finishing tab.)

Automatic

Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box

(Click Details on Finishing tab.)

Available, not selected

Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box

(Click Details on Finishing tab.)

Scale Patterns

(WYSIWIG) selected

Yes

Effects tab, Fit to Page group box Yes

Effects tab, Fit to Page group box

Off; print on the size that is specified on the Paper tab

Actual size specified on the Paper tab

Yes

2

Effects tab, Fit to Page group box

Effects tab, Watermarks dialog box

First Page Only

(watermark)

Effects tab, Watermark dialog box

Current Watermarks Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box

(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)

Watermark Message Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box

(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)

Message Angle

(watermark)

Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box

(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)

Unavailable, selected Yes

(none) Yes

Unavailable Yes

(none)

(none)

Diagonal

Yes

Yes

Yes

2

2

2

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Unavailable unless

Angle option is selected, 52 degrees

Yes

Finishing tab features 107

Table 3-1

Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer (continued)

Driver feature Feature setting location U.S. English Print

Task Quick Sets for

Default values

Preconfigurable

1

Name (watermark font)

Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,

Font Attributes group box

Color (watermark font)

Shading (watermark font )

Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,

Font Attributes group box

Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,

Font Attributes group box

Size (watermark font) Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,

Font Attributes group box

Arial

Gray

Very Light

80

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Style (watermark font)

Use Different Paper/

Covers

Size is:

Source is:

Type is:

Unlabeled group box

Job Storage Mode

Job Storage tab Status message about the destination of the job

Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Off

No

No

Proof and Hold

Private Job

Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,

Font Attributes group box

Paper tab, Paper Options group box

Paper tab, Paper Options group box

Paper tab, Paper Options group box

Paper tab, Paper Options group box

Regular

Off (All of the pages use the same media.)

No

Letter Yes

Automatically Select

Unspecified

Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not selected

Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not selected

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

2

2

Quick Copy

Stored Job

Orientation

Landscape

Rotate by 180 degrees

Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not selected

Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not selected

Require PIN to print option

PIN to Print

Windows User Name

Job Name

Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Unavailable, not selected

Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Unavailable, blank

Job Storage tab, User Name group box

Job Storage tab, Job Name group box

No

Unavailable, selected No

Unavailable,

Automatic selected

No

Unavailable No Display Job ID when printing

Copy

Job Storage tab, Job Notification Options group box

Basics tab, Copies group box 1 Yes

Basics tab, Orientation group box

Basics tab, Orientation group box

Basics tab, Orientation group box

Portrait

Available, not selected

Available, not selected

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

108 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Table 3-1

Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer (continued)

Driver feature Feature setting location U.S. English Print

Task Quick Sets for

Default values

Preconfigurable

1

Automatic (color options)

Manual (color options)

Current Setting

(color)

Edge Control

Neutral Grays (text)

Color tab, Color Options group box

Color tab, Color Options group box

Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click

Settings on Color tab.)

Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click

Settings on Color tab.)

Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click

Settings on Color tab.), General group box

Selected

Available, not selected

This is the

“Automatic” Setting

Normal

Black Only

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Halftone (text)

Neutral Grays

(graphics)

Halftone (graphics)

Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click

Settings on Color tab)

Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click

Settings on Color tab)

Detail

Black Only

Yes

Yes

Neutral Grays

(photographs)

Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click

Settings on Color tab)

Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click

Settings on Color tab)

Detail

4-Color

Yes

Yes

1

2

Halftone

(photographs)

Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click

Settings on Color tab)

Detail Yes

Preconfigurable by using one of the HP Preconfiguration tools. For more information, see

HP Driver Preconfiguration

, or go to: www.hp.com/go/hpdpc_sw .

Not supported in Windows 98 and Windows Me.

User Guide Print Settings

The User Guide Print Settings option provides a Print Task Quick Set for optimal printing of the

HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide.

When you select User Guide Print Settings, all of the settings are restored to the default settings, except for the following settings:

Print on Both Sides is set to ON

Flip Pages Up is set to ON

Booklet Printing is set to OFF and is unavailable

Pages per Sheet is set to 2

Page Order is set to Right then Down

Document Options

The Document Options group box contains the following controls:

Print on Both Sides

Flip Pages Up

Finishing tab features 109

Booklet Printing

Pages per Sheet

Print Page Borders

Page Order

Print on Both Sides

The default setting for the Print on Both Sides option is off (not selected). Print on Both Sides is available when the following conditions exist:

Type is: on the Paper tab is set to any of the following media types except for the following types:

Labels

Transparency

Envelope

Extra Heavy

Cardstock

Tough Paper

Size is: is set to any media size except for the following sizes:

Statement

Envelope #10

Envelope DL

Envelope C5

Envelope B5

Envelope Monarch

Double Japan Postscard Rotated

Selecting Print on Both Sides makes the Flip Pages Up and Booklet Printing options available when

Paper Size is set to the following media sizes:

Letter

Legal

A4

Automatically printing on both sides

The duplexing unit in the product prints on two sides of a sheet of paper when the Print on Both

Sides option is specified in the print job. The HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer comes with a duplexing unit installed in the following models:

HP Color LaserJet 3000dn

HP Color LaserJet 3000dtn

110 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

The HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer supports smart duplexing. The smart duplexing feature increases printing performance by preventing one-page print jobs or single-sided pages of a duplexed print job from going through the duplexing unit even when the duplexing feature has been selected in the driver.

All media types support the smart duplexing feature, except for media types that cannot be printed on both sides (such as labels, transparencies, and envelopes) and the following media types:

Prepunched

Preprinted

Letterhead

When the media type is set to Unspecified, the smart duplexing feature is disabled.

To achieve the best print quality when printing on the second side of the page, the printer needs to make adjustments to its print modes. When you select a media type, you are, in effect, instructing the printer to use a group of settings, such as fuser temperature and print speed, to produce the best possible quality. This group of settings is known as a mode or print mode, and a different print mode is used with each media type. Print-mode adjustments are automatic when the duplexing unit is used.

Manually printing on both sides

Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box to print on the second side of the media for the

HP Color LaserJet 3000 and HP Color LaserJet 3000n printer models, which do not have a duplexing unit installed. Also select Print on Both Sides (Manually) on the other HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer models for media types that are not available when using the automatic duplexing unit, such as cardstock and thick media.

Manually printing on the second side of a page is available when you are using the HP Traditional

PCL 6 Driver or the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver. (The PS Emulation Driver does not support this feature.) If a duplexing unit is installed and manual duplexing is enabled in the driver, the product automatically prints on both sides of media types that are supported for automatic duplexing (Letter, A4,

Legal, and 8.5 x 13, only), and forces manual printing on both sides for media types that are not supported.

To make the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box available in the document options, select the

Allow Manual Duplexing check box on the Configure tab in the Properties print-driver tabs. See

Paper

Handling Options in the

Configure tab features section of this chapter.

If you want to print on both sides manually while using media that is supported for automatic duplexing, you must click to clear the Duplexing Unit check box on the Configure tab.

Select the media type that corresponds to the media that you are using for the print job. The following media types have a different print modes when you manually print on the second side:

Plain

Preprinted

Letterhead

● Prepunched

Bond

Recycled

Finishing tab features 111

Colored

● Rough

Cardstock media can be manually printed on the second side, but no change occurs to the print mode.

Transparencies and labels should not be manually printed on the second side.

To print a multiple-page document, follow these steps:

1.

Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box.

2.

Click OK. The even-number pages of the document print.

3.

When the control panel shows the MANUALLY FEED message, insert the stack of media (on which the even-number pages have been printed) as indicated in the following figure.

Figure 3-4

Print on Both Sides Instructions dialog box

When you have completed the steps that appear in the dialog box, the second half of the print job prints on the back side of the stack of media. The driver does not require the program to specifically support odd- and even-page printing, because the driver coordinates this function.

Flip Pages Up

Use the Flip Pages Up check box, which is available only when Print on Both Sides is selected, to specify the duplex-binding option. By default, the Flip Pages Up check box is not available. The following table demonstrates the results of selecting this check box, depending on the media orientation that is selected on the Basics tab.

112 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Table 3-2

Page orientation

Orientation (Basics tab)

Portrait

Landscape

Flip Pages Up selected

Short-edge binding

Long-edge binding

Flip Pages Up not selected

Long-edge binding

Short-edge binding

When Print on Both Sides is selected, the document preview image changes to show a spiral binding along either the left edge or the top edge of the page. In addition, a folded-over corner appears in the lower-right portion of the preview image, indicating that printing occurs on the back side. An arrow on the folded-over corner points in the direction that the pages would be flipped if they were bound together.

Short-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by flipping over like the pages of a calendar.

Long-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by turning like the pages of a book.

Booklet Printing

The Booklet Printing drop-down menu is visible when Print on Both Sides is selected and a supported media size is selected in the Size is: drop-down menu on the Paper tab. The Booklet Printing dropdown menu offers choices that are based on the current media size. The default setting is Off. The other settings have the following format, where [paper size] depends on the media size that is set on the

Paper tab:

[paper size] (Left Binding)

[paper size] (Right Binding)

When you select [paper size] (Left Binding) or [paper size] (Right Binding), the document preview image changes to show the location of the binding. If you change the Pages per Sheet setting manually

to 4, 6, 9, or 16 pages per sheet, the booklet setting is disabled. For more information, see Pages per

Sheet

.

Booklet printing is disabled when unsupported media sizes (such as envelopes) are selected as the media size, and an incompatibility error message appears when you click OK to close the driver.

The Booklet Printing drop-down menu appears only when the following conditions exist:

Print on Both Sides (on the Finishing tab) is selected.

% of Normal Size (on the Effects tab) is 100.

Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is 1.

Size is: (on the Paper tab) is set to Letter, Legal, or A4.

If any of these conditions is not met (except the first), a Bubble Help appears next to Booklet

Printing to tell you why it is disabled.

Book and Booklet Printing

The HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer supports both book and booklet printing.

A book is a print job that consists of at least two pages. It can have a different media type for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, or back cover. Use the Front Cover, First Page, Other Pages,

Last Page, or Back Cover settings on the Paper tab (available when you select the Use Different

Finishing tab features 113

Paper/Covers check box) to select different printing options for the book. For more information, see

Paper tab features in this chapter.

A booklet is a print job that places two pages on each side of a sheet that can be folded into a booklet that is half the size of the media type. Use the Booklet Printing drop-down menu on the Finishing tab to control booklet settings.

To print a booklet

Complete the following steps to print a booklet in most software programs.

1.

In the software program, click File, click Print, and then click Properties.

2.

Click the Finishing tab.

3.

Select the Print on Both Sides check box.

4.

In the Booklet Printing drop-down menu, select the type of booklet printing that you want. The booklet printing type consists of the media size and the location of the binding (for example, Letter

[Left binding]).

5.

Click OK in the print driver.

6.

Click OK in the print dialog box to print.

Figure 3-5

Printing a booklet

Pages per Sheet

Use the Pages per Sheet option to select the number of pages that you want to print on a single sheet of media. If you choose to print more than one page per sheet, the pages appear smaller and are

114 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

arranged on the sheet in the order that they would otherwise be printed. The Pages per Sheet dropdown menu provides six settings:

1 page per sheet (default)

2 pages per sheet

4 pages per sheet

6 pages per sheet

9 pages per sheet

16 pages per sheet

When you select an option other than 1 page per sheet, booklet printing is unavailable.

Print Page Borders

Related controls that are indented beneath the Pages per Sheet edit box are Print Page Borders and

Page Order, which become active when Pages per Sheet is greater than 1.

Print Page Borders sets a line around each page image on a printed sheet to help visually define the borders of each logical page.

Page Order

The Page Order drop-down menu contains the following selections:

Right, then Down

Down, then Right

Left, then Down

Down, then Left

The document preview image changes to reflect alterations in these settings, as shown by the examples in the following figure.

ENWW

Figure 3-6

Page-order preview images

2 pages per sheet

4 pages per sheet

6 pages per sheet

9 pages per sheet

16 pages per sheet

Finishing tab features 115

Document preview image

The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side up. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Properties driver tabs:

Finishing

Effects

Paper

Basics

Color

Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.

When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image.

The dimensions label that appears below the preview image reflects the selected page size. The horizontal dimension is always first, so the order of the numbers reverses when the orientation changes.

Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units.

Print Quality

The HP Color LaserJet 3000 print-driver Print Quality group box provides options that control output settings and font settings.

The default setting for Print Quality is Default. To change the default print-quality settings, click

Details…. The Print Quality Details dialog box opens. The Print Quality Details dialog box has different options depending on the driver that you are using.

Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver

The Print Quality Details dialog box provides the options for print-quality settings in the HP Traditional

PCL 6 Driver as shown in the following figure.

Figure 3-7

Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver

The following options are available:

Current Setting

116 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Graphic Settings

Font Settings

Output Settings

Current Setting

The Current Setting group box has two settings in the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver. When you make a change in the Print Quality Details dialog box, the setting changes from This is the "Default"

setting to This is a "Custom" setting.

Graphic Settings

The Graphics Settings group box contains the Raster Compression drop-down menu.

Use the Raster Compression feature to select the graphics-compression method. The Raster

Compression drop-down menu provides the following settings:

Automatic. The print driver determines the best compression method to use. This is the default setting.

Best Quality. This setting forces the print driver to use a lossless compression method. (Lossless means that no data is lost during compression.)

Maximum Compression. Where applicable, this setting requires the print driver to always use a lossy compression method (some data is lost).

Font Settings

In the Font Settings group box, the only available option is Send TrueType as Bitmaps, which provides an alternative for software programs that cannot easily use TrueType fonts for special graphic purposes, such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The Send TrueType as Bitmaps check box is not selected (clear) by default. If you select this option, the driver sends TrueType fonts to the printer as outlines, which retains the standard format (outlines) of the fonts.

Output Settings

The Output Settings group box contains the following controls and default settings:

Use the Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) feature to address the moiré effect that is created when certain programs encounter certain patterns. Use this feature to turn off the pattern scaling. What you lose is WYSIWYG with patterns, but the printed result might look better. The feature works only with programs that use vector hatch patterns. This option is selected by default.

The Print All Text as Black feature is not selected by default. When the feature is selected, the driver prints all text as black regardless of the original document text color. Color text is printed as black, except for white text, which remains white. (White text is a reliable method of printing reverse typeface against a dark background.) This setting does not affect graphic images on the page, nor does it affect any text that is part of a graphic.

Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver

The Print Quality Details dialog box provides the options for print-quality settings in the HP Traditional

PCL 5 Driver as shown in the following figure.

Finishing tab features 117

Figure 3-8

Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver

The following options are available:

Current Setting

Graphic Settings

Font Settings

Output Settings

Current Setting

The Current Setting group box has two settings in the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver. When you make a change in the Print Quality Details dialog box, the setting changes from This is the "Default"

setting to This is a "Custom" setting.

Graphic Settings

The Graphic Settings group box in the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver has settings for the graphics rendering mode. The following Rendering Mode: options are available:

Automatic. This is the default setting.

Send Graphics as Vector. Select this setting to send graphics to the printer as a combination of

HP Graphics Language, V2 (HP-GL/2), and raster images. This setting might produce higherquality output.

Send Graphics as Raster. Select this setting to send all graphics to the printer as images composed of individual dots. This setting might improve printing speed in some cases.

Send Page as Raster. Select this setting to send all graphics and text (TrueType fonts) to the printer as images composed of individual dots. Use Send Page as Raster if you are experiencing problems with overlapping text and graphics. With this setting, the Send TrueType as Bitmaps option has no effect.

Font Settings

In the Font Settings group box, the only available option is Send TrueType as Bitmaps, which provides an alternative for software programs that cannot easily use TrueType fonts for special graphic purposes, such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The Send TrueType as Bitmaps check box is not selected (clear)

118 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

by default. If you select this option, the driver sends TrueType fonts to the printer as outlines, which retains the standard format (outlines) of the fonts.

Output Settings

The Output Settings group box contains controls for pattern scaling, and to print all text as black.

The following are default values for the Output Settings:

Use the Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) feature to address the moiré effect that is created when certain programs encounter certain patterns. Use this feature to turn off the pattern scaling. What you lose is WYSIWYG with patterns, but the printed result might look better. The feature works only with programs that use vector hatch patterns. This option is selected by default.

The Print All Text as Black feature is not selected by default. When the feature is selected, the driver prints all text as black regardless of the original document text color. Color text is printed as black, except for white text, which remains white. (White text is a reliable method of printing reverse typeface against a dark background.) This setting does not affect graphic images on the page, nor does it affect any text that is part of a graphic.

ENWW Finishing tab features 119

Effects tab features

To gain access to the Effects tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps:

1.

Click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

3.

Click Printers.

4.

Right-click the product name.

5.

Click Properties.

6.

Click the Effects tab.

Use the Effects tab to create unique media effects such as scaling and watermarks. The following figure shows the Effects tab.

Figure 3-9

Effects tab

The Effects tab contains the following controls:

Print Task Quick Sets

Fit To Page

Document preview image

Watermarks

120 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

Print Task Quick Sets

Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Properties driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by the administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see

Finishing tab features .

Fit To Page

The Fit To Page group box contains the following controls:

Print Document On

Scale to Fit

% of Normal Size

Print Document On

Use Print Document On to format the document for one media size, and then print the document on a different media size, with or without scaling the page image to fit the new media size.

The Print Document On control is disabled by either of the following conditions:

% of Normal Size is not 100.

Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1.

When Print Document On is selected, the drop-down menu shows the media sizes on which you can print. The list contains all of the standard media sizes that the selected media source supports and any custom size that you have created. When Print Document On is selected, Scale to Fit is automatically selected. Clear this check box if you do not want your document reduced or enlarged to fit on the selected media size.

Scale to Fit

The Scale to Fit option specifies whether each formatted document page image is scaled to fit the target media size. By default, Scale to Fit is selected when Print Document On is selected. If the setting is turned off, then the document page images will not be scaled, and are instead centered at full size on the target media. If the document size is larger than the target media size, then the document image is clipped. If the document size is smaller, then it is centered within the target media. The following figure shows preview images for a document formatted for Legal-size media with the Print Document On option selected and the target size specified as Letter.

ENWW

Figure 3-10

Preview images – Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right)

Effects tab features 121

When the size for which the document is formatted (that is, the logical size) differs from the target size, the document preview image uses a dashed gray line to show the boundaries of the logical page in relation to the target page size.

% of Normal Size

The % of Normal Size option provides a slider bar for scaling the percentage setting. The default setting in the entry box is 100% of the normal size. The normal size is defined as the media size that is selected within the driver or what the driver receives from the software program (if the software program does not negotiate the media size with the driver). The driver scales the page by the appropriate factor and sends it to the printer.

The limits of the range are from 25% to 400%, and any values outside the range are adjusted to those limits as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the Tab key is pressed or another control is selected).

Any change to the scale also changes the document preview image, which increases or decreases from the upper-left corner of the preview.

The slider bar controls the scale directly. The value in the edit box changes as the slider-bar indicator is dragged, and the document preview image is updated to the new image scale. Each click on the arrows increases or decreases the scale by 1%. Each click on the slider bar affects the scale by 10%.

You cannot achieve an exact value by dragging the slider-bar indicator. Instead, either use the sliderbar indicator to approximate the value that you want and then use the arrows to refine the value, or type the value into the entry box.

The following settings disable % of Normal Size:

Print Document On (on the Effects tab) is selected.

Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1.

Document preview image

The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Properties driver tabs:

Finishing

Effects

Paper

Basics

Color

For more information about the document preview image, see

Finishing tab features

.

Watermarks

Use the Watermarks feature to select a watermark, create your own custom watermarks (text only), or edit an existing watermark.

The Watermarks group box contains the following controls:

Current Watermarks

122 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

First Page Only

Edit…

Current Watermarks

The following watermarks are preset in the driver:

(none)

Confidential

Draft

SAMPLE

The drop-down menu shows alphabetically-sorted watermarks that are currently available on the system, plus the string "(none)", which indicates that no watermark is selected. This is the default setting.

Any watermark that is selected from this list appears in the document preview image.

First Page Only

When First Page Only is selected, the watermark is printed only on the first page of the document. The

First Page Only check box is not available when the current watermark selection is "(none)".

Watermarks are applied to logical pages. For example, when Pages per Sheet is set to "4" and First

Page Only is turned off, four watermarks appear on the physical page (one on each logical page).

Edit…

Click Edit…, and the Watermark Details dialog box appears. The following figure shows the

Watermark Details dialog box.

Effects tab features 123

Figure 3-11

Watermark Details dialog box

The dialog box shows a document preview image and provides options for creating a new watermark and controlling the message angle and the font attributes.

The Watermark Details dialog box contains the following controls:

NOTE

This section also contains information about default watermark settings.

Current Watermarks

Watermark Message

Message Angle

Document preview image

Font Attributes

Default watermark settings

Current Watermarks

The Current Watermarks group box contains a list of available watermarks, both predefined watermarks that are available in the driver and any new watermarks that you have created.

To create a new watermark, click New. The new watermark appears in the Current Watermarks list and in the Watermark Message edit box as Untitled until you name it.

To name the new watermark, type the selected watermark text in the Watermark Message edit box.

To delete a watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list and click Delete.

124 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

NOTE

You can have no more that 30 watermarks in the Current Watermarks list at one time.

When you reach the limit of 30 watermarks, the New button is disabled, and a Bubble Help message appears that explains why the button is disabled and how to make it available.

To edit an existing watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list. If you change the

Watermark Message for that watermark, you are, in effect, creating a new watermark.

Watermark Message

The Watermark Message is also the name that identifies the watermark in the Current Watermarks list, except when more than one watermark has the same message. For example, you might want several different watermarks with the message DRAFT, each in a different font or size. When this occurs, the string is appended with a space, a pound sign, and a number (for example, Draft #2). When a number is added, the number two is used first, but if the resulting name is also in the list, then the number increases until the name is unique (Draft #3, Draft #4, and so on).

Message Angle

Use the controls in the Message Angle group box to print the watermark in different orientations on the page. All settings center the watermark string within the page; the selection of a particular setting affects only the angle of the string placement. The following settings are available:

Diagonal. This is the default setting. Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans the lower-left to upper-right corners of the page.

Horizontal. Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans the mid-;eft and mid-right edges of the page.

Custom. Select this setting to place the text at the specified angle across the page. Use the numeric spin box to select the angle.

Document preview image

The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the Watermark Details dialog box. The document preview image changes to reflect the modifications that you make in the Watermark

Details dialog box.

Font Attributes

Use the controls in the Font Attributes group box to change the font and the shading, size, and style of the font.

The Font Attributes group box contains the following controls:

Name

The Name drop-down menu lists TrueType fonts that are currently installed on the system. The default is language-dependent.

Color

The Color drop-down menu contains the following selections:

Gray

Red

Effects tab features 125

Yellow

Green

Cyan

Blue

Magenta

Shading

The default Shading setting for new and preset watermarks is Very Light. The following range of shades is available from the Shading drop-down menu:

Lightest

Very Light (default)

Light

Medium Light

Medium

Medium Dark

Dark

Very Dark

Darkest

These values represent the intensity of the gray that is used. Select Light to produce a lightly saturated gray watermark. Select Lightest to produce the lightest shade of watermark. Select

Darkest to produce a black watermark.

Size

Font sizes from 1 to 999 points are available from the Size menu. The default point size is languagedependent. The default point size for preset watermarks is language-dependent.

Style

The following settings are available:

Regular

Bold

Italic

Bold Italic

The default Style setting for new and preset watermarks is Regular.

Default watermark settings

The following table shows Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks.

126 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

Table 3-3

Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks

Setting

Name

Color

Shading

Size

Style

New watermark

Arial

Gray

Very Light

80

Regular

Preset watermark

Varies by language

Gray

Very Light

Varies by language

Regular

Click OK to accept all of the changes that have been made in the Watermark Details dialog box. Clicking

Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark and then select a different watermark or click New, all of the changes are saved, and only the current, unsaved changes can be canceled.

ENWW Effects tab features 127

Paper tab features

To gain access to the Paper tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps:

1.

Click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

3.

Click Printers.

4.

Right-click the product name.

5.

Click Properties.

6.

Click the Paper tab.

Use the Paper tab to specify the size, type, and source of the media. You can also use this tab to specify different media selections for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, and back cover of the document. The following figure shows the Paper tab.

Figure 3-12

Paper tab

The Paper tab contains the following controls:

Print Task Quick Sets

Paper Options

Document preview image

128 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

Product image

Print Task Quick Sets

Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Properties driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by the administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see

Finishing tab features .

Paper Options

The settings specified in the Paper Options group box on the Paper tab apply to all of the pages of the document. The following figure shows the Paper Options group box and the selections available by default.

ENWW

Figure 3-13

Paper Options group box (default)

The appearance of the Paper Options group box changes when the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected. For convenience, the settings in the Paper Options group box are described in the following order:

Size is

Source is

Type is

Use Different Paper/Covers

Custom

Size is

The Size is: setting is a drop-down menu that lists all of the supported media sizes.

NOTE

When you move the mouse over the dimensions label, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units.

You can specify size for all of the settings in the Paper Options group box. When you set the media size in the driver, the entire print-job output uses that media size. That is, if the print job uses Letter-size

Paper tab features 129

media, any option that you select from the available Use Different Paper/Covers options must also use Letter-size media.

Because print-driver settings are overridden by media-size settings in most software programs, it is generally best to use the print driver to set media size only for software programs that lack a media-size setting, such as NotePad, or when you are producing a book or a booklet that does not require different media sizes.

NOTE

Certain software programs can override the size command and specify different media sizes within a single document.

When you change the print-driver setting to a media size that is not currently loaded in the product, a control-panel message appears that prompts you to load the media size or select another tray.

For information about media sizes, see Media attributes .

When the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected and different options are configured, the

Size is:, Source is:, and Type is: menus change, offering a variety of options. For more information, see

Use Different Paper/Covers

.

Custom

The Custom Paper Size dialog box appears when you click the Custom button on the Paper tab. The following figure shows the initial appearance of the Custom Paper Size dialog box.

NOTE

The Custom button is not available when Use Different Paper/Covers is selected

and any setting other than First Page is also selected.

Figure 3-14

Custom Paper Size dialog box

When the Custom Paper Size dialog box appears, the drop-down menu in the Name group contains one of two things, depending on the current paper-size selection on the Paper tab:

● If the paper-size selection is a previously defined custom size, then the drop-down menu contains the name of that custom size.

If the paper-size selection is a standard media size, then the drop-down menu shows the default name Untitled (plus a number sign [#] and a numerical value) for a custom media size.

130 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

NOTE

In Windows 98 and Windows Me, two names for the same size media can coexist (for example, "big" and "BIG" can both be used as names for custom-size media measuring 8.4 inches x 11 inches).

The new name is compared only against the list of user-defined custom media-size names, and not against the standard media-size names.

The complete set of titles for this button and the specific characteristics that determine its title and capabilities are discussed in the

Save, Delete, or Rename

section.

Name

The Name drop-down menu shows the name of the custom media size that was selected most recently.

Use the Name drop-down menu to select from the list of currently defined custom media sizes, or to type a new name for a custom media size.

The name that appears in the Name drop-down menu is one of three things, depending on the following conditions:

If a saved custom media size has been selected from the drop-down menu and the other controls in the dialog box have not been changed since, then the Name drop-down menu shows the name of the last selected custom media size.

● If the width or height controls have been changed since a custom size was selected or saved, or if a saved media size has just been deleted, then the Name drop-down menu shows the default name of "Untitled."

If a new name has been typed into the Name drop-down menu for the purpose of saving a new size or renaming an existing size, then that new name will remain in the drop-down menu until a saved custom media size has been selected from the drop-down menu.

If you type a new name into the Name drop-down menu, but then do not click Save, you can change the width and height values without losing the name. However, if a saved media-size name is selected from the drop-down menu, any unsaved name or size values are lost without warning, and replaced by the values of the selected custom media size.

Paper tab features 131

Save, Delete, or Rename

The dynamic command button located under the Name drop-down menu has three possible labels:

Save, Delete, and Rename.

Save is the button title whenever the height and width values have been changed since the most recent save action or since the selection of an existing custom media size. Clicking the button causes the name in the Name drop-down menu to be compared against each of the saved names.

If a duplicate is found, a dialog box appears, asking if it is okay to replace the existing item. If you click Yes, the old item is updated with the new values. If you click No, the driver returns to the

Custom Paper Size dialog box, where you can type a different name. The new name is compared only against the list of user-defined custom media names, and not against the standard media-size names. Whenever the command button has the Save title, it is the default button.

Delete is the button title whenever the name of an existing (previously saved) custom media size appears in the Name drop-down menu, such as immediately after selecting an item from the dropdown menu or clicking Save. Clicking Delete causes the saved custom media size to be deleted, after which the Name drop-down menu changes to Untitled, the height and width controls are unchanged, and the button title changes to Save.

Rename is the button title when you type something into the Name drop-down menu after selecting an existing custom media size from the drop-down menu. If no duplicate is found, then the name of the stored custom media size changes to match the contents of the Name drop-down menu.

The following table illustrates the relationships between the Name drop-down menu, the command button, and the actions that take users from one state to another.

Table 3-4

Name drop-down menu text strings

State Button label Action Next state

1

Drop-down menu contents

Untitled Save

2

3

4

<user-typed text>

<name of saved item> Delete

<user-typed text>

Save

Rename

Click Save.

Type something into the Name drop-down menu.

Change the width or height values.

Select a saved item from the drop-down menu.

Click Save.

Type something into the Name drop-down menu.

Change the width or height values.

Select a saved item from the drop-down menu.

Click Delete.

Type something into the Name drop-down menu.

Change the width or height values.

Select a saved item from the drop-down menu.

Click Rename (when the name is unique).

Click Rename (when the name is a duplicate).

Type something into the Name drop-down menu.

3

4

4

1

4

1

3

3

2

2

3

3

2

1

3

132 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Table 3-4

Name drop-down menu text strings (continued)

State Drop-down menu contents

Button label Action

Change the width or height values.

Select a saved item from the drop-down menu.

Next state

2

3

Custom size (width and height controls)

The width and height values can be changed either by typing numeric strings into the edit boxes, or by using the up and down arrows. The paper and envelope icons visually define width and height.

Any entry that is greater than the maximum limits of the width and height control is rounded down to the maximum valid entry, while any entry that is smaller than the minimum limits of the width and height control is rounded up to the minimum valid entry. See

Custom width and height control limits

.

If units are in millimeters, the custom media-size range minimum is the limit rounded up to the nearest whole millimeter. The custom media-size range maximum is the limit rounded down to the nearest whole millimeter. Any non-numerical entry reverts to the last valid entry. Width and height entries are validated when the focus has changed.

The resolution of each control is 1 millimeter or 1/10 of an inch, depending on the current measurement units. Clicking the up and down arrows increases or decreases the current value by the increment amount (within the allowed range of values). The computer determines the rate at which the values change.

Unit indicator labels change dynamically to indicate inches or millimeters, depending on the measurement units the driver is currently using. To change measurement units, click the dynamic measurement units button (either Use Inches or Use Metric).

Custom width and height control limits

The minimum media size for the HP Color LaserJet 3000 is 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) and the maximum is 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches). The following table summarizes media size limits for each media-handling device.

Table 3-5

PCL 6 custom media sizes

Tray

Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose)

Tray 2 (250-sheet)

Tray 3 (500-sheet)

Duplexing unit

Dimensions

Width

Height

Width

Height

Width

Height

Width

Height

Minimum

76.2 mm (3.0 inches)

127.0 mm (5.0 inches)

148.0 mm (5.83 inches)

210.0 mm (8.26 inches)

148.0 mm (5.83 inches)

210.0 mm (8.26 inches)

148.0 mm (5.83 inches)

210.0 mm (8.26 inches)

Maximum

215 mm (8.5 inches)

355.6 mm (14.0 inches)

215.9 mm (8.5 inches)

355.6 mm (14.0 inches)

215.9 mm (8.5 inches)

355.6 mm (14.0 inches)

215.9 mm (8.5 inches)

355.6 mm (14.0 inches)

Paper tab features 133

Dynamic measurement units

Use the dynamic measurement units button to toggle the unit of measurement between standard

(inches) and metric (millimeters) units of measurement. The label on this button is dynamic, depending on the measurement units that are in use. If the custom size currently shows the measurements in inches, the button is labeled Use Millimeters. If the custom size currently shows the measurements in millimeters, the button is labeled Use Inches. Click the button to switch measurement-unit types.

Close

When you click the Close button, the Custom Paper Size dialog box closes according to the logic in the following table. In all cases, any custom media sizes that are successfully saved (and not renamed or deleted) while the dialog box is open remains in the Size is: drop-down menu on the Paper tab. The following table lists options that appear when you click the Close button.

Table 3-6

Close dialog-box text strings

If the drop-down menu contains

Untitled

<user-typed text>

<name of saved item>

<user-typed text>

And the button says

Save

Save

Delete

Rename

Then this happens when you click the

Close button

The dialog box closes, but you lose the changes that were not saved.

The current media size remains the same as it was when you clicked the

Custom button.

The dialog box closes, but you lose the changes that were not saved.

The current media size remains the same as it was when you clicked the

Custom button.

The dialog box closes, and the current media size is set to the size that last appeared in the drop-down menu.

The dialog box closes, but you lose the changes that were not saved.

The current media size remains the same as it was when you clicked the

Custom button.

Source is

The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional source trays that are installed through the Configure tab also appear here.

The Source is: drop-down menu can contain the following options, depending on what has been installed on the product:

Automatically select

Manual Feed in Tray 1

Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose tray)

134 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Tray 2 (250-sheet tray)

Tray 3 (500-sheet tray)

The default setting is Automatically Select. When this setting is selected, the HP Color LaserJet 3000 uses the source tray that supports the media size that you have selected. If you select a source tray other than Automatically select, make sure that the correct media size is loaded in the source tray.

For more information about media sources, see the

Media attributes section of this STR.

Type is

The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the HP Color LaserJet 3000 supports.

When you use the default setting, Unspecified, the printer uses the default media type, which is usually

Plain.

The following standard types appear in the list:

Unspecified

Plain

Preprinted

Letterhead

Transparency

Prepunched

Labels

Bond

Recycled

Color

Cardstock 164-220 g/m2 (45–60.3 lb)

Rough

Heavy 105-120 g/m2 (28.8–32.9 lb)

Envelope

Light 60-75 g/m2 (16.4–20.5 lb)

Intermediate 90-104 g/m2 (24.7–28.5 lb)

Extra Heavy 120-163 g/m2 (32.9–44.7 lb)

Glossy 106-120 g/m2 (29.1–32.9 lb)

Tough Paper (Glossy Film)

The default setting is Unspecified, and the program selects the media type. If you select a different setting, make sure that the correct media type is loaded in the tray that you selected in the Source is: setting.

When you change the print-driver setting to a media type that is not currently loaded in the product, a control-panel message appears that prompts you to load the media type or select another tray.

Paper tab features 135

For more information about media types, see the Media attributes section of this STR.

Use Different Paper/Covers

You can print books that are comprised of different media types using the Use Different Paper/

Covers options.

When you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box, the following settings can appear in the group box, along with associated options:

Front Cover

First Page

Other Pages

Last Page

Back Cover

NOTE

You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/

Covers options use the size that you selected in the First Page settings and the Size is: driver setting becomes unavailable for all of the other Use Different Paper/Covers options. Therefore, the First Page settings are described first in the following sections.

When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings you select remain configured until you close the software program.

Each option for the Use Different Paper/Covers setting is described in the following sections.

Front Cover

Use the Front Cover options to include a blank or preprinted front cover on a document, or to include a front cover from a source tray that is different from the one that is used for the remainder of the document.

The Front Cover setting and options are shown in the following figure.

Figure 3-15

Front Cover options

136 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

The following are the Front Cover options:

Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box

Source is: drop-down menu

Type is: drop-down menu

When you select Front Cover, you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down menus become available and a check mark appears next to the Front Cover option.

The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a front cover to the document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the

Source is section of this chapter.

The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more information about the Type is:drop-down menu settings, see the

Type is

section of this chapter.

First Page

Use the First Page option to select an alternative media size, type, or source for the first page of a document. The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box. The First Page setting is selected by default.

ENWW

Figure 3-16

First Page options

The following are the First Page options:

Size is: drop-down menu

Source is: drop-down menu

Type is: drop-down menu

The Size is: driver setting for the first page applies to the entire print job. When this is set, the setting becomes unavailable for all the other Use Different Paper/Covers options.

The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the

Paper tab features 137

Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the Source is

section of this chapter.

The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the

Type is section of this chapter.

Other Pages

Use the Other Pages options to select an alternative media source (or the same source as First

Page) for the other pages of the document.

The Other Pages setting and options are shown in the following figure.

Figure 3-17

Other Pages options

The following are the Other Pages options:

Source is: drop-down menu

Type is: drop-down menu

The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the

Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the Source is

section of this chapter.

The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the

Type is section of this chapter.

Last Page

Use the Last Page options to select an alternative media type or source for the last page of a document.

The Last Page setting and options are shown in the following figure.

138 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

Figure 3-18

Last Page options

The following are the Last Page options:

Source is: drop-down menu

Type is: drop-down menu

The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the

Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the

Source is section of this chapter.

The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the

Type is section of this chapter.

Back Cover

Use the Back Cover options to include a blank or preprinted back cover on a document.

The Back Cover setting and options are shown in the following figure.

ENWW

Figure 3-19

Back Cover setting

Paper tab features 139

The following are the Back Cover options:

Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box

Source is: drop-down menu

Type is: drop-down menu

When you select Back Cover, you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down menus become available and a check mark appears next to the Back Cover option.

NOTE

The Back Cover options are not available when the Booklet Printing Layout setting is enabled on the Finishing tab. The back cover setting is unavailable, because this page would otherwise be printed in the middle of a booklet.

The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a back cover to the document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the

Source is

section of this chapter.

The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the

Type is section of this chapter.

Document preview image

The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Properties driver tabs:

Finishing

Effects

Paper

Basics

Color

For more information about the document preview image, see

Finishing tab features

.

Product image

The bitmap image in the lower-right portion of the Paper tab represents the current physical configuration of the product and corresponds to its configuration data. It should look the same as the image that appears in the same location on the Configure tab in the Printer Properties.

On the Paper tab, the product image contains hot spots where you can select a media source. When you use the mouse to move the pointer over a hot spot, the arrow reverts to a gloved hand. The current

140 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

media source tray, whether selected from the drop-down menu or from a product-image hot spot, is highlighted on the printer image. The following points are worth noting:

The Automatically Select setting in the Source is: drop-down menu does not have a corresponding area to highlight in the product image. Selecting other settings in this menu highlights the corresponding part in the printer image.

Selecting the area that represents a tray in the image always selects the corresponding tray in the

Source is: option. Manual Feed in Tray 1, which is available from the Source is: drop-down menu, cannot be selected by selecting the image.

On the Paper tab, only source trays have product-image hot spots and can be highlighted.

ENWW Paper tab features 141

Job Storage tab features

To gain access to the Job Storage tab, follow these steps:

1.

Click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

3.

Click Printers.

4.

Right-click the product name.

5.

Click Properties.

6.

Click the Job Storage tab.

NOTE

The Job Storage tab appears only when a hard disk is installed or at least 128 MB of total memory is installed and configured.

Use the job-storage features to store print jobs in the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer memory for printing at a later time. These job-storage features are described in the following sections.

The Job Storage tab appears among the driver tabs only if the job-storage feature is enabled. To support job-storage features for complex jobs, or if you often print complex graphics, print postscript

(.PS) documents, or use many downloaded fonts, HP recommends that you install additional memory, install a hard disk, or both. Added memory also gives you more flexibility in supporting job-storage features. A hard disk or a minimum total memory of 128 MB is required to use the job-storage features.

After a hard disk or additional memory is installed, the driver must be configured to reflect the changes in the product. If bidirectional communication is enabled in your environment, the Update Now feature can be used to update the drivers. For more information, see the

Configure tab features

section in this chapter.

To configure the drivers manually after installing a hard disk or additional memory, follow these steps:

1.

Click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

3.

Click Printers.

4.

Right-click the product name.

5.

Click Properties.

6.

Click the Configure tab.

7.

Under Other Options, click More….

8.

If additional memory has been installed, change the setting in the Total Memory: drop-down menu.

If you select at least 128 MB of total installed memory, this also selects the Job Storage Enabled check box.

9.

If a hard disk has been installed, select the Printer Hard Disk check box in the Storage group box. This also selects the Job Storage Enabled check box.

10.

Click OK to make the hard-disk and job-storage features available.

142 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

You can disable the job-storage feature while leaving the hard disk enabled. To disable the job-storage feature, follow these steps:

1.

Click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

3.

Click Printers.

4.

Right-click the product name.

5.

Click Properties.

6.

Click the Configure tab.

7.

Click More….

8.

Click to clear the Job Storage Enabled check box in the More Configuration Options box.

NOTE

When the job-storage features are disabled (that is, when the Job Storage

Enabled check box is not selected and the settings are saved), the Job Storage tab is not visible.

If the job-storage feature is enabled (without installing a hard disk but with at least 128 MB of total memory), two Job Storage Mode settings are available on the Job Storage tab:

Proof and Hold

Private Job

Two additional Job Storage Mode settings become available on the Job Storage tab if a hard disk is installed:

Quick Copy

Stored Job

The following figure shows the Job Storage tab.

Job Storage tab features 143

Figure 3-20

Job Storage tab

The Job Storage tab contains the following controls:

NOTE

This section also contains information about using the job-storage feature when printing.

Print Task Quick Sets

Status dialog box

Job Storage Mode

PIN

Job Notification Options

User Name

Job Name

Using job-storage features when printing

Print Task Quick Sets

Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Properties driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by the administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see

Finishing tab features .

144 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Status dialog box

The unlabeled dialog box on the Job Storage tab contains a status message about the destination of a print job. The status information changes depending on the selections that are made on the Job

Storage tab.

Job Storage Mode

Use the Job Storage Mode options on the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer to store documents at the product and then control their printing at the product control panel.

The HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer offers the following Job Storage Mode options:

Off

Proof and Hold

Private Job

Quick Copy

Stored Job

These options and the settings that control them are described in the following sections.

Off

When selected, this option turns the job-storage feature off (it is disabled), which means that the print job will not be stored in the product.

Proof and Hold

To use the Proof and Hold option, the job-storage feature must be enabled, and the product must have a minimum total memory of 128 MB.

When selected, this option stores the print job in memory and prints only the first copy of the job, allowing you to check the first copy. If the document prints correctly, you can print the remaining copies of the print job at the product control panel. You can set the number of proof-and-hold print jobs that can be stored in the product at the control panel.

After it is released for printing, the proof-and-hold job is immediately deleted from the product. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second proof-andhold job to the product with the same user name and job name as an existing proof-and-hold job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job. Proof-and-hold jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.

NOTE

The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proof-andhold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held document. Also, a document that has the same user name and job name as one that is already stored on the hard disk will overwrite the existing document.

Private Job

To use the Private Job option, the job-storage feature must be enabled, and the product must have a minimum total memory of 128 MB.

Job Storage tab features 145

When you select Private Job, the print job is sent to the product, but is not printed until you request the job at the product control panel. Selecting Private Job activates the PIN group box. The print job can be printed only after you type the correct PIN at the control panel. After the job is printed, the job is immediately deleted from the product. This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. Private jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.

The Private Job/PIN coupling has a PIN restriction of four ASCII numeric characters (0 though 9). If you type non-numeric characters, they are removed immediately. The text field does not allow you to type more than four characters. The field temporarily accepts fewer than four digits in the string, but when the edit field loses focus, the zeroes pad the left end until the PIN contains exactly four digits. The default initialized value for the PIN is 0000 for Private Job.

Quick Copy

To use the Quick Copy option, a hard disk must be installed on the product and the job-storage feature must be enabled.

When you select Quick Copy, the entire print job prints and a copy of the print job is stored on the product, after which you can print additional copies of the print job at the product control panel. The number of quick-copy print jobs that can be stored in the product is set by using the product control panel.

NOTE

The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proof-andhold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held document. Quick Copy jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.

Stored Job

To use the Stored Job option, a hard disk must be installed on the product and the job-storage feature must be enabled.

Use the Stored Job option to send a print job directly to the product hard disk without printing it. The print job is stored in the product as if it is an electronic file cabinet. After the print job is stored on the product hard disk, you can print the job at the product control panel.

The job remains stored in the product until it is deleted or is overwritten by a document that has the same user name and job name. Stored jobs remain on the product hard disk when the product is turned off. Use this feature for forms and other common or shared documents.

A stored job can be managed in two ways: as either a private or a public job.

Select the Require PIN to Print check box to set the private mode. Use a private stored job to send a print job directly to the product, which can then be printed only after you type a PIN up to 4 digits long at the product control panel. (You can set the PIN in the PIN group box.)

After the job is printed, the job remains in the product and can be printed again at the product control panel.

The box labeled PIN is usually inactive. The Require PIN to Print option becomes available when you select Stored Job. If you select the Require PIN to Print box, you must type a PIN to make the stored job private.

146 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

NOTE

A private stored job is not the same as a private job (see above). Private jobs are deleted from the product after they are printed. Private stored jobs are retained in the product after printing, but require that a PIN be typed each time they are printed.

PIN

The PIN group box is usually inactive. The option within the PIN group box, PIN to Print, is activated if you select either of the following options:

● Select Private Job. If selected, you must type the PIN number at the product control panel in order

to print the job. For more information, see Private Job

.

Select Stored Job, and then select the Require PIN to Print check box. If the Require PIN to

Print check box is selected, you must type a PIN in order to make the stored job private. For more information, see

Stored Job

.

Job Notification Options

Clicking a job-storage mode selection causes the Job Notification Options group box to become available. The Display Job ID when printing check box is selected by default. The Display Job ID

when printing option causes a pop-up dialog box to appear when the job-storage print job is printed.

The dialog box shows the user name and job name that are associated with the stored print job, as well as the product name, port, and location.

User Name

Use the User Name settings to help identify the job at the product control panel. The following are the User Name settings:

Windows User Name. This option associates your Windows user name with the stored print job.

The Windows user name automatically appears in the text field below the User Name options.

Custom. Use this option to type a custom name for the stored print job. When you click the

Custom option, the text field below the option becomes available. The User Name field can contain no more than 16 characters.

Job Name

Use the Job Name options to specify a name to identify the job at the product control panel. The following are the Job Name settings:

<Automatic> This option, which is the default selection, automatically generates the job name that is associated with the stored print job. The file name of the print job is used if it is available to the print driver. Otherwise, the software program name or a time stamp is used for the job name. The file name of the print job is used if it is available to the print driver. Otherwise, the software program name or a time stamp is used for the job name.

Custom. Use this to type a custom job name for the stored print job. When you click the

Custom, the text field below the option becomes available. In those languages for which

<Automatic> cannot be translated without the use of invalid characters, the driver uses a string of three dashes. The acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating system. The string must be of a length and type that can appear on the product control-panel display.

Job Storage tab features 147

The Job Name field can contain no more than 16 characters, and is limited to A through Z (uppercase or lowercase) and 0 through 9 so that the name can appear on the product control-panel display. If you try to type a character in an ASCII code of fewer than 32 or more than 126 characters, the character is removed from the edit field, along with all of the characters that follow it. If you try to type more than 16 characters, any character beyond 16 is truncated.

When the dialog box is closed, or as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the

Tab key is pressed or another control is selected), an empty string is replaced with <Automatic>. The acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating system. The string must be of a length and type that can appear on the product control-panel display.

If Job Name Exists. When you store a print job, you can create a print-job name or the product software can assign one automatically. If a print job with the same name already exists, the new print job will overwrite the existing print job. To eliminate the chances of a new print job overwriting an old print job because both have the same name, select Use Job Name + (1-999). After you create the print job name, or when one is created automatically, the product software assigns a number between 1 and 999 to the end of the print job name to make the name unique. Select Replace Existing File if you always want the product software to overwrite an existing print job with the same print job name.

Using job-storage features when printing

To use job-storage features when printing, follow these steps:

1.

Click File and then click Print from the software program. The Print dialog box appears.

NOTE

Clicking the print icon in the software program toolbar prints the job without using job-storage features.

2.

Click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears.

3.

Click the Job Storage tab.

4.

Select the job-storage options by clicking the appropriate option button, and then complete any required fields.

5.

Click OK.

Releasing a job-storage print job

After you send a print job that uses the job-storage feature, you can release the job to print from the product control panel.

1.

Press (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus.

2.

Press (the up button) and (the down button) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .

3.

Press and to scroll to your user name, and then press .

4.

Press and to scroll to the job name, and then press .

5.

Press and until PRINT is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .

6.

Press .

7.

If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press and to select the first digit of the PIN, and then press . The number in the product control-panel display changes to an asterisk. Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.

148 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with step 8.

8.

Press and to select the number of copies to print.

9.

Press to print the job.

Deleting a job-storage print job

Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the product hard disk. You can do this from the product control panel.

1.

Press (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus.

2.

Press (the up button) and (the down button) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .

3.

Press .

4.

Press and to scroll to your user name, and then press .

5.

Press and to scroll to the job name, and then press .

6.

Press and until DELETE is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .

7.

Press .

8.

If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press and to select the first digit of the PIN, and then press . The number in the product control-panel display changes to an asterisk. Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.

If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with the next step.

9.

Press to delete the job.

The stored print job is deleted and the product returns to the READY state.

Job Storage tab features 149

Basics tab features

To gain access to the Basics tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps:

1.

Click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

3.

Click Printers.

4.

Right-click the product name.

5.

Click Properties.

6.

Click the Basics tab.

The Basics tab provides options for setting the number of copies to be printed and for the orientation of the print job. You can also use it to retrieve information about the driver.

Figure 3-21

Basics tab

The Basics tab contains the following controls:

Print Task Quick Sets

Copies

Orientation

Document preview image

150 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

About…

Print Task Quick Sets

Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Properties driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by the administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see

Finishing tab features .

Copies

Use the Copies option to specify the number of copies to print.

The number of copies that you request appears in the Copies group box. You can select the number by typing in the box or by using the up and down arrows to the right of the text box. Valid entries are numbers from 1 to 9999. The copies value will not advance from the maximum number (9999) to 1 when the up arrow is used, or change from 1 to the maximum number (9999) when the down arrow is used.

When you click another group box or leave the Basics tab, invalid entries into the edit box (such as non-numerical input, numbers less than 1, or numbers greater than the maximum allowed) are changed to the last valid value that appeared in the box. The default number of copies is 1.

Because you can set the number of copies that you want from some software programs, conflicts between the software program that you are using and the driver can arise. In most cases, the software program and the driver communicate, so that the number of copies set in one location (such as the program) will appear in the other (such as the driver). For some programs, this communication does not take place, and the copies values are treated independently. For these programs, setting 10 copies in the program and then setting 10 copies in the driver will result in 100 copies (10 x 10) being printed. It is recommended that you set the number of copies in the program, wherever possible.

Orientation

Orientation refers to the layout of the image on the page, and does not affect the way that media feeds into the printer. You can specify the orientation of the print job. The three available orientations are portrait, landscape, and rotated. The default orientation is Portrait.

NOTE

Nearly all software programs establish the orientation for the printed page, so the page orientation in the driver is useful only for the few software programs that do not set an orientation.

The Orientation group box contains three options:

Portrait. The top edge of the document is the shorter edge of the media.

Landscape. The top edge of the document is the longer edge of the media.

Rotate by 180 degrees. This creates a landscape or portrait orientation in which the image is rotated 180°. This setting is useful for printing prepunched media.

You can toggle orientation between portrait and landscape by clicking the document preview image. If you select the Rotate by 180 degrees check box, no change occurs in the document preview image.

Basics tab features 151

Document preview image

The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Properties driver tabs:

Finishing

Effects

Paper

Basics

Color

For more information about the document preview image, see

Finishing tab features

.

About…

When you click About on the Basics tab, or you click the HP logo on any of the driver Properties tabs, the About This Driver dialog box appears. To close it, perform any of the following actions:

Click OK.

Press Esc .

Press Alt + F4 .

Press Enter .

The following figure shows the About This Driver dialog box. The information that it contains varies according to driver, date, and version.

Figure 3-22

About This Driver dialog box

152 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

The About This Driver dialog box provides the following information:

● Printer name

Driver name

Print driver version number

Copyright information

Driver Extensions (if any)

Configuration Status

The printer name, the driver name, the print driver version number, and the copyright information appear at the top of the About This Driver dialog box.

The Driver Extensions group box lists the driver extensions, if any.

The Configuration Status group box indicates whether the driver was autoconfigured, whether administrator preferences were set, the date the driver was last configured, and whether the configuration is default or user-defined.

ENWW Basics tab features 153

Color tab features

To gain access to the Color tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps:

1.

Click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

3.

Click Printers.

4.

Right-click the product name.

5.

Click Properties.

6.

Click the Color tab.

Use the Color tab to specify predefined color-option settings or to fine-tune the color treatments and halftoning. Color output can also be converted to grayscale. The Color tab is shown in the following figure.

Figure 3-23

Color tab

The Color tab contains the following controls:

Print Task Quick Sets

Color Options

Color Themes

154 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Document preview image

Print Task Quick Sets

Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Properties driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by the administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see

Finishing tab features .

Color Options

Use the Color Options group box to adjust the independent color controls. The settings affect the print job color rendering and print quality. The Color Options group box contains the following controls:

Automatic option (default)

Manual option

Settings button (Click this to open the Color Settings dialog box.)

Print in Grayscale check box

Automatic

Use the Automatic option for default color settings that automatically fine-tune the printed output. The

Automatic default color settings provide high-quality output for most color-printing needs.

Manual

To change the default color settings, select the Manual option, and then click Settings. The Color

Settings dialog box appears.

To change the settings, make your selections by using the drop-down menus in the Color Settings dialog box, and then click OK. The following figure shows the Color Settings dialog box with "Automatic" settings.

Color tab features 155

Figure 3-24

Color Settings dialog box

The Color Settings dialog box contains the following controls for each of the following components:

General

Edge Control

Text

Neutral Grays

Halftone

Graphics

Neutral Grays

Halftone

Photographs

Neutral Grays

Halftone

General

Use the General setting group to control Edge Control settings for all color printing.

156 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Edge Control determines how edges are rendered. Edge Control consists of three components:

● Adaptive Halftoning, which increases edge sharpness

Trapping, which reduces the effect of color plane misregistration by slightly overlapping the edges of adjacent objects

● Color Resolution Enhancement Technology (C-REt), which increases the apparent resolution by placing each dot for the smoothest edges

The Edge Control option offers four settings:

Normal. The Normal setting provides the default trapping settings. Adaptive Halftoning is set to

On, and C-REt is set to On.

Light. The Light setting provides minimal trapping. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On and C-REt is set to On.

Maximum. The Maximum setting provides the most trapping. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On, and C-REt is set to On.

Off. The Off setting turns Trapping, Adaptive Halftoning, and C-REt to Off.

Neutral Grays

The Neutral Grays drop-down menu controls the selection of a device-dependent color table that is embedded in the product firmware. You can adjust the Neutral Grays setting independently for text, graphics, or photographs. The following options are available:

Black Only. This option generates neutral colors (grays and black) by using only black toner. This option guarantees that neutral colors do not have a color cast. Black Only is the default setting for the Text and Graphics components.

4-Color. This option generates neutral colors by combining all four colors of toner, which produces smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors. It also produces the darkest possible black. 4-Color is the default setting for Photographs.

Halftone

The Halftone setting controls the selection of a printer-dependent halftone algorithm that is embedded in the product firmware. Halftoning is a method by which the product mixes the four primary colors (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) in varying proportions to create millions of colors. The Halftone options affect the resolution and clarity of the color on the printed page. You can select Halftone settings for text, graphics, and photographs independently. The following Halftone settings are available:

Detail. This is the default option; it is useful for text and graphics that require sharp distinctions among lines or colors, or for images that contain a pattern or a high level of detail. Select this option for sharp edges and detail.

Smooth. This option provides better results for large, solid-filled print areas. It also enhances photographs by smoothing out fine color gradations. Select this option for uniform and smooth area fills.

Print in Grayscale

Select Print in Grayscale to print a document in black and white. This option is useful for previewing preliminary copies of slides and hard-copy output quickly or for printing color documents that will be photocopied or faxed.

Color tab features 157

Color Themes

This group box contains controls for color settings:

RGB Color

CMYK Color (PS Emulation Unidriver only)

RGB Color

The RGB Color drop-down menu contains the following settings:

Default (sRGB)

None

Custom Profile

Default (sRGB)

Select Default (sRGB) for most printing needs. This setting instructs the product to interpret RGB color as sRGB, which is the accepted standard of Microsoft and the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C).

Colors are matched to optimize the RGB colors on the screen and to provide vivid images and graphics.

None

Select None to instruct the product to print RGB data in raw device mode. To render documents correctly when this option is selected, you must manage color within the software program or the operating system.

NOTE

To prevent poor image quality, use this option only if you are familiar with the procedures for managing color in the software program or the operating system.

Custom Profile

Select Custom Profile when you want to simulate the printed output from other printers or for using special effects. This setting instructs the product to use a custom input profile to more accurately predict and control color output.

The default Custom Profile is the color table used on the HP Color LaserJet 4650 printer. The product holds only one custom profile at a time, so when you download and install another color table, it erases the default color table and installs the new one.

You can download custom profiles from the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/clj3000_firmware

CMYK Color (PS Emulation Unidriver only)

The CMYK Color drop-down menu contains the following settings:

Default CMYK+

Select Default CMYK+ to enable a high-quality default CMYK print path. This option can be selected for most digital commercial print jobs and should produce optimal prints.

158 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

SWOP

SWOP (Specifications for Web Offset Publications) is a common ink standard in the United States of

America and other countries/regions.

Euroscale

Euroscale, also known as Euro Standard, is a common ink standard in Europe and other countries/ regions.

DIC

DIC (Dainippon Ink and Chemical) is a common ink standard in Japan and other countries/regions.

Custom Profile

Select Custom Profile when you want to simulate the printed output from other printers or for using special effects. This setting instructs the product to use a custom input profile to more accurately predict and control color output.

The default Custom Profile is the color table used on the HP Color LaserJet 4650 printer. The product holds only one custom profile at a time, so when you download and install another color table, it erases the default color table and installs the new one.

You can download custom profiles from the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/clj3000_firmware

Document preview image

The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Properties driver tabs:

Finishing

Effects

Paper

Basics

Color

For more information about the document preview image, see

Finishing tab features .

Color tab features 159

Configure tab features

To gain access to the Configure tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps:

1.

Click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

3.

Click Printers.

4.

Right-click the product name.

5.

Click Properties.

6.

Click the Configure tab.

Use the Configure tab to tell the driver about the product hardware configuration. If bidirectional communication is enabled in a supported environment, set up this tab by clicking Update Now. If your environment does not support bidirectional communication, the Update Now button is unavailable, so you must manually configure the options on this tab.

The Configure tab is available when the driver is opened from the Printers folder by clicking

Properties. When you open the driver from within a program, the Configure tab is not visible (with a few exceptions, such as when using Excel 5.0 or Corel® Chart 4.0). When opened from the Printers folder, the Configure tab looks like the following figure.

Figure 3-25

Configure tab

The Configure tab contains the following controls:

160 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Printer Model

Paper Handling Options

Other Options

Automatic configuration

Printer image

Printer Model

In the Printer Model group box, the driver title depends on the printer model that is being used. Selection of any model in the drop-down menu makes the appropriate changes to other configuration options on the tab.

The Printer Model setting automatically changes to User Configured whenever you change any of the device configuration settings on the tab.

The list of models and the changes they produce are described in the following table. The models are as follows:

3000: HP Color LaserJet 3000

3000n: HP Color LaserJet 3000n

3000dn: HP Color LaserJet 3000dn

3000dtn: HP Color LaserJet 3000dtn

Table 3-7

Printer-model configuration settings

Driver location

Configuration tab

Setting 3000

Duplexing Unit

Available, not selected

Allow Manual Duplexing

Selected

Mopier Enabled

Unavailable

Optional Paper Sources

(None)

More Configuration

Options dialog box

Printer Hard Disk

Job Storage Enabled

Available, not selected

Unavailable

Font Card(s)

Selected

Allow Scaling from Large

Paper

Available, not selected

Unavailable

Alternative Letterhead

Mode

Ignore Application

Collation

Total Memory

Unavailable

64 MB

3000n

Available, not selected

Selected

Unavailable

(None)

Available, not selected

Available, not selected

Selected

Available, not selected

Unavailable

Selected

128 MB

3000dn

Selected

Selected

Selected

(None)

Available, not selected

Selected

Selected

Selected

1 x HP 500-

Sheet Input

Tray

Available, not selected

Selected

Selected

Available, not selected

Available, not selected

Selected

Selected

Available, not selected

Available, not selected

Selected

256 MB

3000dtn

Selected

256 MB

Configure tab features 161

Table 3-7

Printer-model configuration settings (continued)

Driver location Setting 3000

Driver work space (DWS) 6.0 MB

Include Types in

Applications Source List

Selected

3000n

38.0 MB

Selected

3000dn

102.0 MB

Selected

3000dtn

102.0 MB

Selected

If it is installed and working, the bidirectional mechanism will detect the correct model and update the configuration accordingly, either during installation or when you select Update Now on the Configure tab. However, the printer-model name that appears in the Printer Model text box is set to

Autoconfigured.

Paper Handling Options

The Paper Handling Options group box contains the following controls:

Duplexing unit

Allow Manual Duplexing

Mopier Enabled

Optional Paper Sources

Duplexing unit

The HP Color LaserJet 3000dn and HP Color LaserJet 3000dtn printer models are equipped with automatic 2-sided printing (duplexing), which you can use to print on both sides of supported media.

Automatic 2-sided printing is not supported for the following media types:

Transparency

● Labels

Extra Heavy

● Cardstock

Tough Paper

● Envelope

NOTE

These printer models support smart duplexing. The product uses the smart duplexing feature to detect information on both sides of the print job pages and runs the pages through the duplexing unit only if there is printable information on the second side of the page.

Allow Manual Duplexing

Select Allow Manual Duplexing to print on both sides of any size and most types of media (except transparencies, envelopes, and labels). To use this feature, you must reinsert the media stack into the input tray to print the second side. The product pauses while you make this adjustment.

162 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Mopier Enabled

The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job. Multiple-original printing (mopying) increases performance and reduces network traffic by transmitting the job to the product once, and then temporarily storing it in memory.

The remainder of the copies are printed at the fastest speed. All documents that are printed in mopier mode can be created, controlled, managed, and finished from the computer, which eliminates the extra step of using a photocopier.

The HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer supports the transmit-once mopying feature when the product has an installed hard disk or a minimum total memory of 128 MB, and the Mopier Enabled setting on the

Configure tab is on.

Mopier mode and collation

Mopying and collating print jobs are independent but closely related functions. The print driver performs mopying, which is the ability to send multiple original print jobs to the product. Collating is controlled by using either the print driver or the document software program. Click to clear the Mopier Enabled selection on the Configure tab to disable the feature.

Control collation through the print driver by selecting or clearing the Ignore Application Collation check box in the More Configuration Options dialog box that appears when you click More… on the

Configure tab. You can clear the check box, which is available only when the Mopier Enabled setting on the Configure tab is selected, to allow the software program to control collation.

To receive uncollated multiple copies of a print job with the mopier enabled, you must clear the Ignore

Application Collation check box and make sure that the software program collation feature is not selected.

The following table shows the relation between Mopier Enabled settings and collation settings in the software program and the driver. The first three columns show the settings; the last column, "Expected result," shows how a three-page print job would appear.

Table 3-8

Driver Mopier mode and collation settings

Mopier Enabled

Not selected

Not selected

Selected

Selected

Selected

Selected

Application collation

Not selected

Selected

Not selected

Not selected

Selected

Selected

Ignore Application

Collation

Not available

Not available

Not selected

Selected

Not selected

Selected

Expected result

3 copies uncollated

3 copies collated

3 copies uncollated

3 copies uncollated

3 copies collated by printer

3 copies collated by printer

Optional Paper Sources

The Optional Paper Sources drop-down menu lists optional media source trays for the

HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer. The list of available source trays varies depending on the printer, its input accessories, and the printer configuration settings on the Configure tab.

Configure tab features 163

For the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer, the following settings are available in the Optional Paper

Sources drop-down menu:

(None). This is the default setting for the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer.

HP 500-Sheet Input Tray

Other Options

The Other Options group box contains a single More… command button. Click More… to open the

More Configuration Options dialog box.

Figure 3-26

More Configuration Options dialog box

The More Configuration Options dialog box contains the following controls:

Storage

Fonts

Allow Scaling from Large Paper

Alternative Letterhead Mode

Ignore Application Collation

Printer Memory

Include Types in Application Source List

Storage

The Storage group box contains the Printer Hard Disk and Job Storage Enabled check boxes. If the product is equipped with a hard-disk drive, the Printer Hard Disk check box should be selected and all job-storage options are available. If your HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer is not equipped with a hard-disk drive but has a minimum of 128 MB of memory, limited job-storage options are available. When the job-

164 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

storage feature is enabled, the product can store print jobs so that you can gain access to those print jobs later at the product control panel.

Fonts

The Fonts group box contains a Font Card(s) check box and a corresponding Configure button.

Selecting the Font Card(s) check box tells the driver that a Font card is installed, and that stored data about the fonts on the card is available. When the check box is selected, the Configure button is enabled. Click Configure to open the Configure Font Cards dialog box. If the Font Card(s) check box was not selected when you opened the More Configuration Options dialog box, selecting that check box automatically opens the Configure Font Cards dialog box.

ENWW

Figure 3-27

Configure Font Cards dialog box

Use the Configure Font Cards dialog box to perform the following tasks:

Add up to four font cards by clicking the Add button.

● Specify a unique font-card name.

Select specific font card data files that contain lists of fonts on specified cards.

● Select one or more installed cards in the Installed Font Cards list. The list to the right (Fonts) shows all of the fonts that are available on the selected card(s).

Enable or disable one or more of the selected font(s).

Complete the following steps to configure a font card:

1.

Make sure that the font card is installed correctly.

2.

Click Add. The Add Font Card dialog box appears.

3.

Click Browse. The Font Card Files dialog box appears.

4.

Find and select the appropriate Printer Cartridge Metrics (PCM) file that came with the font card.

5.

Click OK.

Configure tab features 165

6.

Specify a font-card name in the Add Font Card dialog box, if necessary.

7.

Click OK. The selected .PCM file appears in the Installed Font Cards list. Select the .PCM file to see a list of available fonts in the Fonts list.

8.

Click OK to close the Add Font Card dialog box. The fonts on the card should now be available on the system.

NOTE

When using font cards with the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and HP Traditional

PCL 5 Driver: To install screen fonts that match the font card, use the .HPB file that is specifically designed to work with that card. If no screen fonts exist for the card, use the .PCM file that is specifically designed to work with that card.

Allow Scaling from Large Paper

Select Allow Scaling from Large Paper to allow additional larger-than-supported paper sizes to appear in the Paper tab Size Is: drop-down list. By default, the Allow Scaling from Large Paper check box is

not selected.

The Allow Scaling from Large Paper selection can be helpful, for example, when printing a document with a large media size of 11 x 17 or A3. You can use the Print Document On: setting on the Effects tab to print the document on a media size that product supports.

Alternative Letterhead Mode

When selected, this option eliminates the need to flip or reload letterhead or preprinted paper in a tray, whether you are printing on one or both sides of the sheet. Load the paper as you would for printing on both sides. If the printer tray has an icon that indicates whether to load paper either face-up or facedown, load the paper in opposite orientation of that shown.

When this option is selected, you must select one of the following options in the Type is setting:

Letterhead

Preprinted

Ignore Application Collation

This setting overrides collation options that are selected in the print options of a software program. When

Ignore Application Collation is selected, the print driver collates in the most appropriate way for the print job. The performance of this feature depends on the software program that you are using.

Printer Memory

The Total Memory value shows the total amount of memory that is physically installed in the printer.

The Total memory value is a dynamic value that varies depending on the specific configuration of the printer. The default values for total printer memory are specified on the Configuration tab.

The Driver Work Space (DWS) value shows the amount of memory that is available for keeping track of fonts that are downloaded from the driver. The driver deletes downloaded fonts if it has exceeded the available memory value. The (DWS) value is a dynamic value that varies depending on the specific configuration of the printer. Use the (DWS) option to specify the amount of work-space memory that is available to the printer. An accurate (DWS) value optimizes driver performance.

The HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 drivers automatically configure the Total Memory and (DWS) values in Windows 98 and Windows Me environments that support bidirectional communication. To

166 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW manually set the Total Memory and (DWS) values, print a configuration page and find the Total Memory and DWS values in the Memory section of the page. Then, click More… on the Configuration tab, and either use the up and down arrows to select the appropriate values or type the Total Memory and DWS values in the Total Memory and (DWS) fields of the More Configuration Options dialog box.

Include Types in Application Source List

When the Include Types in Application Source List check box is selected, all media types (such as heavy media and transparencies) are available from the Source is: list on the Paper tab. When you are in a software program, you can open the Paper tab by clicking Print from the File menu and then clicking Properties.

Automatic configuration

If you have modified the configuration of the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer since installation, click

Update Now to automatically reflect the new configuration in the driver. For more information about the

print driver automatic configuration feature, see the Driver Configuration for Windows section of this

STR.

If the Update Now button is not available, select the appropriate configuration options on the

Configure tab.

If you have more than one driver installed on your product (for example, the default HP Traditional

PCL 6 Driver and the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver), the Update Now feature works automatically only on the driver on which it is activated. The other driver will not be updated, and might show the default setting for your product model.

Printer image

The bitmap image in the lower-right portion of the Configure tab represents the current physical configuration of the product according to the driver configuration data. It should have the same appearance as the image in the same location on the Paper tab.

NOTE

The product image shown on the Configure tab might differ from the

HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer, depending on the accessories that are installed.

Configure tab features 167

HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features

When you install the printing-system software in Windows 98 or Windows Me, the HP Traditional

PCL 6 Driver is installed by default. The HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver and the HP Traditional Postscript

3 Emulation Driver (PS Emulation Driver) can be installed by performing a Custom Installation.

NOTE

Windows NT 4.0 does not support the HP Color LaserJet 3000 print drivers, but you can use print drivers for legacy HP products whose feature sets closely match the

HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer feature set. For instance, you can use the HP Color LaserJet

4650 drivers, but some print-driver features might be missing and color quality might be compromised. HP does not support the use of any print driver other than the driver that is supplied for the product. When you install the print drivers in Windows NT 4.0, you must use the Add

Printer installation method to install the PS Emulation Driver.

This section describes the options that are available on each tab of the PS Emulation Driver

Properties interface. It also shows the tabs that are available on the PS Emulation Driver interface for

Windows 98 and Windows Me.

Access to print-driver settings in Windows 98 and Windows Me

In Windows 98 and Windows Me, you have access to a single set of driver tabs. To gain access to the print drivers, follow these steps:

1.

Click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

3.

Click Printers.

4.

Right-click the product name.

5.

Click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs.

The settings that you make on these driver tabs control print-job output and become the default settings for all software programs. The following print-driver tabs are available in Windows 98 and Windows Me:

General

Details

Color Management

Sharing

Paper

Graphics

Fonts

Device Options

PostScript

PS 3 emulation support for the HP Color LaserJet 3000

A set of 92 postscript soft fonts is included with the printing-system software. If you want to permanently install soft fonts in the printer, postscript fonts are available from HP in an optional font DIMM. The PS

168 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW emulation maintains full compatibility with Adobe PostScript when PostScript fonts are purchased from

Adobe.

Users of Adobe-licensed programs might also have the right to use the Adobe PostScript print drivers from Adobe with the HP LaserJet PostScript 3 emulation PPD, which is available on the

HP Color LaserJet 3000 printing-system software CD or from the HP Web site. When using the Adobe

PostScript print driver, users must comply with all Adobe licensing agreements, as stated on the Adobe

Web site at the following Web site: www.adobe.com/support/downloads/license.html

See the

Font support

section of this STR for a list of the additional fonts.

Help system

The PS Emulation Driver includes the following Help systems to provide assistance with printing and configuration options.

NOTE

Bubble Help, a feature of HP traditional PCL drivers, is not available in the PS Emulation

Driver.

What's this Help

Windows 98 and Windows Me support What's this? Help. You can gain access to What's this? Help messages in any of the following ways:

Right-click a control and then click What's this?. A pop-up Help window appears.

● Click the ? button at the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an arrow with a question mark. When you use this special cursor to select a control, the pop-up Help window for that feature appears.

Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.

Context-sensitive Help

When you press the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, a context-sensitive Help message appears.

Paper tab features

To gain access to the Paper tab, follow these steps:

1.

Click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

3.

Click Printers.

4.

Right-click the product name.

5.

Click Properties.

6.

Click the Paper tab.

The Paper tab controls media and finishing options for the HP PS Emulation Driver. The following figure shows the Paper tab.

HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 169

Figure 3-28

Paper tab

The Paper tab contains the following controls:

Paper size

Layout

Orientation

Paper source

Copies

Unprintable Area…

More Options…

About …

Restore Defaults

Paper size

The Paper size selection area lists the paper or envelope sizes that the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer supports. Use the scroll bar to scroll through the list of supported media sizes (forms), and then click the icon to specify the media that you want.

A red circle with a line through any of the paper icons means that paper size is available, but you must change a driver setting before you can print on that media size. The setting might be on the Paper tab, such as the Paper source setting, or it might be a setting on the product control panel.

170 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

Clicking Custom page 1, Custom page 2, or Custom page 3 makes the Custom button available at the bottom of the Paper tab. Clicking Custom opens the Custom-defined size dialog box that you can use to define a custom paper size.

The following figure shows the Custom-defined size dialog box.

ENWW

Figure 3-29

Custom-designed size dialog box

The following controls appear on the Custom-defined size dialog box:

Paper name text box. Use this option to type a name for this custom media size. You can define up to three custom sizes at one time.

Width spin box. Use this control to specify the width for this custom media size.

Length spin box. Use this control to specify the length for this custom media size.

Units group box. Click Inches or Millimeters to specify the measurement unit for this custom media size.

Transverse check box. Clicking this check box rotates the document 90° when printing on a rollfed device. Depending on the size of the printed page, you might save media` if you rotate the page when printing.

Restore defaults button. Click this button to restore the settings in the Custom-defined size dialog box to their original values.

Layout

Use the settings in this group box to specify how many pages of the document print on a single sheet.

For example, clicking 1 up prints one page of the document on each sheet. Clicking 2 up prints two pages on each sheet of paper, dividing the sheet in half. The Layout group box values are ignored if you print an EPS file.

The following options are available in the Layout group box:

1 up

2 up

4 up

HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 171

Orientation

The settings in this group box specify how the document is positioned on the page. The following options are available:

Portrait option button. Use this button to print your document in portrait mode. When you click this button, the page icon shows an example of the portrait orientation.

Landscape option button. Use this button to print your document in landscape mode. When you click this button, the page icon shows an example of the landscape orientation.

Rotate check box. The Rotate check box becomes available when you click the Landscape option.

Select the Rotate check box to rotate the image on the page.

To see the current dimensions of the page, such as the paper size and the unprintable margins, point to the page icon, and then press and hold down the mouse button. The Orientation group box is replaced by the Page dimensions in inches group box as seen in the following figure. Releasing the mouse button restores the Orientation group box.

Figure 3-30

Page dimensions in inches

Paper source

This setting specifies where the media that you want to use is located in the printer. The default setting is Auto Select Tray, which causes the printer to use the tray that supports the paper size that you have chosen.

The following options are available:

Auto Select Tray

Printer Auto Select

Manual Feed in Tray 1

Tray 1 through Tray 3, if installed on the product. If any of these trays are not installed, a red circle with a slash through it appears next to the tray name.

● Each of the paper types that the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer supports, such as Plain,

Preprinted, and Letterhead. For a full list of supported paper types see

Driver-supported media types .

Copies

Use this box to specify the number of copies to print. You can print from 1 to 999 copies. This option is ignored when printing an .EPS file. Some software programs override this setting.

Unprintable Area…

Click Unprintable Area … to open the Unprintable Area dialog box, which is shown in the following figure.

172 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

Figure 3-31

Unprintable Area dialog box

The area of the page that cannot be printed appears in the Unprintable Area dialog box. Changing these settings to exceed the built-in page margins can cause the text in your document to be cut off when printed.

More Options…

Click More Options … to open the More Paper Options dialog box, shown in the following figure.

ENWW

Figure 3-32

More Paper Options dialog box

The single control on this dialog box is the Printing on both sides (duplex printing) group box.

Use the settings in this group box to specify how you want to turn the page if you print on both sides.

When you print on two sides of the page, the document can be read differently depending on the way it is printed. For example, you could have the pages of the document turn like a book or like a calendar.

When you click Flip On Long Edge or Flip On Short Edge, the page icon changes to illustrate how the printed document will look.

About …

Click About… to open a dialog box that contains copyright and version information about the print driver.

The following figure shows the About dialog box.

HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 173

Figure 3-33

About dialog box

Restore Defaults

Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the Paper tab to their original values.

Graphics tab features

To gain access to the Graphics tab, follow these steps:

1.

Click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

3.

Click Printers.

4.

Right-click the product name.

5.

Click Properties.

6.

Click the Graphics tab.

The Graphics tab specifies the resolution, color controls, and halftoning settings for the product. The following figure shows the Graphics tab.

174 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Figure 3-34

Graphics tab

The Graphics tab contains the following controls:

Resolution

Color Control

Halftoning

Special

Scaling

Restore Defaults

Resolution

Use the Resolution drop-down menu to specify the resolution for printing. Resolution is measured in dots per inch (dpi). The dpi setting for the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer is 600 dpi.

Color Control

The Color Control option specifies whether you want the colors in your document to be adjusted before printing so that the printed page more closely matches the colors that you see on your screen. No Image

Color Management (faster) is selected by default, and results in a faster print job.

If you click Use Image Color Management on the host (slower), the Choose Rendering Intent button becomes available. Click this button to open the Image Color Management dialog box to specify exactly how you want the colors adjusted.

The following figure shows the Image Color Management dialog box.

HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 175

Figure 3-35

Image Color Management dialog box

Use the Image Color Management dialog box to specify how color images are created to produce the best-looking image on the printed page.

The following controls are available:

Saturation. Use this option when printing a chart or using fully saturated, bright colors.

Contrast. Use this option for photographs or pictures in which the colors blend together.

Colorimetric. Use this option for documents that contain a color for which you need an exact match, and you are sending the document to a product that has that specific color of ink.

Halftoning

The Halftoning options specify values for the number of lines per inch (frequency) and angle of the pattern that you want to use for halftone screens.

If print jobs have a moiré pattern when you print graphics such as photographs or detailed images, you might want to adjust these settings. However, the default printer settings should work in most cases. Do not change these settings unless you have experience using halftones. To return to the default settings after you have made changes, click Use printer's settings.

Special

The Special group box contains the following options:

Print as a negative image. Selecting this option prints a negative of the image by complementing the RGB values or reversing the black and white values. Click this option to see the page icon change to reflect this setting.

Print as a mirror image. Selecting this option prints a mirror image of your document by reversing the horizontal coordinates. Click this option to see the page icon change to reflect this setting.

Scaling

Use the Scaling control to specify the size of the image to print. You can specify from 25% to 400% of the original size. A setting of 400%, for example, prints an image four times larger than the original.

When you enlarge a document, only the portion of the document that fits on the page prints. The default setting is 100%.

Restore Defaults

Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the Graphics tab to their original values.

176 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

Fonts tab features

The Fonts tab controls the fonts for the HP PS Emulation Driver. The following figure shows the

Fonts tab.

ENWW

Figure 3-36

Fonts tab

The following options are available:

Send TrueType fonts to printer according to the Font Substitution Table

Always use built-in printer fonts instead of TrueType fonts

Always use TrueType fonts

Send TrueType fonts to printer according to the Font Substitution Table

Use this option to substitute a postscript printer font for the common TrueType fonts in a document. This can speed up printing because the TrueType fonts do not have to be downloaded. By default, common

TrueType fonts are substituted when printing, but uncommon ones are downloaded to the product. If you substitute a printer font for a TrueType font, the printed document might not match the look of the document on the screen.

Click Edit the Table… to customize which TrueType fonts are downloaded and which printer fonts should be substituted for TrueType fonts.

Font Substitution Table

Click this option to open the Font Substitution Table dialog box, which makes available the options for changing the TrueType-to-postscript font mapping. The following figure shows the Font Substitution

Table dialog box.

HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 177

Figure 3-37

Font Substitution Table

Always use built-in printer fonts instead of TrueType fonts

Click this option to use font-matching rules to find the best printer font to substitute for TrueType fonts in your document. TrueType fonts are not downloaded when the document is printed. This can speed up printing, but the printed fonts might not exactly match the fonts on the screen.

Always use TrueType fonts

Click this option to download TrueType fonts to the product when your document is printed. This ensures that the printed document looks the same as it does on the screen, but printing might take longer. Click

Send Fonts As… to specify the format in which the TrueType fonts are sent to the product.

Send Fonts As…

Use this option to specify how TrueType fonts are downloaded.

Figure 3-38

Send Fonts As… dialog box

178 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

The following options are available:

Sent TrueType fonts as:. This control offers the following settings:

Outlines. Use this setting for scalable outlines.

Bitmaps. Use this setting for bitmaps.

Type 42. Type 42 fonts are TrueType fonts with headers that enable them to be rendered by the PS Emulation Driver.

Don't Send. Use this setting if you do not want any TrueType fonts to be downloaded.

Threshold to switch between downloading bitmap or outline fonts, measured in pixels (in

pixel size at the current resolution). Use this control to specify the size of the font (in pixels) at which the PS Emulation Driver driver should switch from downloading TrueType fonts as bitmap

(Type 3) fonts to downloading them as outline (Type 1) fonts.

The most efficient threshold value varies depending on the printing resolution. For example, at 300 dpi, downloading TrueType fonts as outlines becomes efficient when fonts are about 25 points or larger. If this value is 0, outline (Type 1) fonts are always sent.

Favor system TrueType fonts over printer fonts that have the same name. Use this option to specify whether to use system TrueType fonts instead of printer fonts when the same font is found on both the computer and the printer. Printer fonts are the default.

Using printer fonts can speed up printing because the TrueType fonts do not have to be downloaded. However, the fonts in the printed document might not exactly match the fonts on the screen.

Send PostScript fonts as:. Use this option to specify whether to download PostScript fonts to the printer. The following options are available:

In Native Format. Click this option to download the PostScript font files to the product before the document prints.

Don't Send. If you click this option, no fonts are downloaded. This does not affect downloading of TrueType fonts.

Restore Defaults

Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the Fonts tab to their original values.

Device Options tab features

To gain access to the Device Options tab, follow these steps:

1.

Click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

3.

Click Printers.

4.

Right-click the product name.

5.

Click Properties.

6.

Click the Device Options tab.

HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 179

The Device Options tab communicates information about the hardware configuration to the print driver.

When the driver is opened from within a software program, the Device Options tab includes only the

Printer features controls. When opened from the Printers folder, the Device Options tab appears as shown in the following figure.

Figure 3-39

Device Options tab

NOTE

Changes that you make to the Device Options tab are not reflected in the Properties settings until the modified device settings have been applied and the Properties tabs have been re-opened. For example, the duplexing unit will not appear until you modify the Device

Options tab, click Apply, close the Properties tabs, and then re-open the Properties tabs.

The Device Options tab contains the following options:

Available printer memory

Printer features

Using job-storage features when printing

Installable options

Restore Defaults

NOTE

Use the dynamic Change settings for: control in the Printer features and the

Installable options sections of the Device Options tab to change the setting for the feature or option that you have selected.

180 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Available printer memory

The Available printer memory control specifies the amount of memory in the product. If the value in this control does not match the amount of memory in the printer model, use the spin box to specify the correct amount of memory.

Printer features

The Printer features group box shows settings that are specific to the printer. You can change the settings by selecting the setting you want to change and then specifying a new value in the Change

setting for list.

The following are the printer-feature settings available on this tab:

HPPJLEncoding

Economode

Job storage

User Name

PIN digit 1 (for Private Job)

PIN digit 2 (for Private Job)

PIN digit 3 (for Private Job)

PIN digit 4 (for Private Job)

Print Color as Gray

Collate

Fit to Page

Color Options

Color Themes for RGB Color

Color Themes for CMYK Color

Edge Control

Text Neutral Grays

Text Halftone

Graphic Neutral Grays

Graphic Halftone

Photographs Neutral Grays

Photographs Halftone

Watermark (Pages per Sheet)

Print Watermark

Watermark

HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 181

Watermark Font

Watermark Size

Watermark Angle

Watermark Style

Watermark Color

Watermark Intensity

HPPJLEncoding

The HPPJLEncoding feature contains the control for the UTF8 feature.

Economode

The Economode feature contains the following options:

False (default)

True

The EconoMode feature allows the product to use less toner per page. It has been available to legacy

HP monochrome printers; with the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer, it is now possible for color printing as well.

Selecting this option extends the life of the toner supply and reduces cost per page. However, it also reduces print quality. The printed image is lighter, but it is adequate for printing drafts or proofs.

HP does not recommend the full-time use of EconoMode. If EconoMode is used full-time when the average toner coverage is significantly less than 5%, it is possible that the toner supply will outlast the mechanical parts in the print cartridge. If print quality begins to degrade under these circumstances, you must install a new print cartridge, even if toner remains in the cartridge.

NOTE

The EconoMode setting might work only if a genuine HP print cartridge is installed.

HP print cartridges can measure the life of the mechanical parts as well as the quantity of ink. If the EconoMode setting is used frequently, the mechanical parts can wear out before the supply of ink is depleted, increasing the risk of ink spillage. Use genuine HP parts to avoid this problem.

Job storage

The default value for this setting is Off, which means that the print job will not be stored in the product.

NOTE

The job-storage feature requires at least 128 MB of total memory or the installation of a printer hard disk. The printer hard disk is available as an optional accessory for all models.

If the job-storage feature is enabled (without installing a hard disk but with at least 128 MB of total memory), two Job Storage Mode settings are available on the Job Storage tab:

Proof and Hold

Private Job

182 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Two additional Job Storage Mode settings become available on the Job Storage tab if a hard disk is installed:

Quick Copy

Stored Job

Quick Copy. When you select Quick Copy, the entire print job prints and a copy of the print job is stored on the product, after which you can print additional copies of the print job at the product control panel. The number of quick-copy print jobs that can be stored in the product is set by using the product control panel.

NOTE

The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proofand-hold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held document. Also, a document that has the same user name and job name as one that is already stored on the hard disk will overwrite the existing document. Quick

Copy jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.

Proof and Hold.

When selected, this option stores the print job in memory and prints only the first copy of the job, allowing you to check the first copy. If the document prints correctly, you can print the remaining copies of the print job at the control panel. You can set the number of proof-and-hold print jobs that can be stored in the product at the product control panel.

After it is released for printing, the proof-and-hold job is immediately deleted from the product. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second proof-and-hold job to the product with the same user name and job name as an existing proof-andhold job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job. Proof-and-hold jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.

NOTE

The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proofand-hold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held document. Also, a document that has the same user name and job name as one that is already stored on the hard disk will overwrite the existing document.

Private Job. When you select Private Job, the print job is sent to the product, but is not printed until you request the job at the product control panel. The print job can be printed only after you type the correct PIN at the control panel.

After selecting Private Job from the Device Options tab, scroll to the PIN digit 1 (for Private

Job) control, click to select it, and then select a number from the Change setting for: PIN digit 1

(for Private Job) list. Repeat this process to select a number for each of the remaining three PIN digits. If you do not select a PIN, the default PIN of 0000 is used.

After it is released for printing, the private job is immediately deleted from the product. This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second private job that has the same user name and job name as an existing private job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job, regardless of the PIN. Private jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.

Stored Job. To use the Stored Job option, a hard disk must be installed on the product and the job-storage feature must be enabled.

HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 183

Use the Stored Job option to send a print job directly to the printer hard disk without printing it.

The print job is stored in the product as if it is an electronic file cabinet. After the print job is stored on the printer hard disk, you can print the job at the product control panel.

The job remains stored in the product until it is deleted or overwritten by a document that has the same user name and job name. Stored jobs remain on the printer hard disk when the product is turned off. Use this feature for forms and other common or shared documents.

You can disable the job-storage feature while leaving the printer hard disk enabled. To disable the job-storage feature, click Start, select Settings, and then click Printers. Right-click the product name, click Properties, click the Device Options tab, select Job Storage: from the Printer

features list, and then select Disabled in the Change setting for: Job Storage list.

To gain access to the Job Storage tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, click Start on the Windows task bar, click Settings, and then click Printers. Right-click the product name, and then click

Properties.

User Name

User Name. The default value for this setting is System Name (if available). Additional values for this setting include numbers 1 through 20.

PIN digit 1 (for Private Job)

The default value for the PIN digit 1 (for Private Job) setting is 0. For more information about using this setting, see

Private Job .

PIN digit 2 (for Private Job)

The default value for the PIN digit 2 (for Private Job) setting is 0. For more information about using this setting, see

Private Job .

PIN digit 3 (for Private Job)

The default value for the PIN digit 3 (for Private Job) setting is 0. For more information about using this setting, see

Private Job .

PIN digit 4 (for Private Job)

The default value for the PIN digit 4 (for Private Job) setting is 0. For more information about using this setting, see

Private Job .

Print Color as Gray

The Print Color as Gray feature contains the following options:

Off (default)

On

Collate

The Collate feature contains the following options:

On (turn off in application)

Off

184 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Fit to Page

The Fit to Page feature contains the following options:

Prompt User for correct size (default)

Nearest Size and Scale

Nearest Size and Crop

Letter

A4

Color Options

The Color Options feature contains the following options:

Automatic (default)

Manual

Color Themes for RGB Color

The Color Themes for RGB Color feature contains the following options:

Default (sRGB). Select Default (sRGB) for most printing needs. This setting instructs the printer to interpret RGB color as sRGB, which is the accepted standard of Microsoft and the World Wide

Web Consortium (WC3). Colors are matched to optimize the RGB colors on the screen and to provide vivid images and graphics.

None. Select None to instruct the printer to print RGB data in raw device mode. To render documents correctly when this option is selected, you must manage color within the software program in the operating system.

NOTE

To prevent poor image quality, use this option only if you are familiar with the procedures for managing color in the software program or the operating system.

Custom Profile. Select Custom Profile when you want to simulate the printed output from other printers or for using special effects. This setting instructs the printer to use a custom input profile to more accurately predict and control color output.

The default Custom Profile is the color table used on the HP Color LaserJet 4650 printer. The product holds only one custom profile at a time, so when you download and install another color table, it erases the default color table and installs the new one.

You can download custom profiles from the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/clj3000_firmware

Color Themes for CMYK Color

The Color Themes for CMYK Color feature contains the following options:

Default CMYK+. Select Default CMYK+ to enable a high-quality default CMYK print path. This option can be selected for most digital commercial print jobs and should produce optimal prints.

SWOP (Specifications for Web Offset Publications) is a common ink standard in the United States of America and other countries/regions.

HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 185

Euroscale, also known as Euro Standard, is a common ink standard in Europe and other countries/ regions.

DIC. DIC (Dainippon Ink and Chemical) is a common ink standard in Japan and other countries/ regions.

Custom Profile. Select this option to use a custom input profile to accurately control color output

(for example, to emulate a specific HP Color LaserJet printer). Download color profiles from the following Web site: www.hp.com/go

Edge Control

The Edge Control feature contains the following options:

Maximum

Normal (default)

Light

Off

Text Neutral Grays

The Text Neutral Grays feature contains the following options:

Black Only. This option generates neutral colors (grays and black) by using only black toner. This option guarantees that neutral colors do not have a color cast. Black Only is the default setting for the Text and Graphics components. Black Only is the default setting for Text.

4-Color. This option generates neutral colors by combining all four colors of toner, which produces smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors. It also produces the darkest possible black.

Text Halftone

The Text Halftone feature contains the following options:

Smooth

Detail

Graphic Neutral Grays

The Graphic Neutral Grays feature contains the following options:

Black Only. This option generates neutral colors (grays and black) by using only black toner. This option guarantees that neutral colors do not have a color cast. Black Only is the default setting for the Text and Graphics components. Black Only is the default setting for Text.

4-Color. This option generates neutral colors by combining all four colors of toner, which produces smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors. It also produces the darkest possible black.

186 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Graphic Halftone

The Graphic Halftone feature contains the following options:

Smooth

Detail

Photographs Neutral Grays

The Photographs Neutral Grays feature contains the following options:

Black Only. This option generates neutral colors (grays and black) by using only black toner. This option guarantees that neutral colors do not have a color cast. Black Only is the default setting for the Text and Graphics components.

4-Color. This option generates neutral colors by combining all four colors of toner, which produces smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors. It also produces the darkest possible black. 4-Color is the default setting for Text.

Photographs Halftone

The Photographs Halftone feature contains the following options:

Smooth

Detail

Watermark (Pages per Sheet)

The Watermark (Pages per Sheet) feature contains the following options:

1 (default)

> = 2

Print Watermark

The Print Watermark feature contains the following options:

No (default)

All Pages

First Page Only

Watermark

The Watermark feature contains the following options:

None (default)

Draft

Company Confidential

Company Proprietary

Company Private

HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 187

Confidential

Copy

Copyright

File Copy

Final

For Internal Use Only

Preliminary

Proof

Review Copy

Sample

Top Secret

Urgent

Custom

Watermark Font

The Watermark Font feature contains the following options:

Courier Bold

Helvetica Bold (default)

Times Bold

Watermark Size

Watermark Size. Settings for the watermark size range from 24 points to 90 points. The default is 48 points.

Watermark Angle

Watermark Angle. Settings for the watermark angle range from 90° to -90° in 15° intervals. The default is a 45° angle.

Watermark Style

The Watermark Style feature contains the following options:

Narrow Outline

Medium Outline (default)

Wide Outline

Wide Halo Outline

Filled

188 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Watermark Color

The Watermark Color feature contains the following options:

Gray

Red

Orange

Yellow

Green

Blue

Violet

Watermark Intensity

The Watermark Intensity feature contains the following options:

Darkest

Darker

Dark

Medium Dark

Medium

Medium Light

Light

Lighter

Lightest

Using job-storage features when printing

To use job-storage features when printing, follow these steps:

1.

Click File and then click Print from the software program. The Print dialog box appears.

NOTE

Clicking the print icon in the software program toolbar prints the job without using job-storage features.

2.

Click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears.

3.

Click the Job Storage tab.

4.

Select the job-storage options by clicking the appropriate option button, and then complete any required fields.

5.

Click OK.

HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 189

Releasing a job-storage print job

After you send a print job that uses the job-storage feature, you can release the job to print from the product control panel.

1.

Press (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus.

2.

Press (the up button) and (the down button) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .

3.

Press and to scroll to your user name, and then press .

4.

Press and to scroll to the job name, and then press .

5.

Press and until PRINT is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .

6.

Press .

7.

If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press and to select the first digit of the PIN, and then press . The number in the product control-panel display changes to an asterisk. Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.

If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with the next step.

8.

Press and to select the number of copies to print.

9.

Press to print the job.

Deleting a job-storage print job

Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the product hard disk. You can do this from the product control panel.

1.

Press (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus.

2.

Press (the up button) and (the down button) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .

3.

Press and to scroll to your user name, and then press .

4.

Press and to scroll to the job name, and then press .

5.

Press and until DELETE is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .

6.

Press .

7.

If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press and to select the first digit of the PIN, and then press . The number in the product control-panel display changes to an asterisk. Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.

If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with the next step.

8.

Press to delete the job.

Installable options

This section provides information to configure the printing options that you can install for the

HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer. The following controls are available:

Tray 3

190 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Duplex Unit (for 2-sided Printing)

Mopier Mode

Printer Hard Disk

Job storage

VMOption. This option shows the amount of virtual memory (RAM) in the product.

Tray 3

This control specifies whether you have an additional 500-sheet feeder tray (Tray 3) installed on the printer. The default setting is Uninstalled.

Duplex Unit (for 2-sided Printing)

The HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer is equipped with automatic 2-sided printing (duplexing), which allows you to print on both sides of supported media. Automatic 2-sided printing is not supported for the following media types:

Transparency

Labels

● Extra Heavy

Cardstock

Tough Paper

Envelope

NOTE

The HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer supports smart duplexing. The printer detects information on both sides of the print job pages and runs the pages through the duplexing unit only if printable information appears on the second side of the page.

Mopier Mode

The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job. Multiple-original printing (mopying) increases performance and reduces network traffic by transmitting the job to the product once, and then storing it in memory. The remainder of the copies are printed at the fastest speed. All documents that are printed in mopier mode can be created, controlled, managed, and finished from the computer, which eliminates the extra step of using a photocopier.

The HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer supports the transmit-once mopying feature when the Mopier

Mode: setting on the Device Options tab is Enabled.

Printer Hard Disk

When this option is enabled, the Job Storage option and the Mopier Mode option are enabled in the print driver. Use the Job Storage option to store print jobs and then print them later from the control panel. The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job.

HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 191

Job storage

When the job-storage feature is enabled, the product can store print jobs so that you can gain access to those print jobs later at the control panel.

VMOption. This option shows the amount of virtual memory (RAM) in the product.

The following options are available:

64 MB (default)

96 MB

128 MB

160 MB

192 MB

256 MB

288 MB

320 MB

384 MB

512 MB

Restore Defaults

Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the Device Options tab to their original values.

PostScript tab features

To gain access to the PostScript tab, follow these steps:

1.

Click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

3.

Click Printers.

4.

Right-click the product name.

5.

Click Properties.

6.

Click the PostScript tab.

The PostScript tab controls the PostScript functions for the PS Emulation Driver. The following figure shows the PostScript tab.

192 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Figure 3-40

PostScript tab

The PostScript tab contains the following controls and options:

PostScript output format

PostScript header

Print PostScript error information

PostScript timeout values

Advanced…

Restore Defaults

PostScript output format

Use the PostScript output format list to specify the format for PostScript files. The following options are available:

PostScript (optimize for speed). Use this setting for printing most documents.

Optimize for Portability. Use this setting to create a file that conforms to the Adobe Document

Structuring Conventions (ADSC). Each page of the document will be a self-contained object. This is useful, for instance, if you want to create a PostScript file and print it on a different printer.

Encapsulated PostScript (EPS). Use this setting to include the file as an image in another document that is to be printed from a different program.

Archive Format. Use this setting to create a PostScript file that you can use later.

PJL archive format. This setting notifies the printer that the document is being printed in a different printer language.

HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 193

PostScript header

Use the PostScript header options to specify whether to send header information to the product each time you print a document. The following options are available:

Download header with each print job. This is the default setting and is sufficient or most types of printing. Use this setting if you print to a shared network product or to a file on a disk.

Assume header is downloaded and retained. If you print to a local printer, you can save printing time by sending the header information to the product only once.

Send Header Now. Click this button to send header information to the product. This option is unavailable when you specify EPS, Archive, or PJL Archive formats.

Print PostScript error information

Use the Send PostScript error information option to print postscript error messages after the document has been printed. The PS Emulation Driver can detect certain errors that Microsoft Windows cannot. If you are having printing problems, click this option. This information can help you, a system administrator, or a product-support representative determine what caused the problem. The error message information is not included in EPS format.

PostScript timeout values

Use the following options to specify the postscript timeout values for the printer.

Job timeout. This control specifies how long the document can take to get from the computer to the product before the product stops trying to print the document. If you specify 0 seconds, the product continues trying to print indefinitely. The default setting is 0 seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds.

Wait timeout. This control specifies how long the product waits to get more postscript information from the computer. After the specified time passes, the product stops trying to print the document and prints an error message. If you are trying to print a very complicated document, you might want to increase this value. If you specify 0 seconds, the product waits indefinitely. The default setting is 300 seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds.

Advanced…

Click Advanced … to open the Advanced PostScript Options dialog box, which appears in the following figure.

194 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Figure 3-41

Advanced PostScript Options dialog box

The following options are available on the Advanced PostScript Options dialog box:

PostScript Language Level

Bitmap compression

Data format

Send CTRL+D before job

Send CTRL+D after job

PostScript Language Level

The PostScript Language Level specifies which PostScript language level to use, from 1 to the highest level that the product supports. Some products support multiple levels. It is usually best to select the highest level that is available, because a higher language-level provides more features. In some instances, however, you would still use level 1. For example, if you are printing a file to disk and that file will be printed by someone who has a level-1 product, you would need to select level 1.

You can choose between PostScript Level 1 and PostScript Level 2 features for the

HP Color LaserJet 3000.

Bitmap compression

Use this control to specify whether to compress graphics before sending your document to the product.

If you are using PostScript level 2, or if you are using PostScript level 1 and a product connected to a serial port, click Compress bitmap images. If you are using PostScript level 1 and a product connected to a parallel port or if you are using a network product, click No bitmap compression.

HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 195

Data format

This control specifies the protocol that the product uses for print jobs. The following options are available:

ASCII data. This is the default setting. When you click ASCII data, data is sent in ASCII format (7bit), which might take longer to print but can be sent through any I/O channel, such as a serial, parallel, or network port.

Binary communications protocol. When you click Binary communications protocol, the product sends all data except special control characters in binary (8-bit) format. This format can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and is faster than sending data in ASCII format.

If you select this option, click Send Mode to switch the product to Binary Communications Protocol

(BCP) for future print jobs.

NOTE

This option is available only if the computer is connected to the product through a direct connection (a USB or parallel cable).

Tagged binary communications protocol. When you click Tagged Binary Communications

Protocol, all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format.

Pure binary data. When you click Pure binary data, all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format.

Send CTRL+D before job

This control specifies whether the product is reset at the beginning of every postscript document. The default setting is off (unselected). Pressing Ctrl-D resets the product to its default setting to ensure that previous print jobs do not affect the current print job. Using Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the product is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a product that is connected through parallel or serial ports, select the Send CTRL+D before job check box.

Send CTRL+D after job

This control specifies whether the product will be reset at the end of every postscript document. The default setting is off (unselected). Ctrl-D resets the product to its default setting to ensure that future print jobs are not affected by the current print job. Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the product is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a network product, click to select the Send CTRL+D before job check box.

Restore Defaults

Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the PostScript tab to their original values.

196 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows

Introduction

This chapter describes the features of the HP Color LaserJet 3000 unidrivers. The unidrivers are the

HP PCL 6 Unidriver, the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and the HP Postscript 3 Emulation Unidriver

(PS Emulation Unidriver) for Windows 2000, Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit), and

Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit).

NOTE

For a comparison of features between the HP unidrivers and HP traditional print drivers in various operating systems, see

Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems

.

You can control print jobs from several places:

● the product control panel

● the software program print dialog box

● the driver user interface

Generally, for features that are duplicated in more than one location (for instance, you can select the media input tray from any of them), settings that are established in the software program take precedence over print-driver settings. Print-driver settings, in turn, override product control-panel settings.

When you install the print-system software in Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003, the HP PCL 6 Unidriver is installed by default. The HP PCL 5 Unidriver and the PS Emulation Unidriver can be installed by performing a Custom Installation.

The following sections describe the options that are available on each tab of the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and the PS Emulation Unidriver

This chapter also describes differences between the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and the PS Emulation Unidriver. Unless otherwise noted, features described here apply to all three.

This chapter contains the following sections:

Access to print drivers

Help system

Advanced tab features

Paper/Quality tab features

ENWW Introduction 197

Effects tab features

Finishing tab features

Job Storage tab features

Color tab features

Services tab features

Device Settings tab features

About tab features

198 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

Access to print drivers

Depending on the operating system on which you are installing the print drivers, you can gain access to the print drivers and different print-driver interfaces in several ways.

To gain access to the print-driver settings from within most software programs, follow these steps:

1.

Click File.

2.

Click Print.

3.

Click Properties.

The appearance and names of the driver tabs can vary, depending on the operating system. These driver settings apply only while that software program is open.

You can control the drivers directly from the Printers folder. Here you have access to two sets of driver tabs: the Printing Preferences tabs and the Properties tabs. The settings that you make on the

Printing Preferences driver tabs control the driver default settings for each user's profile. Installable options can be configured in Properties driver tabs.

Printing Preferences driver tabs

The Printing Preferences driver tabs change the default settings that are used across all software programs. To gain access to these tabs, follow these steps:

1.

Click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

3.

Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows

Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).

4.

Right-click the product name.

5.

Click Printing Preferences.

The following Printing Preferences print-driver tabs are available:

Advanced

Paper/Quality

Effects

Finishing

Job Storage

Color

Services

The Job Storage tab is available only when the Job Storage setting is Enabled on the tab. The settings take effect only after you click OK on the Device Settings tab.

ENWW Access to print drivers 199

Properties driver tabs

This set of tabs controls the driver behavior and driver connections. To gain access to the Properties tabs, follow these steps:

1.

Click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

3.

Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows

Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).

4.

Right-click the product name.

5.

Click Properties.

The following Properties print-driver tabs are available:

General

Sharing

Ports

Advanced

Color Management

Security

Device Settings

About

200 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

Help system

The HP PCL 6 Unidriver, the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and the PS Emulation Unidriver include a full-featured

Help system to provide assistance with printing and configuration options.

NOTE

Bubble Help, a feature of HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 drivers, is not available in the

HP PCL 6 Unidriver, HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and PS Emulation Unidriver.

What's this? Help

Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 support What's this? Help. You can gain access to What's this? Help messages in any of the following ways:

● Right-click a control and then click What's this?. A pop-up Help window appears.

Click the ? button in the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an arrow with a question mark. When you use this special cursor to select a control, the pop-up Help window for that feature appears.

● Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.

Context-sensitive Help

When you click the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, a context-sensitive Help message appears.

Incompatible Print Settings messages

Incompatible Print Settings (constraint) messages are unsolicited messages that appear in response to specific print-driver selections. These messages alert you to selections that are illogical or impossible given the product capabilities or the current settings of other controls.

NOTE

Constraint messages are limited, and the underlying software architecture might accept some settings that are illogical or impossible for the product to perform. Sending a job with incompatible settings can lead to unexpected results. If print jobs do not print as expected, check the product documentation for the product capabilities.

In Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating environments, some technically invalid print-driver configurations result in warning messages. Duplexing, for example, is not possible when the Transparency media type is selected. The following figure shows an Incompatible Print

Settings message.

ENWW Help system 201

Figure 4-1

An Incompatible Print Settings message

To accept the change that was just made, click the Resolve all conflicts for me automatically option and then click OK. The driver resets the conflicting control to a setting that is compatible with the new value.

If you want to keep the conflicting setting, click I will resolve the conflict myself and then click OK.

NOTE

In this example, the conflict can be resolved manually. If the conflict is not resolved when the driver is closed, then the same dialog appears again when a print job is sent to the product.

202 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

Advanced tab features

To gain access to the Advanced tab, follow these steps:

1.

click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

3.

Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows

Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).

4.

Right-click the product name.

5.

Click Printing Preferences.

6.

Click the Advanced tab.

Use the Advanced tab to change the layout of printed pages. Use this tab to configure special controls that are not commonly used, as well as to control features such as media size and copies in the driver

(although most current software programs support these features in the print dialog box or through the page settings in the software program). The following figure shows the Advanced tab.

ENWW

Figure 4-2

The default appearance of the Advanced tab

The Advanced tab contains the following controls:

Paper/Output

Advanced tab features 203

Graphic

Document Options

Paper/Output

The Paper/Output settings contain the following controls:

Copy Count setting

Collated check box (appears when you select Copy Count)

Copy Count

Copy Count specifies the number of copies to print. This driver setting is useful for software programs that do not provide a copy count. If a copy count is available in the software program, set the copy count in the software program.

The number of copies that you request appears in the Copy Count option. You can select the number by typing in the box or by using the up and down arrows to the right of the text box. Valid entries are numbers from 1 to 9999. The copies value will not advance from the maximum number (9999) to 1 when the up arrow is used, or change from 1 to the maximum number (9999) when the down arrow is used.

When you click another group box or leave the Advanced tab, invalid entries into the edit box (such as non-numerical input, numbers less than 1, or numbers greater than the maximum allowed) are changed to the last valid value that appeared in the box. The default number of copies is 1.

Because you can set the number of copies that you want from some software programs, conflicts between the software program you are using and the driver can arise. In most cases, the software program and the driver communicate, so that the number of copies set in one location (such as the program) will appear in the other (such as the driver). For some programs, this communication does not take place, and the copies values are treated independently. For these programs, setting 10 copies in the program and then setting 10 copies in the driver will result in 100 copies (10 x 10) being printed. It is recommended that you set the number of copies in the program, wherever possible.

Collated

The Collated check box is visible when the Copy Count setting is selected. The check box becomes available and can be changed when the Copy Count setting is greater than 1.

When collated, pages print consecutively for each copy of the document. When not collated, copies of each page print together.

This setting is not synchronized with the collate setting in the software program Print dialog box. Settings in the software program override settings in the print driver. For instance, when using Microsoft Word, the Collate check box in the Print dialog box is selected by default. However, in the print driver, the

Collated check box in the Advanced tab is not selected by default. The software program setting takes precedence over the driver setting, and the printed output is collated by default. To obtain uncollated printed output, clear the Collate setting in both the driver and the software program. Similarly, if the

Collated check box is selected in the driver, but the Collate setting is not enabled in the software program, the printed output is uncollated.

204 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Graphic

The Graphic setting contains the following controls:

Image Color Management settings

True Type Font settings

Image Color Management

This control lists the available Image Color Management (ICM) options used for printing color graphics.

ICM, a set of calculations for color matching, makes it possible for programs to adjust colors before printing so that the color of images on the screen more closely match the color of those images when they are printed. The following options are available:

ICM Method. The ICM Method setting specifies how to print color graphics.

To enable Image Color Management, click the option and then select ICM Enabled.

If you want the host computer to perform calculations for color matching before it sends the document to the product, click ICM Handled by Host System.

If you want the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer to perform calculations for color matching, click

ICM Handled by Printer. In this case, a set of rules for mapping the colors is created and downloaded to the product. The product uses these rules to adjust colors in the document.

ICM Intent. The ICM Intent setting specifies how color images are created to produce the image that looks best on the printed page.

If you are printing a chart or using fully saturated, bright colors, click Graphics.

For photographs or pictures where the colors blend together, click Pictures to maximize the contrast.

If your document uses a color that you need to match exactly, and you are sending the document to a product that has that specific color of ink, click Proof.

If you want to preview the color settings from another product, click Match.

True Type Font

Use Substitute with Device Font (the default setting) to print documents that contain TrueType fonts by using equivalent printer fonts. This permits faster printing; however, you might lose special characters that the equivalent printer font does not support. Select Download as Softfont to download TrueType fonts for printing instead of using printer fonts.

Document Options

The Document Options setting contains the following controls:

Advanced Printing Features

Print Optimizations

Advanced Printing Features

When the Advanced Printing Features setting is Enabled, metafile spooling is turned on and

Finishing tab options such as Page Order, Booklet Layout, and Pages per Sheet are available,

Advanced tab features 205

depending on your product. For normal printing, leave the Advanced Printing Features setting at the default (Enabled). If compatibility problems occur, you can disable the feature. However, some advanced printing features might still be available in the print driver, even though they have been disabled. If you select an advanced printing feature in the print driver that has been disabled on the

Advanced tab, the feature is automatically re-enabled.

Print Optimizations

NOTE

Print Optimization settings are available only in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver and HP PCL 5

Unidriver. They are not available in the PS Emulation Unidriver.

The default setting for Print Optimizations is Enabled. When this feature is enabled and your document contains overlapping text and graphics, the text that is placed on top of a graphic might not print correctly.

If the printed output is not correct, you can disable this feature. When this feature is disabled, print optimization-features, such as substituting device fonts for TrueType fonts and scanning for horizontal and vertical rules, are turned off.

PostScript Options

NOTE

Print Optimization settings are available only in the PS Emulation Unidriver. They are not available in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver and HP PCL 5 Unidriver.

Select one of the following settings in the PostScript Output Options drop-down menu:

Optimize for Speed. This is the default setting.

Optimize for Portability. Use this setting to create a file that conforms to the Adobe Document

Structuring Conventions (ADSC). Each page of the document is a self-contained object. This option is useful if you want to create a postscript file and print it on a different printer.

Encapsulated PostScript (EPS). Use this setting to include the file as an image in another document that is to be printed from another program.

Archive format. Use this option to create a postscript file that you can use later.

Select one of the following settings in the TrueType Font Download drop-down menu:

Automatic. This is the default setting. The PS Emulation Driver determines which format is best.

Outline. Select this option if you want to download the TrueType font as a scalable outline font.

Bitmap. Select this option to download the TrueType font as a bitmap font.

Native TrueTypeIf the printer is a TrueType rasterizer printer; select this option to download the

TrueType font as an outline font.

Select one of the following settings in the PostScript Language Level drop-down menu:

3

2

1

The default setting is 3. It is usually better to select the highest number available, because it provides more features. In some instances, lower numbers might be necessary. For example, if you are printing a file to disk and that file is to be printed by someone with a level-1 printer, select 1.

206 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Select one of the following settings in the Send PostScript Error Handler drop-down menu:

Yes. This is the default setting. When an error occurs in the print job, an error page is sent to the printer.

No. Select this setting if you do not want an error page to be printed when an error occurs.

Printer Features

The Printer Features setting contains the following controls:

Print All Text as Black

The Print All Text as Black feature is Disabled by default. When Enabled is selected, the driver prints all text as black regardless of the original document text color. Color text is printed as black, except for white text, which remains white. (White text is a reliable method of printing reverse typeface against a dark background.) This setting does not affect graphic images on the page, nor does it affect any text that is part of a graphic.

Send True Type as Bitmap

NOTE

The Send TrueType as Bitmap option is available only in the HP PCL 6 and

HP PCL 5 unidrivers. It is not available in the PS Emulation Unidriver.

Send True Type as Bitmap provides an alternative for software programs that have trouble using

TrueType fonts for special graphic aspects such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The setting is

Disabled (off) by default. The TrueType fonts are converted to bitmap soft fonts before downloading. The Enabled setting causes the driver to send TrueType fonts to the printer as outlines, which retains the standard format (outline) of the fonts.

Graphics Mode

NOTE

The Graphics Mode option is available only in the HP PCL 5 Unidriver. It is not available in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver or the PS Emulation Unidriver.

Use the Graphics Mode feature to select one of the following settings:

Send Graphics as Vector. Select this setting to send graphics to the product as a combination of HP Graphics Language, version 2 (HP-GL/2), and raster images. This setting might produce higher-quality output. It is the default setting.

Send Graphics as Raster. Select this setting to send all graphics to the product as images composed of individual dots. This setting might improve printing speed in some cases.

Alternative Letterhead Mode

When selected, this option eliminates the need to flip or reload letterhead or preprinted paper in a tray, whether you are printing on one or both sides of the sheet. Load the paper as you would for printing on both sides. If the printer tray has an icon that indicates whether to load paper either face-up or face-down, load the paper in opposite orientation of that shown.

When this option is selected, you must use one of the following options in the Type is setting:

Letterhead

Preprinted

Advanced tab features 207

NOTE

Alternative Letterhead Mode is available only if the printer is equipped with an automatic duplexing unit.

Raster Compression

NOTE

The Raster Compression option is available only in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver. It is not available in the HP PCL 5 Unidriver or the PS Emulation Unidriver.

Use the Raster Compression feature to select the graphics-compression method:

Automatic. The software determines the best compression method to use.

Best Quality. This option forces the software to use a lossless compression method.

(Lossless means that no data is lost during compression.)

Maximum Compression. Where applicable, this option requires the software to always use a lossy compression method (some data is lost).

Layout Options

The Layout Options setting contains the Page Order setting.

Page Order specifies the order in which the pages of your document are printed. Front to Back prints the document so that page 1 prints first. Back to Front prints the document so that page 1 prints last.

NOTE

The page-ordering operation works on whole sheets of media rather than on individual logical pages. Accordingly, if you set Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) to be greater than one, the ordering of logical pages on a physical sheet of media does not change.

208 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

Paper/Quality tab features

To gain access to the Paper/Quality tab, follow these steps:

1.

click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

3.

Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows

Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).

4.

Right-click the product name.

5.

Click Printing Preferences.

6.

Click the Paper/Quality tab.

Use the Paper/Quality tab to specify the size, type, and source of the media. You can also use this tab to specify different media selections for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, and back cover of the document. The following figure shows the Paper/Quality tab.

ENWW

Figure 4-3

Paper/Quality tab

The Paper/Quality tab contains the following control sets:

Print Task Quick Sets

Paper/Quality tab features 209

Paper Options

Use Different Paper/Covers

Document preview image

Print Quality

Print Task Quick Sets

The first group box in the upper portion of the Paper/Quality tab is Print Task Quick Sets. Because they are all the same control, any change to the Print Task Quick Sets group box that is made on the

Paper/Quality tab affects all the Printing Preferences driver tabs that have the Print Task Quick

Sets setting:

Paper/Quality

Effects

Finishing

Job Storage

Color

Use the Print Task Quick Sets setting to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all of the other print driver tabs (except the Advanced tab, where the setting is not available). Print

Task Quick Sets are either preset by network-administrator settings or user-defined printing specifications (such as media size, pages per sheet, and so on). The Print Task Quick Sets control does not appear on the driver Properties tabs.

NOTE

Administrators can predefine Print Task Quick Sets for their users. These administrator

Print Task Quick Sets are defined on the server and are available to users, but usually cannot be modified by users. Users can also define Print Task Quick Sets for their own use.

The following selections are available in the Print Task Quick Sets drop-down menu:

Default Print Settings

User Guide Print Settings

Default Print Settings

When you select Default Print Settings, nearly all of the settings are restored to the combination that existed after the driver was installed (the original settings). However, if the attribute combinations that are associated with watermark definitions, custom media sizes, or the other quick sets have been changed or deleted, the original settings for those items are not restored.

Type a new Quick Set name here appears in the Print Task Quick Sets menu automatically if no other driver settings have been changed since the driver was installed, or if all of the driver settings match the original settings. Otherwise, the setting in the Print Task Quick Sets menu is the same label that appeared when you last closed the printing Properties dialog box by clicking OK.

The following table shows the default settings for Print Task Quick Sets. See the

HP Driver

Preconfiguration section for information about preconfigurable driver settings.

210 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Table 4-1

Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer

Driver feature Feature setting location Default values for

U.S. English Print

Task Quick Sets

Preconfigurable

Print on Both Sides Finishing tab, Document Options group box

Flip Pages Up Finishing tab, Document Options group box

Booklet Layout

Pages per Sheet

Finishing tab, Document Options group box

Finishing tab, Document Options group box

Available, not selected Yes

Unavailable, not selected

Unavailable, Off

1 page per sheet

Yes

Yes

Yes

Print Page Borders Finishing tab, Document Options group box

Page Order Finishing tab, Document Options group box

Orientation

Rotate by 180 degrees

Resizing Options

Print document on

Size to print on

Scale to Fit

Finishing tab, Orientation group box

Finishing tab, Orientation group box

Effects tab, Resizing Options group box

Effects tab, Resizing Options group box

Effects tab, Resizing Options group box

Effects tab, Resizing Options group box

Unavailable

Unavailable

Portrait

Yes

Yes

Yes

Available, not selected Yes

Actual Size Yes

Available, not selected Yes

Actual Size Yes

Unavailable, selected Yes

% of Normal Size

Watermarks

Effects tab, Resizing Options group box

Effects tab

Available, not selected Yes

(none) Yes

Yes Watermarks First

Page Only

Current watermarks

Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box Unavailable, not selected

Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box

(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)

(none)

(none) Watermark

Message

Watermark

Message Angle

Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box

(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)

Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box

(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)

Diagonal

Yes

Yes

Yes

2

2

Watermark

Message Angle

(angle)

Watermark Font

Name

Watermark Font

Color

Watermark Font

Shading

Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box

(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)

Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box

Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box

Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box

Unavailable unless the Angle option is selected, 52 degrees

Arial

Gray

Very Light

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

2

2

2

1

Paper/Quality tab features 211

Table 4-1

Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer (continued)

Driver feature Feature setting location Default values for

U.S. English Print

Task Quick Sets

Preconfigurable

1

Watermark Font

Size

Watermark Font

Style

Size is:

Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box

Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group box

Use Different Paper Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group box

Source is:

Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box

Type is:

Economode

Contrast

Enhancement

Digital Flash

80

Regular

Letter

No

Yes

Yes

Available, not selected No

Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group box

Automatically Select Yes

Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group box

Unspecified Yes

Paper/Quality tab, Print Quality dialog box Available, unselected Yes

Available, Off No Paper/Quality tab, HP Digital Imaging

Options dialog box

Paper/Quality tab, HP Digital Imaging

Options dialog box

Available, Off No

2

SmartFocus

Sharpness

Paper/Quality tab, HP Digital Imaging

Options dialog box

Paper/Quality tab, HP Digital Imaging

Options dialog box

Available, Off

Available, Off

No

No

Smoothing

Unlabeled group box

Job Storage Mode

Proof and Hold

Private Job

Quick Copy

Paper/Quality tab, HP Digital Imaging

Options dialog box

Job Storage tab

Available, Off No

Status message: for example, Your job

will be printed but not stored on the printer

No

Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box

Off is selected No

Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box

Available, not selected No

Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box

Available, not selected No

Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box

Available, not selected No

Stored Job Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box

Available, not selected No

Require PIN to Print Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box

Unavailable, not selected

No

Windows User

Name

Job Storage tab, User Name group box Unavailable, selected

(Windows User Name appears in field)

No

212 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Table 4-1

Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer (continued)

Driver feature Feature setting location Default values for

U.S. English Print

Task Quick Sets

Preconfigurable

1

PIN to Print Job Storage tab, Require PIN group box Unavailable, not selected

No

Display Job ID when printing

Job Storage tab, Job Notification Options group box

Unavailable, selected No

Job Name Job Storage tab, Job Name group box Unavailable,

Automatically selected

No

Color tab, Color Options group box Selected Yes Automatic (color options)

Manual (color options)

Color tab, Color Options group box Available, not selected Yes

Available, not selected Yes

Normal Yes

Print in Grayscale

Edge Control

Color tab, Color Options group box

Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click

Settings on Color tab)

Neutral Grays (text) Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click

Settings on Color tab.)

Halftone (text) Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click

Settings on Color tab.)

Neutral Grays

(graphics)

Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click

Settings on Color tab.)

Halftone (graphics) Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click

Settings on Color tab.)

Black Only

Detail

Black Only

Detail

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Neutral Grays

(photographs)

Halftone

(photographs)

Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click

Settings on Color tab.)

Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click

Settings on Color tab.)

4-Color

Detail

Yes

Yes

1

2

RGB Color Color tab, Color Themes group box Default (sRGB) Yes

These features can be preconfigured by using one of the HP driver preconfiguration tools. For more information, See

HP Driver

Preconfiguration

, or go to: www.hp.com/go/hpdpc_sw .

Not supported in Windows 98 and Windows Me.

User Guide Print Settings

The User Guide Print Settings option provides a Print Task Quick Set for optimal printing of the

HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide.

When you select User Guide Print Settings, all of the settings are restored to the default settings, except for the following settings:

On the Paper/Quality tab, Type Is: is set to Unspecified.

● On the Finishing tab, Print on Both Sides is set to ON.

On the Finishing tab, Flip Pages Up is set to ON.

Paper/Quality tab features 213

On the Finishing tab, Pages per Sheet is set to 2 pages per sheet.

● On the Finishing tab, Page Order is set to Right then Down.

Type new Quick Set name here

By default, the Print Task Quick Sets menu is set to Type new Quick Set name here. When you change any of the default settings on any of the Printing Preferences driver tabs and you want to save the configuration as a Print Task Quick Set, highlight the words Type new Quick Set name here, type the name you want for your new Print Task Quick Set, and then click Save. Print Task Quick Sets are saved in the system registry. To delete a Print Task Quick Set, select it from the drop-down menu and click Delete.

NOTE

Administrators can predefine Print Task Quick Sets for their users. These administrator

Print Task Quick Sets are defined on the server and are available to users, but usually cannot be modified by users. Users can also define Print Task Quick Sets for their own use.

You can store a maximum of 25 Print Task Quick Sets on a particular system. If you attempt to save more, a message box appears that states: There are too many Print Task Quick Sets defined. Please

delete some before adding new ones.

Paper Options

The settings specified in the Paper Options group box on the Paper/Quality tab apply to all of the pages of the document. The following figure shows the Paper Options group box and the selections that are available by default.

Figure 4-4

Paper Options group box

214 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

The appearance of the Paper Options group box changes when the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected. The settings in the Paper Options group box are described in the following order:

Size is

Custom Paper Size

Source is

Type is

Use Different Paper/Covers

Size is

The Size is: setting is a drop-down menu that lists all of the supported media sizes.

When you move the mouse over the dimensions label, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units.

Because media-size settings in most software programs override driver settings, it is generally best to use the driver to set media size only when you are printing from software programs that do not include a media-size setting, such as NotePad, or when you are producing a book or a booklet that does not require different media sizes.

NOTE

Certain software programs can override the size command and specify different media sizes within a single document.

When you change the print-driver setting to a media size that is not currently loaded in the product, a control-panel message appears that prompts you to load the media size or select another tray.

For information about media sizes, see the

Media attributes section of this STR.

When the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected and different options are configured, the

Size is:, Source is:, and Type is: menus change, offering a variety of options. For more information, see the

Use Different Paper/Covers section in this chapter.

Custom Paper Size

The Custom Paper Size dialog box appears when you click Custom… on the Paper/Quality tab. The following figure shows the initial appearance of the Custom Paper Size dialog box.

Paper/Quality tab features 215

Figure 4-5

Custom Paper Size dialog box

Name

Use the Name text box to type a new name for a custom media size.

The name that appears in the Name text box depends on the following conditions:

If a saved custom media size has been selected from the drop-down menu on the Paper/

Quality tab, then the Name text box shows the name of the selected custom media size.

● If a standard media size has been selected on the Paper/Quality tab, then the Name text box shows the default name of "Custom."

If a new name has been typed into the Name text box for the purpose of saving a new size or renaming an existing size, then that new name will remain in the text box until the new size is saved or the dialog box is closed.

If you type a new name into the Name text box, but then do not click Save, you can change the width and height values without losing the name. However, if you close the dialog box without clicking Save, any unsaved name or size values are lost without warning.

Paper size

The width and height values can be changed by typing numeric strings into the edit boxes in the Paper

Size group box.

Any entry that is greater than the maximum limits of the width and height control is rounded down to the maximum valid entry, while any entry that is smaller than the minimum limits of the width and height control is rounded up to the minimum valid entry.

If units are in millimeters, the custom media-size range minimum is the limit rounded up to the nearest whole millimeter. The custom media-size range maximum is the limit rounded down to the nearest whole millimeter. Any non-numerical entry reverts to the last valid entry. Width and height entries are validated when the focus has changed.

The resolution of each control is 1 millimeter or 1/10 of an inch, depending on the current measurement units.

216 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Units

To change measurement units, click one of the options in the Units group box (either Inches or

Millimeters).

Custom width and height control limits

The minimum media size for the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer is 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) and the maximum is 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches). The following table summarizes media size limits for each media-handling device.

Table 4-2

PCL 6 custom media sizes

Tray

Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose)

Tray 2 (250-sheet)

Tray 3 (500-sheet)

Duplexing unit

Dimensions

Width

Height

Width

Height

Width

Height

Width

Height

Minimum

76.2 mm (3.0 inches)

127.0 mm (5.0 inches)

148.0 mm (5.83 inches)

210.0 mm (8.26 inches)

148.0 mm (5.83 inches)

210.0 mm (8.26 inches)

148.0 mm (5.83 inches)

210.0 mm (8.26 inches)

Maximum

215 mm (8.5 inches)

355.6 mm (14.0 inches)

215.9 mm (8.5 inches)

355.6 mm (14.0 inches)

215.9 mm (8.5 inches)

355.6 mm (14.0 inches)

215.9 mm (8.5 inches)

355.6 mm (14.0 inches)

Source is

The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional source trays that are installed through the Device Settings tab also appear here.

The Source is: drop-down menu can contain the following options, depending on what has been installed on the product:

Automatically select

Printer Auto Select

Manual Feed in Tray 1

Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose tray)

Tray 2 (250-sheet tray)

Tray 3 (500-sheet tray)

The default setting is Automatically Select. When this setting is selected, the HP Color LaserJet 3000 uses the source tray that supports the media size that you have selected. If you select a source tray other than Automatically select, make sure that the correct media size is loaded in the source tray.

For information about media sources, see the

Media attributes section of this STR.

Paper/Quality tab features 217

Type is

The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the HP Color LaserJet 3000 supports.

When you use the default setting, Unspecified, the printer uses the default media type, which is usually

Plain.

No mechanism exists for manually adding custom media types through the driver. Custom types can be added only by using the bidirectional communication mechanism, so they must already exist in the product when the bidirectional query occurs. If bidirectional communication is enabled, then the information an updated list of media types is returned. If bidirectional communication is not enabled, then the driver looks for custom media types that have been saved from a previous bidirectional communication query, and uses those. Otherwise, no custom media types are available through the driver.

The following standard types appear in the list:

Unspecified

Plain

Preprinted

Letterhead

Transparency

Prepunched

Labels

Bond

Recycled

Color

Light 60-75 g/m2(16.4–20.5 lb)

Intermediate 90-104 g/m2 (24.7–28.5 lb)

Heavy 105-120 g/m2 (28.8–32.9 lb)

Extra Heavy 120-163 g/m2 (32.9–44.7 lb)

Cardstock 164-220 g/m2 (45–60.3 lb)

Rough

Glossy 106-120 g/m2 (29.1–32.9 lb)

Tough Paper (Glossy Film)

Envelope

The default setting is Unspecified, and the program selects the media type. If you select a different setting, make sure that the correct media type is loaded in the tray that you selected in the Source is:

setting. For more information about media types, see the Media attributes section of this STR.

When you change the print-driver setting to a media type that is not currently loaded in the product, a control-panel message appears that prompts you to load the media type or select another tray.

218 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

Use Different Paper/Covers

You can print books that include different media types by using the Use Different Paper/Covers options.

When you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box, the following settings can appear in the group box, along with the associated options:

Front Cover

First Page

Other Pages

Last Page

Back Cover

NOTE

You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/

Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/

Covers options.

When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select remain configured until you close the software program.

Each option for the Use Different Paper/Covers setting is described in the following sections.

Front Cover

Use the Front Cover options to include a blank or preprinted front cover on a document, or to include a front cover from a source tray that is different from the one used for the remainder of the document.

The following figure shows the Front Cover setting and options.

ENWW

Figure 4-6

Front Cover options

Paper/Quality tab features 219

The following are the Front Cover options:

Size is: drop-down menu

Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box

Source is: drop-down menu

Type is: drop-down menu

The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size

is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings in other Use Different Paper/Covers options.

When you select Front Cover, you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down menus become available and a check mark appears next to the Front Cover option.

The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a front cover to the document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the Device Settings tab also appear here. For more information about the Source

is: setting, see the

Source is section of this chapter.

The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the Type is: in the

Type is section of this

chapter.

NOTE

You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/

Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/

Covers options.

When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings you select remain configured until you close the software program.

First Page

Use the First Page options to select an alternative media type or source for the first page of a document.

The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select the Use

Different Paper/Covers check box.

220 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Figure 4-7

First Page options

The following are the First Page options:

Size is: drop-down menu

Source is: drop-down menu

Type is: drop-down menu

The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size

is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings in other Use Different Paper/Covers options.

The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the

Device Settings tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the

Source is section of this chapter.

The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more

information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is: in the Type is section of this chapter.

NOTE

You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/

Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/

Covers options.

When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select remain configured until you close the software program.

Other Pages

Use the Other Pages options to select an alternative media type or source for the other pages of the document. The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box.

Paper/Quality tab features 221

Figure 4-8

Other Pages options

The following are the Other Pages options:

Size is: drop-down menu

Source is: drop-down menu

Type is: drop-down menu

The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size

is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings made in other Use Different Paper/Covers options.

The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the

Device Settings tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the

Source is section of this chapter.

The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is: in the

Type is

section of this chapter.

NOTE

You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/

Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/

Covers options.

When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select remain configured until you close the software program.

Last Page

Use the Last Page options to select an alternative media size, type, or source for the last page of a document. The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box.

222 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Figure 4-9

Last Page options

The following are the Last Page options:

Size is: drop-down menu

Source is: drop-down menu

Type is: drop-down menu

The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size

is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings in other Use Different Paper/Covers options.

The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more

information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is: in the Type is section of this chapter.

NOTE

You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/

Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/

Covers options.

When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select remain configured until you close the software program.

Back Cover

Use the Back Cover options to include a blank or preprinted back cover on a document, or to include a back cover from a source tray that is different from the one used for the remainder of the document.

The following figure shows the Back Cover setting and options.

Paper/Quality tab features 223

Figure 4-10

Back Cover options

The following are the Back Cover options:

Size is: drop-down menu

Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box

Source is: drop-down menu

Type is: drop-down menu

The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size

is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings in other Use Different Paper/Covers options.

When you select Back Cover, you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down menus become available and a check mark appears next to the Back Cover option.

NOTE

The Back Cover options are not available when the Booklet Printing Layout setting is enabled on the Finishing tab. The back cover setting is unavailable, because this page would otherwise be printed in the middle of a booklet.

The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a back cover to the document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the Device Settings tab also appear here.

The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports.

NOTE

You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/

Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/

Covers options.

When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select remain configured until you close the software program.

224 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Document preview image

The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Printing Preferences driver tabs:

Paper/Quality

Effects

Finishing

Color

Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.

When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image.

Print Quality

The Print Quality group box contains the following controls:

EconoMode

HP Digital Imaging

EconoMode

Select the EconoMode check box to reduce the amount of ink on each printed page. It has been available to legacy HP monochrome printers; with the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer, it is now possible for color printing as well.

Selecting this option extends the life of the toner supply and reduces cost per page. However, it also reduces print quality. The printed image is lighter, but it is adequate for printing drafts or proofs.

HP does not recommend the full-time use of EconoMode. If EconoMode is used full-time when the average toner coverage is significantly less than 5%, it is possible that the toner supply will outlast the mechanical parts in the print cartridge. If print quality begins to degrade under these circumstances, you must install a new print cartridge, even if toner remains in the cartridge.

NOTE

The EconoMode setting might work only if a genuine HP print cartridge is installed.

HP print cartridges can measure the life of the mechanical parts as well as the quantity of ink. If the EconoMode setting is used frequently, the mechanical parts can wear out before the supply of ink is depleted, increasing the risk of ink spillage. Use genuine HP parts to avoid this problem.

HP Digital Imaging

Click HP Digital Imaging to open the HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box, which is shown in the following figure.

Paper/Quality tab features 225

Figure 4-11

HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box

The following settings can be adjusted on the HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box:

Contrast Enhancement

Digital Flash

SmartFocus

Sharpness

Smoothing

The HP Digital Imaging settings should be used only on high-resolution images (600 dpi or higher) that are printed on photograph-quality paper. These settings are not recommended for text.

For the Contrast Enhancement, Digital Flash, SmartFocus, and Smoothing settings, the following controls are available:

Automatic check box

A slide bar ranging from Off to High

The SharpFocus settings are Off and On.

Use the following controls to enhance digital images:

Contrast Enhancement. Use the Contrast Enhancement setting to increase image contrast for a more visually pleasing result. This filter is useful with flat images (images in which much of the image content is compressed into a small, dynamic range of pixel values). Flat images can result from low lighting, environmental haze, or camera or scanner limitations.

Digital Flash. Use the Digital Flash setting to adjust lighting levels to reveal areas in shadow. The filter locates dark areas in an image and brings out detail without degrading other features in the image.

226 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

Sharpness. Many images are improved by increasing their sharpness. Use the Sharpness feature to make edge detail more prominent. The filter detects regions that contain significant variations in pixel value along a number of different vectors (which denotes edges) and then applies a filter to enhance detail.

SmartFocus. Use the SmartFocus setting to increase the apparent resolution of lower resolution images. Many images that are downloaded from the Internet or from digital cameras can be compressed because of size restrictions, and might exhibit pixilation artifacts when printed.

SmartFocus upscales the image to the printer resolution without accentuating these artifacts.

Smoothing. Just as many images benefit from increased sharpness, many images are improved by smoothing, which decreases noise artifacts that digital cameras or scanners often create. When you select Smoothing, the filter locates areas that contain abrupt changes in pixel value by comparison with surrounding pixels (which denotes noise) and then applies a filter to smooth the output.

ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 227

Effects tab features

To gain access to the Effects tab, follow these steps:

1.

Click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

3.

Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows

Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).

4.

Right-click the product name.

5.

Click Printing Preferences.

6.

Click the Effects tab.

Use the Effects tab to create unique media effects such as scaling and watermarks. The following figure shows the Effects tab.

Figure 4-12

Effects tab

The Effects tab contains the following controls:

Print Task Quick Sets

Resizing Options

228 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Document preview image

Watermarks

Print Task Quick Sets

Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the

Paper/

Quality tab features section of this STR.

Resizing Options

The Resizing Options group box consists of the following controls:

Actual Size (default)

Print Document On setting

Scale to Fit option

% of Normal Size setting

Actual Size

Actual Size is the default setting. It prints the document without changing the document size.

Print Document On

Click the Print Document On option to format the document for one media size and then print the document on a different media size, with or without scaling the image to fit the new media size.

The Print Document On control is disabled by either of the following conditions:

The % of Normal Size value is not 100.

The Pages per Sheet value (on the Finishing tab) is not 1.

When Print Document On is selected, the drop-down menu shows the media sizes on which you can print. The list contains all of the standard media sizes that the selected media source supports and any custom sizes that you have created. When Print Document On is selected, Scale to Fit is automatically selected. Clear this check box if you do not want your document reduced or enlarged to fit on the selected media.

Scale to Fit

The Scale to Fit option box specifies whether each formatted document page image is scaled to fit the target media size. By default, Scale to Fit is selected when Print Document On is selected. If the setting is turned off, then the document page images will not be scaled, and are instead centered at full size on the target media. If the document size is larger than the target media size, then the document image is clipped. If it is smaller, then it is centered within the target media. The following figure shows preview images for a document formatted for Legal-size media with the Print Document On check box selected, and the target size specified as Letter.

Effects tab features 229

Figure 4-13

Preview images – Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right)

When the size for which the document is formatted (that is, the logical size) differs from the target size, the preview image uses a dashed gray line to show the boundaries of the logical page in relation to the target page size.

% of Normal Size

The % of Normal Size option provides a slider bar to use for scaling the percentage setting. The default setting in the entry box is 100% of normal size. Normal size is defined as the media size that is selected within the driver or what the driver receives from the software program (if the software program does not negotiate the media size with the driver). The driver scales the page by the appropriate factor and sends it to the printer.

The limits of the range are from 25% to 400%, and any values outside the range are adjusted to those limits as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the Tab key is pressed or another control is selected).

Any change to the scale also changes the page preview, which increases or decreases from the upperleft corner of the preview.

The slider bar controls the scale directly. The value in the edit box changes as the slider-bar indicator is dragged, and the document preview image is updated to the new image scale. Each click on the arrows increases or decreases the scale by 1%. Each click on the slider bar affects the scale by 10%.

You cannot achieve an exact value by dragging the slider-bar indicator. Instead, either use the sliderbar indicator to approximate the value that you want and then use the arrows to refine the value, or type the value into the entry box.

The following settings disable % of Normal Size:

Print Document On (on the Effects tab) is selected

Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1

Document preview image

The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Printing Preferences driver tabs:

Paper/Quality

Effects

230 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

Finishing

Color

Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.

When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image.

Watermarks

Use the Watermarks feature to select a watermark, create your own custom watermarks (text only), or edit an existing watermark. The following watermarks are preset in the driver:

(none)

Confidential

Draft

SAMPLE

The drop-down menu shows alphabetically sorted watermarks that are currently available on the system, plus the string "(none)", which indicates that no watermark is selected. This is the default setting. Any watermark that is selected from this list appears in the preview image.

When the First Page Only check box is selected, the watermark is printed only on the first page of the document. The First Page Only check box is disabled when the current watermark selection is "(none)".

Watermarks are applied to logical pages. For example, when Pages per Sheet is set to "4" and First

Page Only is turned off, four watermarks appear on the physical page (one on each logical page).

Click Edit, and the Watermark Details dialog box appears.

ENWW

Figure 4-14

Watermark Details dialog box

Effects tab features 231

The dialog box shows a preview image and provides options for creating a new watermark and controlling the message angle and font attributes.

Click OK to accept all of the changes that are made in the Watermark Details dialog box. However, clicking Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark and then select a different watermark or click New, all of the changes are saved, and only the current, unsaved changes can be canceled.

Current watermarks

The Current Watermarks group box contains a list of available watermarks, both predefined watermarks that are available in the driver and any new watermarks that you have created.

To create a new watermark, click New. The new watermark appears in the Current Watermarks list and in the Watermark Message edit box as "Untitled" until you name it. The name that you type in the

Watermark Message field appears in the Current Watermarks group box in the Watermark Details dialog box and in the Watermarks group box on the Effects tab.

To name the new watermark, type the selected watermark text in the Watermark Message edit box.

To delete a watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list and click Delete. A warning appears asking whether you are sure you want to delete the selected item. Click Cancel if you want to keep the watermark. Click OK to delete the selected watermark.

NOTE

You can have no more that 30 watermarks in the Current Watermarks list at one time.

When you reach the limit of 30 watermarks, the New button is disabled.

To edit an existing watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list. If you change the

Watermark Message for that watermark, you are, in effect, creating a new watermark.

Watermark Message

The Watermark Message is also the name that identifies the watermark in the Current Watermarks list, except when more than one watermark has the same message. For example, you might want several different watermarks with the message DRAFT, each with a different typeface or font size. When this occurs, the string is appended with a space, a pound sign, and a number (for example, Draft #2).

When a number is added, the number two is used first, but if the resulting name is also in the list, then the number increases until the name is unique (Draft #3, Draft #4, and so on).

Message Angle

Use the controls in the Message Angle group box to print the watermark in different orientations on the page. All settings center the watermark string within the page; the selection of a particular setting affects only the angle of the string placement. The following settings are available:

Diagonal. This is the default setting. Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans the lower-left to upper-right corners of the page.

Horizontal. Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans the mid-left and mid-right edges of the page.

Custom. Select this setting to place the text at the specified angle across the page. Use the numeric spin box to select the angle.

232 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Font Attributes

Use the controls in the Font Attributes group box to change the font and the shading, size, and style of the font.

The Font Attributes group box contains the following controls:

Name

The Name drop-down menu lists fonts that are currently installed on the system. The default is language-dependent.

Color

The Color drop-down menu contains the following selections:

Gray

Red

Yellow

Green

Cyan

Blue

Magenta

Shading

The default Shading setting for new and preset watermarks is Very Light. The following range of shades is available from the Shading drop-down menu:

Lightest

Very Light (default)

Light

Medium Light

Medium

Medium Dark

Dark

Very Dark

Darkest

These values represent the intensity of the gray that is used. Select Light to produce a lightly saturated gray watermark. Select Lightest to produce the lightest shade of watermark. Select

Darkest to produce a black watermark.

Size

Effects tab features 233

Font sizes from 1 to 999 points are available from the Size menu. The default point size is languagedependent.

Style

The following settings are available:

Regular

Bold

Italic

Bold Italic

The default Style setting for new and preset watermarks is Regular.

Default watermark settings

The following table shows Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks.

Table 4-3

Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks

Setting

Name

Color

Shading

Size

Style

New watermark

Arial

Gray

Very Light

80

Regular

Preset watermark

Varies by language

Gray

Very Light

Varies by language

Regular

Click OK to accept all of the changes that have been made in the Watermark Details dialog box. Clicking

Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark and then select a different watermark or click New, all of the changes are saved, and only the current, unsaved changes can be canceled.

234 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

Finishing tab features

To gain access to the Finishing tab, follow these steps:

1.

Click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

3.

Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows

Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).

4.

Right-click the product name.

5.

Click Printing Preferences.

6.

Click the Finishing tab.

Use the Finishing tab to print booklets and control the media output. The following figure shows the

Finishing tab.

ENWW

Figure 4-15

Finishing tab

The Finishing tab contains the following controls:

Print Task Quick Sets

Document Options

Finishing tab features 235

Document preview image

Orientation

Print Task Quick Sets

Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined

printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see Paper/Quality tab features .

Document Options

The Document Options group box contains the following controls:

Print on Both Sides

Flip Pages Up

Booklet layout

Pages per Sheet

Print Page Borders

Page Order

Print on Both Sides

The default setting for the Print on Both Sides option is off (not selected). Print on Both Sides is available when the following conditions exist:

Type is: on the Paper tab is set to any media type except for the following types:

Labels

Transparency

Envelope

Extra Heavy

Cardstock

Tough Paper

Size is: is set to any media size except for the following sizes:

Statement

Envelope #10

Envelope DL

Envelope C5

Envelope B5

236 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Envelope Monarch

Double Postscard (JIS)

Automatically printing on both sides

The duplexing unit in the product prints on two sides of a sheet of paper when the Print on Both

Sides option is specified in the print job. The HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer comes with a duplexing unit installed in the following models:

● HP Color LaserJet 3000dn

HP Color LaserJet 3000dtn

These printer models support smart duplexing. The smart duplexing feature increases printing performance by preventing one-page print jobs or single-sided pages of a duplexed print job from going through the duplexing unit even when the duplexing feature has been selected in the driver.

All media types support the smart duplexing feature, except for media types that cannot be printed on both sides (such as labels, transparencies, and envelopes) and the following media types:

Prepunched

Preprinted

● Letterhead

When the media type is set to Unspecified, the smart duplexing feature is disabled.

To achieve the best print quality when printing on the second side of the page, the printer needs to make adjustments to its print modes. When you select a media type, you are, in effect, instructing the printer to use a group of settings (such as fuser temperature and print speed) to print the media with the best possible quality. This group of settings is known as print mode. A different print mode is used with each media type. Print-mode adjustments for the second side of a duplexed page are automatic.

Manually printing on both sides

Manually Print on 2nd Side is not selected

Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box to print on the second side of the media for the HP Color LaserJet 3000 and HP Color LaserJet 3000n printer models, which do not have a duplexing unit installed. Also select Print on Both Sides (Manually) on the other

HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer models for media types that are not available when using the automatic duplexing unit, such as cardstock and thick media.

Manually printing on the second side of a page is available when you are using the HP PCL 6,

PCL 5, or PS emulation unidriver. If a duplexing unit is installed and manual duplexing is enabled in the driver, the printer automatically prints on both sides of media types that are supported for automatic duplexing (Letter, A4, Legal, and 8.5 x 13 only), and forces manual printing on both sides for media types that are not supported.

Select the media type that corresponds to the media that you are using for the print job. The following media types have a different print modes when you manually print on the second side:

Plain

Preprinted

Letterhead

Finishing tab features 237

Prepunched

● Bond

Recycled

Color

Rough

NOTE

To make the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box available in the document options, select the Allow Manual Duplexing option on the Device Settings tab in the Properties print-driver tabs. See

Installable Options in the

Device Settings tab features section of this

chapter.

If you want to print on both sides manually while using media that is supported for automatic duplexing, you must select and apply the Not Installed setting on the Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided

Printing) option on the Device Settings tab.

Cardstock media can be manually printed on the second side, but no change occurs to the print mode.

Transparencies and labels should not be manually printed on the second side.

To print a multiple-page document, follow these steps:

1.

Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box.

2.

Click OK. The even-number pages of the document print.

3.

When the control panel shows the MANUALLY FEED message, insert the stack of media (on which the even-number pages have been printed) as indicated in the following figure.

Figure 4-16

Print on Both Sides Instructions dialog box

When you have completed the steps that appear in the dialog box, the second half of the print job prints on the back side of the stack of media. The driver does not require the program to specifically support odd- and even-page printing, because the driver coordinates this function.

238 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Flip Pages Up

Use the Flip Pages Up check box is used to specify the duplex-binding option. By default, the Flip

Pages Up check box is not available. It is available only when Print on Both Sides is selected, The following table demonstrates the results of selecting this check box, depending on the media orientation selected on the Finishing tab.

Table 4-4

Page orientation

Orientation (Finishing tab)

Portrait

Landscape

Flip Pages Up selected

Short-edge binding

Long-edge binding

Flip Pages Up not selected

Long-edge binding

Short-edge binding

When Print on Both Sides is selected, the document preview image changes to show a spiral binding along either the left edge or the top edge of the page. In addition, a folded-over corner appears in the lower-right portion of the preview image, indicating that printing occurs on the back side. An arrow on the folded-over corner points in the direction that the pages would be flipped if they were bound together.

Short-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by flipping over like the pages of a calendar.

Long-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by turning like the pages of a book.

Booklet layout

The Booklet Layout drop-down menu, visible when Print on Both Sides is selected, offers choices that are based on the current media size. The default setting for the Booklet Printing drop-down menu is Off. The other settings have the following format, where [paper size] depends on the media size that is set on the Paper/Quality tab:

Left Edge Binding

Right Edge Binding

When you select Left Edge Binding or Right Edge Binding, the document preview image changes to show the location of the binding. If the Pages per Sheet setting is on the default setting of 1, it automatically changes to 2 pages per sheet. If you change the Pages per Sheet setting manually to

4, 6, 9, or 16 pages per sheet, the booklet setting is disabled. See the Pages per Sheet section of this

chapter for more information.

Book and Booklet Printing

The HP Color LaserJet 3000 supports book and booklet printing.

A book is a print job consisting of at least two pages. It can have a different media type for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, or back cover. Use the Front Cover, First Page, Other Pages,

Last Page, and Back Cover settings on the Paper/Quality tab (available when you select the Use

Different Paper check box) to select different media for the front cover, first page, other pages, and back cover. For more information, see

Paper/Quality tab features

in this chapter.

A booklet is a print job that places two pages on each side of a sheet that can then be folded into a booklet that is half the size of the media. Use the Booklet Layout drop-down menu on the Finishing tab to control booklet settings.

Finishing tab features 239

To print a booklet

Complete the following steps to print a booklet in most software programs.

1.

Click File.

2.

Click Print.

3.

Click Properties.

4.

Click the Finishing tab.

5.

Select the Print on Both Sides check box.

6.

In the Booklet Layout drop-down menu, select the type of booklet printing that you want (for example, Right Edge Binding).

7.

Click OK in the print driver.

8.

Click OK in the print dialog box to print.

Pages per Sheet

Use the Pages per Sheet option to select the number of pages that you want to print on a single sheet of media. If you choose to print more than one page per sheet, the pages appear smaller and are arranged on the sheet in the order that they would otherwise be printed. The Pages per Sheet dropdown menu provides six settings:

1 page per sheet (this is the default)

2 pages per sheet

4 pages per sheet

6 pages per sheet

9 pages per sheet

16 pages per sheet

NOTE

When you select an option other than 1 page per sheet, booklet printing is unavailable.

Print Page Borders

Related controls indented beneath the Pages per Sheet edit box are Print Page Borders and Page

Order, which become active when Pages per Sheet is greater than 1.

Print Page Borders sets a line around each page image on a printed sheet to help visually define the borders of each logical page.

Page Order

The Page Order drop-down menu contains four selections:

Right, then Down

Down, then Right

240 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

Left, then Down

Down, then Left

The preview document image changes to reflect alterations in these settings, as shown by the examples in the following figure.

ENWW

Figure 4-17

Page-order preview images

2 pages per sheet

4 pages per sheet

6 pages per sheet

9 pages per sheet

16 pages per sheet

Document preview image

The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Printing Preferences driver tabs:

Paper/Quality

Effects

Finishing

Color

Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.

When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image.

Orientation

Orientation refers to the layout of the image on the page, and does not affect the way that media feeds into the printer. You can specify the orientation of the print job. The three available orientations are portrait, landscape, and rotated. The default orientation is Portrait.

NOTE

Nearly all software programs establish the orientation for the printed page, so the page orientation in the driver is useful only for the few software programs that do not set an orientation.

Finishing tab features 241

The Orientation group box contains three options:

Portrait. The top edge of the document is the shorter edge of the media.

Landscape. The top edge of the document is the longer edge of the media.

Rotate by 180 degrees. This creates a landscape or portrait orientation in which the image is rotated 180°. This setting is useful for printing prepunched media.

You can toggle orientation between portrait and landscape by clicking the document preview image. If you select the Rotate by 180 degrees check box, no change occurs in the document preview image.

242 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

Job Storage tab features

To gain access to the Job Storage tab, follow these steps:

1.

Click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

3.

Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows

Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).

4.

Right-click the product name.

5.

Click Printing Preferences.

6.

Click the Job Storage tab.

NOTE

The Job Storage tab appears only when a hard disk is installed or at least 128 MB of total memory is installed and configured.

Use the job-storage feature to store print jobs in the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer memory for printing at a later time. These job-storage features are described in the following sections.

The Job Storage tab appears among the driver tabs only if job-storage feature is enabled. To support job-storage features for complex jobs, or if you often print complex graphics, print postscript (.PS) documents, or use many downloaded fonts, HP recommends that you install additional memory, install a hard disk, or both. Added memory also gives you more flexibility in supporting job-storage features.

A hard disk or a minimum total memory of 128 MB is required to use the job-storage features.

After a hard disk or additional memory is installed, the driver must be configured to reflect the changes in the product. If bidirectional communication is enabled in your environment, the Update Now feature can be used to update the drivers. For more information, see the

Automatic Configuration section in this

chapter.

To configure the drivers manually after installing a hard disk or additional memory, follow these steps:

1.

Click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

3.

Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional) or Printers and

Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).

4.

Right-click the product name.

5.

Click Properties.

6.

Click the Device Settings tab.

7.

If additional memory has been installed, select Printer Memory: under Installable Options, and then select either 96 MB, 128 MB, 160 MB, 192 MB, 256 MB, 288 MB, 320 MB, 384 MB, or 512 MB, depending on the total amount of memory currently installed.

8.

If a hard disk has been installed, select Installed for the Printer Hard Disk under Installable

Options, and then select Installed in the drop-down menu.

9.

Click OK to make the printer hard disk and job-storage features available.

ENWW Job Storage tab features 243

NOTE

The Job Storage tab appears among the driver tabs only if the job-storage feature is enabled.

You can disable the job-storage feature while leaving the printer hard disk enabled. To disable the jobstorage feature, follow these steps:

1.

Click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

3.

Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows

Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).

4.

Right-click the product name.

5.

Click Properties.

6.

Click the Device Settings tab.

7.

Select Job Storage.

8.

Select Disabled in the Change 'Job Storage' Setting dialog box that appears.

NOTE

When the job-storage feature is disabled, the Job Storage driver tab is not visible.

If the job-storage feature is enabled (without installing a hard disk but with at least 128 MB of total memory), two Job Storage Mode settings are available on the Job Storage tab:

Proof and Hold

Private Job

Two additional Job Storage Mode settings become available on the Job Storage tab if a hard disk is installed:

Quick Copy

Stored Job

The following figure shows the Job Storage tab.

244 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Figure 4-18

Job Storage tab

The Job Storage tab contains the following controls:

NOTE

This section also contains information about using the job-storage feature when printing.

Print Task Quick Sets

Status group box

Job Storage Mode

Require PIN

Job Notification Options

User Name

Job Name

Using job-storage features when printing

Print Task Quick Sets

Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined

Job Storage tab features 245

printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the

Paper/

Quality tab features section of this STR.

Status group box

The unlabeled group box on the Job Storage tab contains a status message about the destination of a print job. The status information changes depending on the selections that are made on the Job

Storage tab.

Job Storage Mode

Use the Job Storage Mode options on the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer to store documents at the product and then control their printing at the product control panel.

The HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer offers the following Job Storage Mode options:

Off

Proof and Hold

Private Job

Quick Copy

Stored Job

These options and the settings that control them are described below.

Off

When selected, this option turns the job-storage feature off (it is disabled), which means that the print job will not be stored in the product.

Proof and Hold

To use the Proof and Hold option, the job-storage feature must be enabled.

When selected, this option stores the print job in memory and prints only the first copy of the job, allowing you to check the first copy. If the document prints correctly, you can print the remaining copies of the print job at the control panel. You can set the number of proof-and-hold print jobs that can be stored in the product at the control panel.

After it is released for printing, the proof-and-hold job is immediately deleted from the product. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second proof-andhold job to the product with the same user name and job name as an existing proof-and-hold job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job. Proof-and-hold jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.

NOTE

The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proof-andhold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held document. Also, a document that has the same user name and job name as one that is already stored on the printer hard disk will overwrite the existing document.

246 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Private Job

To use the Private Job option, the job-storage feature must be enabled.

When you select Private Job, the print job is sent to the product, but is not printed until you request the job at the product control panel. Selecting Private Job activates the PIN group box. The print job can be printed only after you type the correct PIN at the control panel. After the job is printed, the job is immediately deleted from the product. This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing.

The Private Job/PIN coupling has a PIN restriction of four ASCII numeric characters (0 though 9). If you type non-numeric characters, they are removed immediately. If you type more than four characters, the characters past the fourth are truncated. The field temporarily accepts fewer than four digits in the string, but when the edit field loses focus, the zeroes pad the left end until the PIN contains exactly four digits.

The default initialized value for the PIN is 0000 for Private Job.

After it is released for printing, the private job is immediately deleted from the product. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second private job that has the same user name and job name as an existing private job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job, regardless of the PIN. Private jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.

Quick Copy

To use the Quick Copy option, a printer hard disk must be installed, and the job-storage feature must be enabled.

When you select Quick Copy, the entire print job prints and a copy of the print job is stored on the product, after which you can print additional copies of the print job at the product control panel. The number of quick-copy print jobs that can be stored in the product is set by using the product control panel.

NOTE

The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proof-andhold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held document. Also, a document that has the same user name and job name as one that is already stored on the printer hard disk will overwrite the existing document. Quick Copy jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.

Stored Job

To use the Stored Job option, a hard disk must be installed on the product and the job-storage feature must be enabled.

Use the Stored Job option to send a print job directly to the printer hard disk without printing it. The print job is stored in the product as if it is an electronic file cabinet. After the print job is stored on the printer hard disk, you can print the job at the product control panel.

The job remains stored in the product until it is deleted or overwritten by a document that has the same user name and job name. Stored jobs remain on the printer hard disk when the product is turned off.

Use this feature for forms and other common or shared documents.

A stored job can be managed in two ways: as either a private or a public job.

Job Storage tab features 247

Select the Require PIN to Print check box to set the private mode. Use a private stored job to send a print job directly to the product, which can then be printed only after you type a PIN up to 4 digits long at the product control panel. (You can set the PIN in the PIN group box.)

After the job is printed, the job remains in the product and can be printed again at the product control panel.

The box labeled PIN is usually inactive. The Require PIN to Print option becomes available when you select Stored Job. If you select the Require PIN to Print box, you must type a PIN to make the stored job private.

NOTE

A private stored job is not the same as a private job the previous section. Private jobs are deleted from the product after they are printed. Private stored jobs are retained in the product after printing, but require that a PIN be typed each time they are printed. A printer hard disk is required for Private stored jobs.

Require PIN

Require PIN is available when Stored Job is selected. Select the PIN to Print box, then type a 4-digit

PIN number in the box provided. The stored job is sent to the product, where you must enter the 4-digit

PIN on the control panel to retrieve the stored job.

The PIN to Print box is selected, but not available, when Private Job is selected. Type a 4-digit PIN number in the box provided. The stored job is sent to the product, where you must type the 4-digit PIN on the control panel to retrieve the stored job.

Job Notification Options

Clicking a Job Storage Mode selection causes the User Name and Job Name options to become available. The Display Job ID when printing check box is selected by default. The Display Job ID

when printing option causes a pop-up dialog box to appear when the job-storage print job is printed.

The dialog box shows the user name and job name that are associated with the stored print job, as well as the product name, port, and location.

User Name

Use the User Name settings to help identify the job at the product control panel. The following are the User Name settings:

Windows User Name. This option associates your Windows user name with the stored print job.

The Windows user name automatically appears in the text field below the Windows User Name options.

Custom. Use this option to type a custom name for the stored print job. When you click Custom, the text field below the option becomes available. The User Name field can contain no more than

16 characters, and is limited to A through Z and 0 through 9 because the name appears on the product control-panel display. If you try to type a lowercase character, it automatically shifts to uppercase. If you try to type a character in an ASCII code of fewer than 32 or more than 126 characters, the character is removed from the edit field, along with all of the characters that follow it. If you try to type more than 16 characters, any character beyond 16 is truncated.

248 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Job Name

Use the Job Name options to specify a name to identify the job at the product control panel. The following are the Job Name settings:

<Automatic> This option, which is the default selection, automatically generates the job name that is associated with the stored print job. The file name of the print job is used if it is available to the print driver. Otherwise, the software program name or a time stamp is used for the job name. The file name of the print job is used if it is available to the print driver. Otherwise, the software program name or a time stamp is used for the job name.

Custom. Use this to type a custom job name for the stored print job. When you click the

Custom, the text field below the option becomes available. In those languages for which

<Automatic> cannot be translated without the use of invalid characters, the driver uses a string of three dashes. The acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating system. The string must be of a length and type that can appear on the product control-panel display.

The Job Name field can contain no more than 16 characters, and is limited to A through Z (uppercase or lowercase) and 0 through 9 so that the name can appear on the product control-panel display. If you try to type a character in an ASCII code of fewer than 32 or more than 126 characters, the character is removed from the edit field, along with all of the characters that follow it. If you try to type more than 16 characters, any character beyond 16 is truncated.

When the dialog box is closed, or as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the

Tab key is pressed or another control is selected), an empty string is replaced with <Automatic>. The acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating system. The string must be of a length and type that can appear on the product control-panel display.

If Job Name Exists. When you store a print job, you can create a print-job name or the product software can assign one automatically. If a print job with the same name already exists, the new print job will overwrite the existing print job. To eliminate the chances of a new print job overwriting an old print job because both have the same name, select Use Job Name + (1-999). After you create the print job name, or when one is created automatically, the product software assigns a number between 1 and 999 to the end of the print job name to make the name unique. Select Replace Existing File if you always want the product software to overwrite an existing print job with the same print job name.

Using job-storage features when printing

To use job-storage features when printing, follow these steps:

1.

Click File and then click Print from the software program. The Print dialog box appears.

NOTE

Clicking the print icon in the software program toolbar prints the job without using job-storage features.

2.

Click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears.

3.

Click the Job Storage tab.

4.

Select the job-storage options by clicking the appropriate option button, and then complete any required fields.

5.

Click OK.

Job Storage tab features 249

Releasing a job-storage print job

After you send a print job that uses the job-storage feature, you can release the job to print from the product control panel.

1.

Press (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus.

2.

Press (the up button) and (the down button) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .

3.

Press and to scroll to your user name, and then press .

4.

Press and to scroll to the job name, and then press .

5.

Press and until PRINT is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .

6.

Press .

7.

If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press and to select the first digit of the PIN, and then press . The number in the product control-panel display changes to an asterisk. Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.

If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with the next step.

8.

Press and to select the number of copies to print.

9.

Press to print the job.

Deleting a job-storage print job

Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the product hard disk. You can do this from the product control panel.

1.

Press (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus.

2.

Press (the up button) and (the down button) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .

3.

Press and to scroll to your user name, and then press .

4.

Press and to scroll to the job name, and then press .

5.

Press and until DELETE is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .

6.

Press .

7.

If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press and to select the first digit of the PIN, and then press . The number in the product control-panel display changes to an asterisk. Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.

If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with the next step.

8.

Press to delete the job.

250 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

Color tab features

To gain access to the Color tab, follow these steps:

1.

click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

3.

Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows

Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).

4.

Right-click the product name.

5.

Click Printing Preferences.

6.

Click the Color tab.

Use the Color tab to specify predefined color-option settings or to fine-tune the color treatments and halftoning. Color output can also be converted to grayscale. The Color tab is shown in the following figure.

ENWW

Figure 4-19

Color tab

The Color tab contains the following sets of controls:

Print Task Quick Sets

Color tab features 251

Color Options

Color Themes

Document preview image

Print Task Quick Sets

The Print Task Quick Sets control is available on each Printing Preference tab, and is used to store the current combination of driver settings found on all of the other tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see

Paper tab features .

Color Options

Use the Color Options group box to adjust the independent color controls. The settings affect the print job color rendering and print quality. The Color Options group box contains the following controls:

Automatic option (default)

Manual option

Settings button (Click this button to open the Color Settings dialog box.)

Print in Grayscale check box

Automatic

Use the Automatic option for default color settings that automatically fine-tune the printed output. The

Automatic default color settings provide high-quality output for most color printing needs.

Manual

To change the default color settings, select the Manual option, and then click Settings. The Color

Settings dialog box appears.

To change the settings, make your selections by using the drop-down menus in the Color Settings dialog box, and then click OK. The following figure shows the Color Settings dialog box with "Custom" settings.

252 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Figure 4-20

Color Settings dialog box

The Color Settings dialog box contains the following controls:

General

Edge Control

Text

Neutral Grays

Halftone

Graphics

Neutral Grays

Halftone

Photographs

Neutral Grays

Halftone

General

Use the General setting group to control Edge Control settings for all color printing.

Color tab features 253

Edge Control determines how edges are rendered. Edge Control consists of three components:

● Adaptive Halftoning, which increases edge sharpness

Trapping, which reduces the effect of color plane misregistration by slightly overlapping the edges of adjacent objects

● Color Resolution Enhancement Technology (C-REt), which increases the apparent resolution by placing each dot for the smoothest edges

The Edge Control option offers four settings:

Off. The Off setting turns Trapping, Adaptive Halftoning, and C-REt to Off.

Light. The Light setting provides minimal trapping. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On and C-REt is set to On.

Normal. The Normal setting provides the default trapping settings. Adaptive Halftoning is set to

On, and C-REt is set to On.

Maximum. The Maximum setting provides the most trapping. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On, and C-REt is set to On.

Neutral Grays

The Neutral Grays drop-down menu controls the selection of a device-dependent color table that is embedded in the product firmware. You can adjust the Neutral Grays setting independently for text, graphics, or photographs. The following options are available:

Black Only. This option generates neutral colors (grays and black) by using only black toner. This option guarantees that neutral colors do not have a color cast. Black Only is the default setting for the Text and Graphics components.

4-Color. This option generates neutral colors by combining all four colors of toner, which produces smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors. It also produces the darkest possible black. 4-Color is the default setting for Photographs.

Halftone

The Halftone setting controls the selection of a product-dependent halftone algorithm that is embedded in the product firmware. Halftoning is a method by which the product mixes the four primary colors (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) in varying proportions to create millions of colors. The Halftone options affect the resolution and clarity of the color on the printed page. You can select Halftone settings for text, graphics, and photographs independently.

The following Halftone options are available:

Detail. This is the default option; it is useful for text and graphics that require sharp distinctions among lines or colors, or for images that contain a pattern or a high level of detail. Select this option for sharp edges and detail.

Smooth. This option provides better results for large, solid-filled print areas. It also enhances photographs by smoothing out fine color gradations. Select this option for uniform and smooth area fills.

Color Themes

The Color Themes group box contains the following settings:

254 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Default (sRGB)

None

Custom Profile

Default (sRGB)

Select Default (sRGB) for most printing needs. This setting instructs the product to interpret RGB color as sRGB, which is the accepted standard of Microsoft and the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C).

Colors are matched to optimize the RGB colors on the screen and to provide vivid images and graphics.

None

Select None to instruct the product to print RGB data in raw device mode. To render documents correctly when this option is selected, you must manage color within the software program or the operating system.

NOTE

To prevent poor image quality, use this option only if you are familiar with the procedures for managing color in the software program or the operating system.

Custom Profile

Select Custom Profile when you want to duplicate the printed output from other printers or for using special effects. This setting instructs the product to use a custom input profile to more accurately predict and control color output.

The default Custom Profile is an emulation of the color table used on the HP LaserJet 4650 printer. The printer holds only one custom profile at a time, so when you download and install another color table, it erases the default color table and installs the new one.

You can download custom profiles from the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/clj3000_firmware

Document preview image

The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Printing Preferences driver tabs:

Paper/Quality

Effects

Finishing

Color

Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.

When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image.

Color tab features 255

Services tab features

To gain access to the Services tab, follow these steps:

1.

Click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

3.

Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows

Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).

4.

Right-click the product name.

5.

Click Printing Preferences.

6.

Click the Services tab.

The Services tab is shown in the following figure.

Figure 4-21

Services tab

The Services tab contains the following group boxes:

Internet Services

Device services

256 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Internet Services

The Internet Services group box contains the Select a destination drop-down menu with the following selections:

Online diagnostic tools. This is the HP Instant Support Web site, where you can find interactive tools and contacts for troubleshooting.

Support and troubleshooting. This is the main Web site for HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer support.

Product manuals. View or download HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer manuals.

Check for driver updates. Automatically check your print drivers to see whether the correct and most up-to-date print drivers are installed.

Color printing access/usage. Find information about enabling and disabling color printing and tracking color print-job usage.

Order supplies. Shop online for HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer supplies.

If you have Internet access, select any of these items and click Go! to open the corresponding HP Web page.

Device services

Click the Device and Supplies status icon to open the Device Status screen of the HP EWS. For more information, see

HP Embedded Web Server .

Click the Print color usage job log icon to print a page that shows information about users, print jobs, and applications that have printed to the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer.

Services tab features 257

Device Settings tab features

The Device Settings tab is in the Properties window for the print driver. To gain access to the Device

Settings tab, follow these steps:

1.

Click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

3.

Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows

Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).

4.

Right-click the product name.

5.

Click Properties.

6.

Click the Device Settings tab.

Available options depend on the feature. The following figure shows the Device Settings tab.

Figure 4-22

Device Settings tab

The Device Settings tab contains controls for media-handling devices and controls for managing the

HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer.

The Device Settings tab contains the following controls:

Form to Tray Assignment options

Font Substitution Table option

External Fonts option

Installable Options options

258 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Form to Tray Assignment

A network administrator can use Form to Tray Assignment to specify the media size in each input tray.

The HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer supports more than one source of media. You can assign a form

(which defines the media size and margins) to each media source. When a form is matched to a source, you can select the form when you print. The product prints from the tray to which that form is assigned.

Network administrators can use the Form to Tray Assignment setting to specify, in the driver, the media size that is loaded into each available input tray. The use of forms constrains the choices that are available in the media-size list on the Paper/Quality tab in the Printing Preferences driver tabs.

This constraint prevents (or reduces the likelihood of) tying up the printer with media-mount messages that occur when users request sizes or types that are not available.

The trays listed in the Form to Tray Assignment setting include standard trays and optional accessory trays. Generally, items that are installed separately have a separate Installable Options setting.

The input trays listed here are also listed as media sources on the Paper/Quality tab.

Configuring the trays

1.

Select the appropriate tray in the Form to Tray Assignment list.

2.

Use the drop-down menu to select the media size (or form) that is loaded in that tray.

3.

Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the remaining trays.

4.

Click OK to enable your settings, or, if necessary, click Cancel to reconfigure all the trays, and remove the size and type constraints that have been imposed on the Paper/Quality tab.

Font Substitution Table

Use the Font Substitution Table settings to install and remove external fonts for the product. External fonts can be soft fonts or DIMM fonts.

Click the Font Substitution Table option to open a list of fonts, as show in the following figure. Use the settings to change the TrueType-to-printer font mappings.

Device Settings tab features 259

Figure 4-23

Font Substitution Table

External Fonts

NOTE

The External Fonts option is available only in the HP PCL 6 and PCL unidrivers. It is not available in the PS Emulation Unidriver.

Use the External Fonts option to install and remove external fonts for the product. External fonts can be soft fonts or DIMM fonts.

Click the External Fonts option to make the Properties button available. Click Properties to open the

HP Font Installer dialog box, which is shown in the following figure.

260 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Figure 4-24

HP Font Installer dialog box

Installing external fonts

Follow these steps to install external fonts.

1.

Click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

3.

Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and

Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).

4.

Right-click the name of the product.

5.

Click Properties.

6.

Click the Device Settings tab.

7.

Click the External Fonts option. The Properties button appears.

8.

Click Properties. The HP Font Installer dialog box appears.

9.

Type the name and path of the font metric file in the Printer Font File Location text box, or click Browse to locate the file on the computer. The font file names appear in the Font(s) to be

Added window.

10.

Select the fonts that you want to add, and then click Add. The fonts are installed and the file names appear in the Installed Font(s) window.

11.

Click OK to close the HP Font Installer dialog box.

Removing external fonts

1.

Click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

3.

Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and

Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).

4.

Right-click the name of the product.

Device Settings tab features 261

5.

Click Properties.

6.

Click the Device Settings tab.

7.

Click the External Fonts option. The Properties button appears.

8.

Click Properties. The HP Font Installer dialog box appears. The external fonts that are installed appear in the Installed Fonts window.

9.

Select the fonts that you want to remove, and then click Remove. The fonts are removed.

10.

Click OK to close the HP Font Installer dialog box.

PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings

The following controls are available and appear only in the PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings tab.

Available PostScript Memory

This control specifies the amount of available postscript memory and provides a spin box for changing this value. The available postscript memory is a subset of the product total physical memory. It is usually best to set the postscript memory to match what is shown on the configuration page. To print a configuration page from the product control panel, follow these steps:

1.

Press (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus.

2.

Press (the up button) and (the down button) to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press

.

3.

Press and to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION.

4.

Press to print the configuration page.

Output Protocol

This control specifies the protocol that the product uses for print jobs. The following options are available:

ASCII (default)

TBCP

Binary

When you click ASCII, data is sent in ASCII format (7-bit), which might take longer to print but can be sent through any I/O channel, such as a serial, parallel, or network port.

When you click TBCP (Tagged Binary Communications Protocol), all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format.

When you click Binary, all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format.

262 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Send Ctrl-D Before Each Job

This control specifies whether the product will be reset at the beginning of every postscript document.

The default setting is No. Pressing Ctrl-D resets the product to its default setting to ensure that previous print jobs do not affect the current print job. Using Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the product is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a product connected through parallel or serial ports, change No to Yes.

Send Ctrl-D After Each Job

This control specifies whether the product will be reset at the end of every postscript document. The default setting is Yes. Pressing Ctrl-D resets the product to its default setting to ensure that future print jobs are not affected by the current print job. Using Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the product is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a network printer, change

Yes to No.

Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray

This control specifies whether to convert the true gray value (RGB) in text to the gray provided by the

PS Emulation Driver. The following settings are available:

Yes

No. This is the default setting.

Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray

This control specifies whether to convert the true gray value (RGB) in graphics to the gray provided by the PS Emulation Driver. The following settings are available:

Yes

No. This is the default setting.

Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts

This control specifies whether to add the Euro symbol to the printer fonts. The following settings are available:

Yes. This is the default setting.

No

Job Timeout

This control specifies how long the document can take to get from the computer to the product before the product stops trying to print the document. If you specify 0 seconds, the product continues trying to print indefinitely. The default setting is 0 seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds.

Wait Timeout

This control specifies how long the product waits to get more postscript information from the computer.

After the specified time passes, the product stops trying to print the document and prints an error message. If you are trying to print a very complicated document, you might want to increase this value.

If you specify 0 seconds, the product waits indefinitely. The default setting is 300 seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds.

Device Settings tab features 263

Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline

This control specifies the minimum font size (in pixels) for which the driver downloads TrueType fonts as outline (Type 1) fonts. A font smaller than the minimum setting is downloaded as a bitmap (Type 3) font. Use this option to fine-tune the Automatic setting for the TrueType Font Download option on the

Advanced tab in Document Defaults. The default setting is 100 pixels. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 pixels.

Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline

This control specifies the maximum font size (in pixels) for which the driver will download TrueType fonts as bitmap (Type 3) fonts. A font larger than the maximum setting will be downloaded as an outline (Type

1) font. Use this option to fine-tune the Automatic setting or override the Send TrueType as Bitmap setting for the TrueType Font Download option on the Advanced tab in Document Defaults. The default setting is 600 pixels. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 pixels.

Installable Options

This section provides information to configure the printing options that you can install for the

HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer. The following controls are available:

Automatic Configuration (Off by default)

Tray 3

Duplex Unit (for 2-sided Printing)

Allow Manual Duplexing

Printer Memory

Printer Hard Disk

Job Storage

Mopier Mode

Postscript Pull through (PS Emulation Unidriver only)

Automatic Configuration

Use the Device Settings tab to tell the driver about the hardware configuration of the product. If bidirectional communication is enabled in a supported environment, set up this tab by selecting the

Update Now setting in the Automatic Configuration setting. The default setting is Off. After an automatic configuration, the setting returns to Off after the changes are made.

If your environment does not support bidirectional communication, the Update Now setting is unavailable, so you must manually configure the options on this tab.

If you have more than one driver installed for the product (for example, the default HP PCL 6 Unidriver and the HP PCL 5 Unidriver), the Update Now feature works automatically only on the driver on which it is activated. The other driver will not be updated, and might show the default setting for the specific product model.

264 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Tray 3

This control specifies whether you have tray 3, an additional 500-sheet tray, installed on the product.

The default setting is Not Installed.

Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing)

The HP Color LaserJet 3000dn and the HP Color LaserJet 3000dtn printer models come with a duplex unit installed. This setting is enabled (Installed) by default.

NOTE

These printer models support smart duplexing. The product uses the smart duplexing feature to detect information on both sides of the print job pages and runs the pages through the duplexing unit only if there is printable information on the second side of the page.

The HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer supports smart duplexing. The product uses the smart duplexing feature to detect information on both sides of the print job pages and only runs the pages through the duplexing unit if printable information appears on the second side of the page.

Allow Manual Duplexing

Select Allow Manual Duplexing to print on both sides of any size and most types of media (except transparencies, envelopes, and labels). To use this feature, you must reinsert the media stack into the input tray to print the second side. The product pauses while you make this adjustment.

This setting is enabled by default.

Printer Memory

This option matches the setting to the amount of memory that is installed in the product. The driver generates ranges of memory that can be selected, up to the maximum that the product can accept. The driver can use this information to manage how the print driver uses the product memory.

Printer Hard Disk

When this option is enabled, the Job Storage option and the Mopier Mode are enabled in the print driver. Use the Job Storage option to store print jobs and then print them later from the control panel.

The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job.

Job storage

When Job Storage is enabled, the product can store print jobs so that you can gain access to those print jobs later at the control panel.

Mopier Mode

The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job. Multiple-original printing (mopying) increases performance and reduces network traffic by transmitting the job to the product once, and then storing it in memory. The remainder of the copies are printed at the fastest speed. All documents that are printed in mopier mode can be created, controlled, managed, and finished from the computer, which eliminates the extra step of using a photocopier.

The HP Color LaserJet 3000 supports the transmit-once mopying feature when the Mopier Mode: setting on the Device Settings tab is Enabled.

Device Settings tab features 265

When you use the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, HP PCL 5 Unidriver, or PS Emulation Unidriver, mopying is performed in one of two ways: either through the software or through the product hardware. When the mopier is enabled, mopying takes place through the product hardware by default. One copy of a multiplepage print job is transmitted once through the network to the product, together with a printer job language

(PJL) command directing the product to make the specified number of copies.

When you disable the mopier, you are not necessarily disabling mopying, which the driver can still perform through the software rather than the product hardware (the mopying path that is disabled when you change the Mopy Mode setting to Disabled). However, a multiple-copy print job that is sent when the mopier is disabled loses the advantage of transmitting the print job once, because the job is sent through the network for each copy.

Mopier mode and collation

Mopying and collating print jobs are independent but closely related functions. Mopying, the ability to send original print jobs to the product, is performed by the print driver. Collating can be controlled by either the print driver or the document software program. The mopying mode is selected by default in the driver, and can be disabled by changing the Mopier Mode setting on the Device Settings tab to

Disabled.

Control collation through the print driver by selecting or clearing the Collated check box on the

Advanced tab. You can clear the check box, which is available only when the Copy Count option is set to more than 1 copy, to allow the software program to control collation.

To receive uncollated multiple copies of a print job, you must clear the Collated check box and make sure that the software program collation feature is not selected.

The following table shows the relation between mopier mode settings and collation settings in the software program and the driver. The first three columns show the settings; the last column, "Expected result", shows how a 3-page print job would appear.

Table 4-5

Driver mopier mode and collation settings

Mopier mode

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Application collation

Not selected

Not selected

Selected

Selected

Not selected

Not selected

Selected

Selected

Driver collation

Not selected

Selected

Not selected

Selected

Not selected

Selected

Not selected

Selected

Expected result

3 copies uncollated

3 copies uncollated

3 copies collated

3 copies collated

3 copies uncollated

3 copies uncollated

3 copies collated

3 copies collated

Postscript Passthrough (PS Emulation Unidriver only)

Postscript Passthrough is enabled by default, and must be enabled for most print jobs. Postscript passthough provides additional capabilities for some software programs when printing to a postscript driver. Options such as Watermarks, n-up and Booklet Printing might not print correctly from some software programs with Postscript Passthrough enabled, because such programs send postscript

266 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

information to the printer that cannot be controlled by the driver. Other programs might print using these options without problems. Select Disabled and print the document again if you encounter problems.

NOTE

In some cases, disabling Postscript Passthrough can cause unexpected results within a software program.

ENWW Device Settings tab features 267

About tab features

The About tab is in the Properties for the print driver. To gain access to the print driver Properties, click Start on the Window task bar, select Settings, and then click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers

and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware

Devices (Windows XP Home). Right-click the product name, and then click Properties.

1.

Click Start.

2.

Select Settings.

3.

Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows

Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).

4.

Right-click the product name.

5.

Click Properties.

6.

Click the About tab.

The About tab provides detailed information about the driver. It contains an overall build number (in parentheses after the model name) together with specific information about each of the components.

The information varies according to the HP Color LaserJet 3000 model number, driver, date, and versions. The About tab is shown in the following figure.

Figure 4-25

About tab

The About lists driver installation file names and their version numbers. The About tab also indicates whether the driver was autoconfigured, whether administrator preferences were set, the date the driver was last configured, and whether the configuration is default or user-defined.

268 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

5 Installing Windows printing-system components

Introduction

The HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer comes with software and installers for Microsoft® Windows and

Apple Computer, Inc., Macintosh systems. Linux and UNIX systems are supported, and software is available on the Web. For detailed information about operating systems that support printing-system

software installation for the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer, see Supported operating systems

.

This chapter provides procedures for installing and removing the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printingsystem software for Windows operating systems. The chapter provides information about these topics:

Windows

Font support

General installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, and XP operating systems

Installing from the printing-system CD

Installing from a network or from downloaded files

Detailed Windows installation

Basic, Full, and Custom Installation dialog box sequence

Installing print drivers by using Add Printer

Installer Customization Wizard for Windows

Point and Print installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, XP, and Server 2003

Setting a default printer

NOTE

If the computer is running a 64-bit Windows operating system, you must install the

corresponding 64-bit print driver. For instructions, see Installing print drivers by using Add Printer .

ENWW Introduction 269

Font support

The following sections list the fonts that are included with Microsoft Windows software, and the fonts that are available on the CD that came with the product.

Basic fonts

Microsoft Windows software includes these basic fonts, which can be used with any HP printing product:

Arial

Courier New Italic

Times New Roman Italic

Arial Italic

Courier New Bold

Times New Roman Bold

Arial Bold

Courier New Bold Italic

Times New Roman Bold Italic

Arial Bold Italic

Symbol

Wingdings

Courier New

Times New Roman

Default fonts

The following default fonts are installed through a Full Installation of the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printing-system software.

Table 5-1

Default fonts

Font name

Albertus Extra Bold

Albertus Medium

Antique Olive

Antique Olive

Antique Olive

CG Omega

CG Omega

Font style

Regular

Regular

Regular

Bold

Italic

Regular

Bold

File name

ALBR85W.TTF

ALBR55W.TTF

OLVR55W.TTF

OLVR75W.TTF

OLVR56W.TTF

CGOR45W.TTF

CGOR65W.TTF

270 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

ENWW

Table 5-1

Default fonts (continued)

Font name

CG Omega

CG Omega

CG Times

CG Times

CG Times

CG Times

Clarendon Condensed

Coronet

CourierPS

CourierPS

CourierPS

CourierPS

Garamond

Garamond

Garamond

Garamond

Helvetica®

Helvetica

Helvetica

Helvetica Narrow

Helvetica Narrow

Helvetica Narrow

Helvetica Narrow

Helvetica

ITC Avant Garde Gothic

ITC Avant Garde Gothic

ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi

ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi

ITC Bookman Light

ITC Bookman Light

ITC Bookman Demi

ITC Bookman Demi

ITC Zapf Chancery

ITC Zapf Dingbats

Font style

Kursiv Halbfett

Regular

Bold

Bold Oblique

Regular

Bold

Bold Oblique

Oblique

Oblique

Book

Book Oblique

Regular

Oblique

Regular

Italic

Regular

Italic

Medium Italic

Regular

Bold Italic

Italic

Regular

Bold

Bold Italic

Italic

Bold

Regular

Regular

Bold

Bold Oblique

Oblique

Antiqua

Halbfett

Kursiv

File name

GARR66W.TTF

HELR45W.TTF

HELR65W.TTF

HELR66W.TTF

HELR47W.TTF

HELR67W.TTF

HELR68W.TTF

HELR48W.TTF

HELR46W.TTF

AVGR45W.TTF

AVGR46W.TTF

AVGR65W.TTF

AVGR66W.TTF

BOKR35W.TTF

BOKR36W.TTF

BOKR75W.TTF

BOKR76W.TTF

CHANC___.TTF

DINGS___.TTF

CGOR66W.TTF

CGOR46W.TTF

CGTR45W.TTF

CGTR65W.TTF

CGTR66W.TTF

CGTR46W.TTF

CLAR67W.TTF

CORONET.TTF

CPSR45W.TTF

CPSR65W.TTF

CPSR66W.TTF

CPSR46W.TTF

GARR45W.TTF

GARR65W.TTF

GARR46W.TTF

Font support 271

Table 5-1

Default fonts (continued)

Font name

Letter Gothic

Letter Gothic

Letter Gothic

Marigold

New Century Schoolbook

New Century Schoolbook

New Century Schoolbook

New Century Schoolbook

Palatino

Palatino

Palatino

Palatino

SymbolPS

Times*

Times

Times

Times

Univers

Univers

Univers Condensed

Univers Condensed

Univers Condensed

Univers Condensed

Univers

Univers

Font style

Roman

Bold

Bold Italic

Italic

Roman

Regular

Bold

Bold Italic

Regular

Bold

Italic

Regular

Bold

Bold Italic

Italic

Italic

Roman

Bold

Bold Italic

Bold

Bold Italic

Medium

Medium Italic

Medium

Medium Italic

File name

LETR45W.TTF

LETR65W.TTF

LETR46W.TTF

MARIGOLD.TTF

NCSR75W.TTF

NCSR76W.TTF

NCSR56W.TTF

NCSR55W.TTF

PALR65W.TTF

PALR66W.TTF

PALR46W.TTF

PALR45W.TTF

SYMPS__.TTF

TIMR65W.TTF

TIMR66W.TTF

TIMR46W.TTF

TIMR45W.TTF

UNVR65W.TTF

UNVR66W.TTF

UNVR67W.TTF

UNVR68W.TTF

UNVR57W.TTF

UNVR58W.TTF

UNVR55W.TTF

UNVR56W.TTF

Ninety-two additional PS emulation fonts are also available on the CD.

Table 5-2

Additional PS emulation fonts

Font name

Albertus MT

Albertus MT

Albertus MT Lt

Antique Olive CompactPS

Font style

Regular

Italic

Regular

Regular

File name

PS_12639.TTF

PS_12640.TTF

PS_14530.TTF

PS_11120.TTF

272 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

ENWW

Table 5-2

Additional PS emulation fonts (continued)

Font name

Antique Olive Roman

Antique Olive Roman

Antique Olive Roman

Apple Chancery

Bodoni Poster

Bodoni PosterCompressed

BodoniPS

BodoniPS

BodoniPS

BodoniPS

Candid

Chicago

Clarendon Light

ClarendonPS

ClarendonPS

Cooper Black

Cooper Black

Copperplate32bc

Copperplate33bc

CoronetPS

Eurostile

Eurostile Bold

Eurostile ExtendedTwo

Eurostile ExtendedTwo

Geneva

GillSans

GillSans

GillSans

GillSans Condensed

GillSans Condensed

GillSans ExtraBold

GillSans

GillSans Light

GillSans Light

Font style

Regular

Regular

Regular

Bold

Bold Italic

Regular

Bold

Regular

Regular

Italic

Regular

Regular

Italic

Regular

Regular

Bold

Italic

Italic

Regular

Bold

Bold Italic

Italic

Regular

Regular

Regular

Regular

Bold

Regular

Bold

Italic

Italic

Regular

Regular

Regular

File name

PS_10369.TTF

PS_10370.TTF

PS_14514.TTF

PS_14515.TTF

PS_10249.TTF

PS_10267.TTF

PS_10268.TTF

PS_14512.TTF

PS_14511.TTF

PS_24509.TTF

PS_13872.TTF

PS_13874.TTF

PS_13875.TTF

PS_14053.TTF

PS_14054.TTF

PS_14051.TTF

PS_13873.TTF

PS_13871.TTF

PS_13870.TTF

PS_11119.TTF

PS_11118.TTF

PS_11846.TTF

PS_24516.TTF

PS_12704.TTF

PS_14508.TTF

PS_12581.TTF

PS_12585.TTF

PS_12586.TTF

PS_12582.TTF

PS_24517.TTF

PS_24518.TTF

PS_14513.TTF

PS_10269.TTF

PS_12968.TTF

Font support 273

Table 5-2

Additional PS emulation fonts (continued)

Font name

Joanna MT

Joanna MT

Joanna MT

Letter Gothic

Letter GothicPS

Letter GothicPS

Letter GothicPS

Lubalin Graph

Lubalin Graph

Lubalin Graph

Lubalin Graph

MarigoldPS

Mona Lisa Recut

Monaco

New York

Optima

Optima

Optima

Optima

Goudy

Goudy

Goudy

Goudy ExtraBold

Goudy

Helvetica Condensed

Helvetica Condensed

Helvetica Condensed

Helvetica Condensed

Hoefler Text

Hoefler Text Black

Hoefler Text Black

Hoefler Text

Hoefler Text Ornaments

Joanna MT

Font style

Bold

Bold Italic

Italic

Regular

Regular

Regular

Regular

Regular

Bold

Bold Italic

Italic

Italic

Regular

Bold

Bold Italic

Regular

Bold

Bold Italic

Italic

Bold Italic

Italic

Regular

Regular

Italic

Italic

Regular

Regular

Bold

Bold Italic

Regular

Regular

Italic

Regular

Bold

274 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components

File name

PS_14505.TTF

PS_14506.TTF

PS_14504.TTF

PS_13778.TTF

PS_13777.TTF

PS_13779.TTF

PS_13780.TTF

PS_12675.TTF

PS_12677.TTF

PS_12625.TTF

PS_12623.TTF

PS_94073.TTF

PS_14525.TTF

PS_24524.TTF

PS_24510.TTF

PS_12506.TTF

PS_12510.TTF

PS_12511.TTF

PS_12507.TTF

PS_12544.TTF

PS_10695.TTF

PS_12542.TTF

PS_12545.TTF

PS_12543.TTF

PS_14526.TTF

PS_14528.TTF

PS_14529.TTF

PS_14527.TTF

PS_24519.TTF

PS_24521.TTF

PS_24522.TTF

PS_24520.TTF

PS_24523.TTF

PS_14503.TTF

ENWW

ENWW

Table 5-2

Additional PS emulation fonts (continued)

Font name

Oxford

StempelGaramond Roman

StempelGaramond Roman

StempelGaramond Roman

StempelGaramond Roman

Taffy

Univers 45 Light

Univers 45 Light

Univers 45 Light

Univers 45 Light

Univers 47 CondensedLight

Univers 47 CondensedLight

Univers 55

Univers 55

Univers 57 Condensed

Univers 57 Condensed

Univers ExtendedPS

Univers ExtendedPS

Univers ExtendedPS

Univers ExtendedPS

Font style

Bold

Bold Italic

Italic

Bold

Bold Italic

Regular

Italic

Regular

Italic

Italic

Regular

Bold

Bold Italic

Regular

Regular

Italic

Bold

Regular

Bold Italic

Italic

File name

PS_14072.TTF

PS_11546.TTF

PS_11545.TTF

PS_11547.TTF

PS_11548.TTF

PS_14507.TTF

PS_13501.TTF

PS_14023.TTF

PS_14024.TTF

PS_13502.TTF

PS_14030.TTF

PS_14040.TTF

PS_14021.TTF

PS_14022.TTF

PS_14029.TTF

PS_14039.TTF

PS_13548.TTF

PS_13547.TTF

PS_14481.TTF

PS_14480.TTF

Font support 275

Installation instructions

The following sections provide instructions for installing the print drivers on various Windows operating systems.

General installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, and XP operating systems

Installation is similar for the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, and Windows XP operating systems. The Windows NT 4.0 operating system does not support the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer.

NOTE

The HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver, the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver, and the

PS Emulation Driver are available on the printing-system software CD. For more information, see the

Installing print drivers by using Add Printer section in this chapter.

If the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer is connected through a file or print server, the printing-system software must first be installed on the server before being installed on any client systems. If the HP

LaserJet printing-system software is not first installed on the server, then bidirectional communication and some driver autoconfiguration methods are not available to the client systems.

For Windows 2000, and Windows XP, administrator rights on the system are necessary to install the software.

When the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printing-system installer runs, the HP LaserJet uninstaller is always added to the system.

Installing from the printing-system CD

Follow these instructions to install the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printing system from the CD that came with the product.

1.

Quit all software programs.

2.

Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive.

NOTE

If the CD does not start automatically, click Start, click Run, and then browse to and double-click the SETUP.EXE file in the root directory of the CD.

3.

Click Install Printer and follow the onscreen prompts.

Installing from a network or from downloaded files

Follow these instructions if you downloaded the files from the Web, or if you are installing the printingsystem files from a network. You might need to see your network administrator for the location of the printing-system software file.

1.

Browse to the location of the SETUP.EXE file.

2.

Double-click the SETUP.EXE file.

3.

Click Install Printer and continue to follow the instructions until the product is installed. For detailed

installation instructions, see Detailed Windows installation

.

276 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

Detailed Windows installation

This section provides information about the installation dialog box sequence for installing the

HP Color LaserJet 3000 printing-system software in Microsoft Windows environments. You can choose to install the software by using either a Basic, Full, or Custom Installation.

Using the Help, Back, Next, and Cancel buttons

Click the Help button on any screen where it appears to find suggestions for and explanations about the installation process.

Click the Back button on any installation dialog box to return to the previous dialog box. The specific dialog box depends on your previous selections.

After you select any options on a given screen, click the Next button to proceed to the next step in the installation sequence.

To exit the installation sequence without installing the product, click the Cancel button in any installation dialog box.

1.

When you click Cancel, a dialog box opens that prompts you with this question: “Are you sure you want to cancel the installation?”

Figure 5-1

Are you sure you want to cancel the installation? dialog box

2.

When you click Yes, the Cancel dialog box opens, stating that the setup was interrupted.

ENWW

Figure 5-2

Cancel dialog box

3.

Click Finish to close the installation screens.

Installation instructions 277

The result of clicking these buttons is explained in context in the following sections.

Modifying a pre-existing installation

If an HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer has been installed previously on your system, the appearance of the main install screen changes on the CD Browser, and the install-printer setting changes to modify

installation. A pre-existing installation also changes the sequence of installation screens that are presented, depending on the selections you make.

Direct-connect installation through a USB or parallel port

The printing-system software should be installed before the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer is connected to the computer through a parallel or USB connection and turned on. During the installation process, the software will prompt you to connect the device during installation.

Basic, Full, and Custom Installation dialog box sequence

NOTE

The dialog boxes shown in this chapter appear in the Windows XP Professional installation sequence. The order and appearance of dialog boxes can vary among operating systems.

The Full Installation includes the following components:

HP Color LaserJet 3000 PCL 6 Driver

● HP Easy Printer Care

Screen Fonts

● Install Notes

User Guide

When you select the Install Printer option from the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printing-system software

CD, the Language Selection dialog box appears.

Figure 5-3

Language Selection dialog box

NOTE

The Language Selection dialog box lists only the languages that are available on the

HP Color LaserJet 3000 printing-system software CD.

278 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

The installer automatically detects the language that the computer system uses and presents this selection as the default.

You can select another language that is available on the CD by clicking the down arrow in the dropdown menu.

Click OK to initiate the printing-system setup. The Welcome dialog box appears.

Figure 5-4

Welcome to the HP Color LaserJet 3000 Setup Wizard dialog box

NOTE

The Windows NT 4.0 operating system does not support the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer. If you try to install the printer in a Windows NT 4.0 environment, the following screen appears.

ENWW

Figure 5-5

Setup Error – Unsupported Operating System

Installation instructions 279

When installing the product on a supported operating system, click Next on the Welcome screen to continue the installation. The Software License Agreement dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 5-6

Software License Agreement dialog box

The I disagree option is selected by default. Read the software-license agreement, click I agree, and then click Next to proceed with the installation.

The Printer Connection dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 5-7

Printer Connection dialog box

280 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

NOTE

The HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer does not support infrared connections.

If you click USB Cable (a "direct connection" using a USB 2.0 cable), and then click Next, the

Installation Type dialog box opens. This is the default option.

If you click Parallel Cable (a "direct connection" using a parallel cable), and then click Next, the

Installation Type dialog box opens.

To continue with the default installation sequence, see

Figure 5-20 Installation Type dialog box

.

NOTE

The printing-system software should be installed before the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer is connected to the computer through a parallel or USB connection and turned on. During the installation process, the software will prompt you to connect the device during installation.

If you are installing the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer over the network, click Wired Networking in the

Printer Connection dialog box.

For a network installation, the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer must be connected to the network and turned on before the printing-system software is installed so that the software can detect the printer.

NOTE

For wireless installation instructions using an HP Jetdirect ew2400 802.11g Wireless

Print Server or an HP Direct 380x802.11B wireless print server, consult the documentation that comes with the print server.

Click Next to continue. The Searching dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.

ENWW

Figure 5-8

Searching dialog box

Installation instructions 281

NOTE

If you are installing the product over a network, you must let the search for the first subnet in the network finish in order to find all available printers. After the first subnet is scanned for available HP Color LaserJet 3000 printers, the results appear in the Printers Found dialog box.

However, the installer continues to search the network for additional printers after the first results appear. The results of searching the first subnet usually takes place within about 20 seconds. It might take some time for the installer to search the other subnets and for the full list of printers to appear in the Printers Found dialog box (see

Figure 5-11 Printers Found dialog box ),

depending on the configuration of the network.

NOTE

The installation process includes the option of using the TCP/IP address for the

HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer, which might be preferable to waiting for the installer to finish the search.

If the network has a firewall that is blocking the installation, the Firewall Detected dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 5-9

Firewall Detected dialog box

If you are performing a network installation and no printer is found, the Printer Not Found dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure.

282 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

ENWW

Figure 5-10

Printer Not Found dialog box

The product might not be connected to the network. Ensure that the printer is connected and is turned on. If a firewall is blocking the installation and you want the installer to open a port through the firewall, click Next.

The Searching dialog box appears (see

Figure 5-8 Searching dialog box

).

If a printer is found, the Printers Found dialog box appears, with a list of matching products that have been found on the network. The Printer Found dialog box is shown in the following figure.

Installation instructions 283

Figure 5-11

Printers Found dialog box

Select the printer that you want to install and click Next. The Confirm Network Settings dialog box opens (see

Figure 5-13 Confirm Network Settings dialog box ).

If the printer is that you want to install is not listed and you want the installer to continue searching network subnet masks, click Search Again…. The Check Printer Connection screen appears.

Click Next to perform another search.

If the printer that you want to install is not listed and you know its TCP/IP address, click Next. The

Confirm Network Settings dialog box opens. See Figure 5-13 Confirm Network Settings dialog box

and follow the instructions for changing the TCP/IP address.

If a single printer is found, the Printer Found dialog box appears, with a list of matching products that have been found on the network. The Printer Found dialog box is shown in the following figure.

284 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

Figure 5-12

Printer Found dialog box

If you click No, I want to install a different printer and then click Next, the Check Printer

Connection dialog box opens, advising you to make sure the cable is properly connected, and giving

you the option of searching again for a network printer or specifying a printer by address (see Figure

5-15 Check Printer Connection dialog box ).

If you click Yes, install this printer and then click Next, the Confirm Network Settings dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.

ENWW

Figure 5-13

Confirm Network Settings dialog box

Installation instructions 285

In the Confirm Network Settings dialog box, click Next to continue the installation. The Installation

Type dialog box opens (see

Figure 5-20 Installation Type dialog box ).

If you click Change Settings…, the Confirm Change Setting dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.

WARNING!

When you change the TCP/IP configuration by using the Change Settings button, you change the actual settings in the product Jetdirect card. You should make changes to these settings only with the advice of your network administrator.

Figure 5-14

Confirm Changing Setting dialog box

If you click No, the Installation Type dialog box opens (see Figure 5-20 Installation Type dialog box

).

If you click Yes, the Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box opens (see

Figure 5-19 Change TCP/IP

Settings dialog box ).

The Check Printer Connection dialog box, which appears if you selectedNo, I want to install a

different printer in the Printer Found dialog box or if the system failed to detect the product over the network, is shown in the following figure.

286 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

Figure 5-15

Check Printer Connection dialog box

If you click Search again for all available printers and then click Next, the Searching dialog box opens

(see Figure 5-8 Searching dialog box

).

If you click Specify Printer by address and then click Next, the Specify Printer dialog box opens. The

Specify Printer dialog box is shown in the following figure.

If you click Enter settings for a printer not on the network and then click Next, the Printer

Settings dialog box opens (see

Figure 5-17 Printer Settings dialog box ).

ENWW

Figure 5-16

Specify Printer dialog box

Installation instructions 287

You can specify a printer by clicking one of the following options and typing in the required information:

Hardware Address (MAC)

IP Address

IP Hostname

When you click Next, the Searching dialog box opens. When the search is finished, the Printer

Found dialog box opens (see

Figure 5-11 Printers Found dialog box ).

If you clicked Enter settings for a printer not on the network in the Check Printer Connection dialog box and then clicked Next, the Printer Settings dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 5-17

Printer Settings dialog box

To install the printer by using the hardware address, click Hardware Address (MAC), type the product hardware address in the field, and then click Next to continue the installation. The Set Port Name dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.

To install the printer using the TCP/IP address, click IP Address, type the product TCP/IP address in the field, and then click Next to continue the installation. The Set Port Name dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.

288 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

ENWW

Figure 5-18

Set Port Name dialog box

Type a port name in the Port Name: field and click Next to open the Installation Type dialog box (see

Figure 5-20 Installation Type dialog box ).

Click Next to proceed with the installation. The Installation Type dialog box opens (see Figure 5-20

Installation Type dialog box ).

NOTE

If you selected Yes in the Confirm Changing Setting dialog box (see Figure 5-14

Confirm Changing Setting dialog box

), the Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.

Installation instructions 289

Figure 5-19

Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box

If you make a change in the IP Address:, Subnet Mask:, or Gateway: fields (without clicking Next) and then click Suggest Settings…, the fields refresh with information that was found by the installer and reported in the Printer Found screen.

Type a different TCP/IP Address, Subnet Mask, or Gateway address and then click Next to open the

Confirm Network Settings dialog box (see

Figure 5-13 Confirm Network Settings dialog box ).

If you clear the Use Default Port Name check box and click Next, the Set Port Name dialog box opens

(see

Figure 5-18 Set Port Name dialog box ).

Figure 5-20

Installation Type dialog box

290 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

NOTE

The components of a Full Installation might vary from product to product.

Click Basic Installation to install only the HP PCL 6 Unidriver (Windows 2000, Windows XP, and

Windows Server 2003) or the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver (Windows 98 and Windows Me) screen fonts. If you click Basic Installation and then click Next, the Ready to Install dialog box opens (see

Figure 5-25 Ready to Install dialog box ).

If you select Custom Installation and then click Next, the Drivers dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.

ENWW

Figure 5-21

Drivers dialog box

An empty check box indicates that the feature is not installed. A check mark appears when you select an install state for that feature.

Information about the space required and the space available on your hard drive appears in the dialog box.

Any combination of features can be selected for the installer, and none depends on any other selection.

It is possible to create a custom installer that installs features without including a print driver. Select the drivers you want to install (or select none of them if you are not installing a driver).

Click Next to proceed with the installation. The Additional Software dialog box opens.

To view details about the drivers, click Details…. The driver Details dialog box appears.

Installation instructions 291

Figure 5-22

Driver Details dialog box

All the drivers that are available in the Drivers dialog box are described in the Details dialog box. Click

OK to return to the Drivers dialog box.

In the Drivers dialog box, click Next to continue the installation. The Additional Software dialog box appears.

Figure 5-23

Additional Software dialog box

292 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

To view details about the additional software, click Details. The additional software Details dialog box appears.

ENWW

Figure 5-24

Additional software Details dialog box

All the software that is available in the Additional Software dialog box is described in the Details dialog box. Click OK to return to the Additional Software dialog box.

Click Next to open the Ready to Install dialog box.

Installation instructions 293

Figure 5-25

Ready to Install dialog box

Click Install to start the installation process.

Click Printer Properties to open the Printer Properties dialog box. This dialog box has two tabs:

General

Sharing

Figure 5-26

Printer PropertiesGeneraltab

On the General tab, you can change the printer name by typing a new name in the Printer Name field.

294 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

Use the Location: and Comment: fields to describe the printer. You can also leave these fields blank.

If you want to use the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer as your default printer, select the Use the printer

as the default printer for Windows-based programs check box.

Click OK to return to the Ready to Install dialog box, or click the Sharing tab to share the printer over a network.

ENWW

Figure 5-27

Printer Properties Sharing tab

On the Sharing tab, Not Shared is the default setting. To share the printer, click the Shared as: option and type the printer name in the text field.

NOTE

When you do not share the printer, additional driver support is not available. If you share the printer on Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 operating systems by clicking Shared as, you must type a name. You can also provide additional print driver support for other operating systems.

If you click Shared as in the Sharing tab of the Printer Properties dialog box, the text box becomes available. Type the share name and then click Next. The Ready to Install dialog box opens.

NOTE

To allow sharing across all operating systems, the share name should not exceed 7 characters. The share name is restricted to a maximum of 80 characters for a single pagedescription language (PDL), or 72 charaters for multiple PDLs.

If you want to select additional drivers to support automatic driver downloads, click Additional

Drivers. The Additional Drivers dialog box appears.

If you are installing the printer in a Windows 2000, Windows XP, or a Windows Server 2003 operating environment and you want to install additional drivers for Windows 98 or Windows Me, click Additional

Drivers. The Additional Drivers dialog box appears.

Installation instructions 295

Figure 5-28

Additional Drivers dialog box

NOTE

If you want to support automatic driver downloads to clients from the computer that you are using to install the printer, select the Windows 98 and Me check box and click OK.

The Additional Drivers dialog box does not appear if the computer is running Windows 98 or

Windows Me.

In the Ready to Install dialog box, click Next to begin the process of copying and installing the printingsystem software folders and files. The Installing HP Color LaserJet 3000 dialog box is shown in the following figure.

Figure 5-29

Installing dialog box

This dialog box remains on the screen until the status bar fills.

Click Cancel to close the Installer Customization Wizard without installing the printing-system software.

At a certain point, the Cancel button disappears and the process cannot be revoked.

296 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

When the installation is complete, the Finish dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 5-30

Finish dialog box

Click Finish to close the Finish dialog box and exit the Installer Customization Wizard.

NOTE

Depending on the type of installation and selected options, you might or might not be presented with some additional steps after you click Finish.

The HP Color LaserJet 3000 Next Steps dialog box appears.

ENWW

Figure 5-31

HP Color LaserJet 3000 Next Steps dialog box

NOTE

If you are installing the HP Color LaserJet 3000 over a direct connection and HP Easy

Printer Care was not installed earlier, an option for installing HP Easy Printer Care appears on the HP Color LaserJet 3000 Next Steps dialog box.

Installation instructions 297

To verify that the printer is connected, click Print Driver Test Page. The Test Page dialog box appears.

Figure 5-32

Test Page dialog box

If the test page prints correctly, click OK to continue. If it does not print, click Troubleshoot… to open screens that guide you through options to find the source of the problem.

If you have access to the Internet, you can register your product online. In the Congratulations dialog box, click Register Product to open the HP Registration Web site.

298 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

ENWW

Figure 5-33

HP Registration screen

Installing print drivers by using Add Printer

Use the following steps to install the print drivers by using the Add Printer feature of Windows:

1.

Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive.

2.

Go to the Add a printer feature in Windows.

In Windows XP, click Start on the desktop, click Settings, and then click Printers and Faxes. The

Printers and Faxes window appears. Click Add a printer. The Add a printer wizard screen appears.

In Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows 2000, click Start on the desktop, click Settings, click

Printers, and then click Add a printer. The Add a printer wizard screen appears.

3.

Use the Add a printer wizard to find and connect to the printer. The print drivers are loaded as a part of this process.

Installation instructions 299

If the computer is running a 64-bit Windows operating system, you must install the corresponding 64-bit print driver. The 64-bit print drivers are included on the software CD-ROM. Use the following steps to install a print driver by using the Add Printer feature.

1.

Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive.

2.

Click Start on the desktop, click Settings, click Printers and Faxes, and then click Add a

printer. The Add a printer wizard screen appears.

3.

Use the Add a printer wizard to find and connect to the product. The print drivers are loaded as a part of this process.

4.

Select the Have disk option and navigate to one of the print-driver files on the software CD, as shown in the following list:

● To install the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, select the following file:

\<language>\Drivers\(your operating system)\PCL6\hpc90xmd.inf

To install the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, select the following file:

\<language>\Drivers\(your operating system)\PCL5\hpc90xmd.inf

To install the PS Emulation Unidriver, select the following file:

\<language>\Drivers\(your operating system)\PS\hpc90xmd.inf

5.

Complete the wizard steps. The print driver will be installed as part of the wizard process.

Installer Customization Wizard for Windows

Administrators can use the Installer Customization Wizard option to customize the

HP Color LaserJet 3000 installer by pre-setting the installation options in a response file. To start the utility, click installer customization wizard on the main menu of the software CD browser. Using this option, administrators can create a silent (unattended) installer that is customized with any of the following selections:

Language

Operating system

Print drivers

Components

NOTE

For detailed information about the Installer Customization Wizard, see the HP Device

Installer Customization Wizard, which is available at the following Web site: www.hp.com/support/clj3000

Running the Installer Customization Wizard

The Installer Customization Wizard runs from the CD. It can be started from the CD browser, depending on product-specific instantiation. It runs separately from the common Microsoft Installer (MSI) with its own interface.

Running the Installer Customization Wizard produces one installation package and a response file

(RESPONSE.INI) for a single system installation. The installation package might work for multiple systems that have the same response information, or the RESPONSE.INI file can be directly edited for

300 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

system-configuration differences. The HP Device Installer Customization Wizard which provides the exact text for replacing entries in the RESPONSE.INI file, is available at the following Web site: www.hp.com/support/clj3000

To run the Installer Customization Wizard

1.

Insert the HP Color LaserJet 3000 software CD in the CD-ROM drive.

2.

In the CD browser main screen, click Installer Customization Wizard.

The Welcome to the HP Color LaserJet 3000 Installation Customization Wizard screen appears.

To complete the installation, follow the instructions in the dialog boxes, as described in the following section.

Figure 5-34

Welcome to the HP Color LaserJet 3000 Installation Customization Wizard screen

Dialogs

Click Next in the Welcome to the HP Color LaserJet 3000 Installation Customization Wizard dialog box. The Language Selection dialog box appears.

ENWW

Figure 5-35

Language Selection dialog box

Installation instructions 301

Select the language and then click OK. The Software Licence Agreement dialog box appears.

Figure 5-36

Installer Customization Wizard Welcome dialog box

To cancel the installation, click Cancel on this or any other screen where it appears (see

Using the Help,

Back, Next, and Cancel buttons ).

Read the software-license agreement, click I agree, and then click Next to open the Language dialog box.

Figure 5-37

Language dialog box

302 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

NOTE

The customized installer limits all system installations of the product to the language that is selected in the Language dialog box. Maintenance mode on systems where installation has been completed by using the customized installer does not provide options for changing the language. To change the language on a system that used an Installer Customization Wizard installation, the customized installation must be uninstalled, and a new product must be installed in order to restore the option to install other languages.

The language that you selected is installed on users' computers regardless of the language of the text in the dialog boxes (as specified in the Language Selection dialog box earlier). The Language dialog box defaults to the language that was selected in the Language Selection dialog box, but any language that is available on the CD can be selected for the customized installer. The language selection is recorded in the response file.

Click Next to open the Printer Port dialog box, as shown in the following figure.

Click Back on this or any screen where it appears to return to a previous screen.

ENWW

Figure 5-38

Printer Port dialog box

Click Network Path to make the text field available for a queue name entry. If you click Network

Path and click the Browse, the Browse for Printer dialog box opens.

Installation instructions 303

Figure 5-39

Browse for Printer dialog box

Navigate to a printer and click OK to record the path in the Network Path field in the Printer Port dialog box. Click Cancel to close the Browse for Printer dialog box.

In the Printer Port dialog box, click Local (direct connect) port and then click Next to open the Printer

Connection dialog box. The Printer Connection dialog box includes all types of local ports regardless of local support.

Figure 5-40

Printer Connection dialog box

Click the type of connection that you are using and then click Next to open the Drivers dialog box. See

Figure 5-43 Drivers dialog box .

304 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

In the Printer Port dialog box, click New TCP/IP Port and then click Next to open the Specify TCP/IP

Port dialog box. The Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box includes all custom network ports that are available on the local system. To use any custom network port for the customized installer, the port must be created identically on the system where it will be used.

ENWW

Figure 5-41

Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box

Click IP Address to make the field available for typing the TCP/IP address for the printer. Only numerals are allowed in this field. If this option is selected, you must type at least one digit in the IP Address field to prevent an error message from appearing and prompting you for a valid IP address.

Click IP Hostname to make the field available for typing the IP hostname for the printer. Any characters are allowed in this field, but an error message appears if spaces are included in the field. If this option is selected, you must type at least one character in the IP Hostname field to prevent an error message from appearing and prompting you for a valid IP hostname.

Click Hardware Address to make the field available for typing the hardware address of the printer. It accepts any characters but limits the entry to 12 characters. If this option is selected, you must type at least one character in the Hardware Address: field to prevent an error message from appearing and prompting you for a valid hardware address.

After you select any the options, type the appropriate name or address, and then click Next, the

Drivers dialog box opens (see

Figure 5-43 Drivers dialog box ).

For each of the options in the Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box, you can either use the default port name

(as specified in each of the three options) or specify a different name.

If you click Use Default and click Next, the Drivers dialog box opens. See

Figure 5-43 Drivers dialog box

.

To specify a different name, click Specify: and click Next to open the Port Creation Options dialog box.

Installation instructions 305

Figure 5-42

Port Creation Options dialog box

Click No, do no create the port (the printer will not be installed) if you do not want to create a port.

Click Yes, create the port and click Next to open the Drivers dialog box.

If the printer cannot be found, type the printer hardware address in the Hardware Address field and click Next.

NOTE

To print a configuration page where the printer hardware address is listed, see

Determining the current level of firmware .

Figure 5-43

Drivers dialog box

306 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

Any combination of features can be selected for the installer, and none depends on any other selection.

It is possible to create a custom installer that installs features without including a print driver. Select the drivers you want to install (or select none of them if you are not installing a driver).

To view details about the drivers, click Details…. The driver Details dialog box appears.

ENWW

Figure 5-44

Driver Details dialog box

All the drivers that are available on the Drivers dialog box are described in the Details dialog box. Click

OK to return to the Drivers dialog box.

On the Drivers dialog box, click Next to continue the installation. The Additional Software dialog box appears.

Installation instructions 307

Figure 5-45

Additional Software dialog box

To view details about the additional software, click Details. The additional software Details dialog box appears.

Figure 5-46

Additional software Details dialog box

All the software that you selected in the Additional Software dialog box is described in the Details dialog box. Click OK to return to the Additional Software dialog box.

308 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

In the Additional Software dialog box, click Next to open the Custom Installer Location dialog box, which is shown in the following figure.

Figure 5-47

Custom Installer Location dialog box

Use the Location: text field to type a description of the physical location of the printer. The field is large, but is limited as to the number of characters that it can accommodate.

To change the physical location of the printer, click Browse…, navigate to the folder that you want, and click OK to return to the Custom Installer Location dialog box.

Click Next to open the Ready to Create Installer dialog box, which is shown in the following figure.

ENWW

Figure 5-48

Ready to Create Installer dialog box

Installation instructions 309

NOTE

The location for the installer package defaults to c:\<name of printer>

.

NOTE

During installation, several files, including system files, are placed at the root of the directory that appears in the Location field. Be sure that enough space is available on the directory before continuing.

Click Printer Properties to open the Printer Properties dialog box. This dialog box has two tabs:

General

Sharing

Figure 5-49

Printer Properties General tab

On the General tab, you can change the printer name by typing a new name in the Printer Name: field.

Use the Location: and Comment: fields to describe the printer. You can also leave these fields blank.

If you want to use the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer as your default printer, select the Use the printer

as the default printer for Windows-based programs check box.

Click OK to return to the Ready to Create Installer dialog box, or click the Sharing tab to share the printer over a network.

The Sharing tab is shown in the following figure.

310 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

Figure 5-50

Printer Properties Sharing tab

On the Sharing tab, Not Shared is the default setting. To share the printer, click Shared as: and type the printer name in the text field.

NOTE

To allow sharing across all operating systems, the share name should not exceed 7 characters. The share name is restricted to a maximum of 80 characters for a single pagedescription language (PDL), or 72 charaters for multiple PDLs.

If you want to select additional drivers to support automatic driver downloads, click Additional

Drivers. The Additional Drivers dialog box appears.

ENWW

Figure 5-51

Additional Drivers dialog box

If you want to support automatic driver downloads to clients from the computer that you are using to install the printer, select the Windows 98 and Me check box and click OK.

Installation instructions 311

In the Ready to Create Installer dialog box, click Next to begin the process of copying and installing the printing-system software folders and files. The Installing dialog box is shown in the following figure.

Figure 5-52

Installing dialog box

This dialog box remains on the screen until the status bar fills.

Click Cancel to close the Installer Customization Wizard without installing the printing-system software.

At a certain point, the Cancel button disappears and the process cannot be revoked.

When the installation is complete, the Finish dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 5-53

Finish dialog box

Click Finish to close the Finish dialog box and exit the Installer Customization Wizard.

312 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

ENWW

NOTE

Depending on the type of installation and selected options, you might or might not be presented with some additional steps after you click Finish.

Distribution

The installation package is now ready for distribution. It is the same as the package on the CD, except that it is limited to one language, and it contains the features and options that you selected. The installation package is run silently so that it requires no user interaction. This installation method is useful when you want to use the default selections that the installer provides or when you want to run the installation without being prompted.

You can perform the silent installation in two ways:

Customized silent installer

● Command-line silent installer

The response file can be renamed, but it must be in the root directory of the installer package. The name cannot contain spaces; spaces prevent the SETUP.EXE file from passing to the installer package.

The end-user cannot customize the command-line silent installer. It installs the printing-system components that are included in the Full Installation.

The HP Device Installer Customization Wizard which provides the exact text for replacing entries in the

RESPONSE.INI file, is available at the following Web site: www.hp.com/support/clj3000

Point and Print installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, XP, and Server 2003

The following information helps you install a print driver by using the Microsoft Point and Print function when you cannot see the product on the network.

Point and Print is a Microsoft term that describes a two-step driver installation process. The first step is to install a shared driver on a network print server. The second step is to "point" to the print server from a network client so that the client can use the print driver.

This section outlines the procedures for installing print drivers by using Point and Print. If these procedures are not successful, contact Microsoft.

Hewlett-Packard provides drivers that are compatible with the Point and Print feature, but this is a function of the Microsoft operating systems, not of HP print drivers. Windows 2000, Windows XP, and

Windows Server 2003 drivers from HP are supported only on Intel X86 processor types.

To install the print driver on a Windows 2000,Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 operating system, you must have administrator privileges. To completely install the Windows 2000 print driver on the

Windows 2000 server, you must have administrator privileges on the server. The Windows 2000

Printer .INF file must contain the same product name as the Windows 98 or Windows Me printer .INF

file.

Point and Print installation of a postscript driver is supported only with a Microsoft Windows 98 or

Windows Me PS Driver V4.0 or later.

In a homogenous operating system environment (one in which all of the clients and servers are running in the same operating system), the same print driver version that is vended from the server to the clients in a Point and Print environment also runs and controls the print queue configuration on the server.

Installation instructions 313

However, in a mixed operating system environment (one in which servers and clients might run on different operating systems), conflicts can occur when client computers run a version of the print driver that is different from the one on the print server.

In an effort to increase operating system stability, Microsoft determined that, starting with Windows 2000 and continuing with all future operating systems, print drivers would run as user-mode processes. Usermode drivers run in a protected part of the operating system, as do all of the normal end-user processes and software programs. A user-mode print driver that functions incorrectly can terminate (or “crash”) only the process in which it is running—not the whole operating system. Because access to critical system resources is restricted, overall operating system stability is increased.

www.techweb.boi.hp.com

Setting a default printer

This section applies to the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and

Windows Server 2003 operating systems.

1.

In Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows 2000 operating systems, click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers.

In Windows XP and Windows Server 2003, click Start, click Control Panel, and then click Printers

and Faxes (Windows XP Professional) or Printers and other hardware devices (Windows XP

Home).

2.

Right-click the product that you want to set as the default printer.

3.

Click Set As Default. A check mark appears next to the menu option.

314 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems

Introduction

The HP Color LaserJet 3000 comes with software and installers for Microsoft Windows and Apple

Computer, Inc., Macintosh systems. Linux and UNIX systems are supported, and software is available on the Web. For detailed information about operating systems that support printing-system software installation for the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer, see

Supported operating systems

This chapter provides procedures for installing and removing the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printingsystem software for Macintosh operating systems. The chapter provides information about these topics:

Macintosh component descriptions

Installing the Macintosh printing system

Uninstalling the Macintosh printing system

In-box disk layout

Mac OS X Classic installation

Mac OS X installation

ENWW Introduction 315

Macintosh component descriptions

The product includes the following software for Macintosh computers:

PPDs for Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic) and Mac OS X V10.1.5 and later

PDEs for Mac OS X only (V10.1.5 and later)

HP LaserJet PPDs

In Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic), postscript printer definition (PPD) files for the

HP Color LaserJet 3000 are installed to the Printer Descriptions folder, which is in the Extensions folder within the System folder.

In Mac OS X V10.1.5 or later, the PPDs are installed in Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/

Resources:<lang>.lproj, where <lang> is the appropriate localized folder.

The PPDs, in combination with the driver, provide access to the product features and allow the computer to communicate with the product. A print setup tool for the PPDs is provided on the printing-system software CD. For information about the print setup tools in various Macintosh operating systems, see

Table 6-1 Adding a printer in Macintosh operating systems

.

PDEs

Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs) are code plug-ins (for Mac OS X V10.1.5 or later only) that provide access to product features, such as number of copies, duplexing, and quality settings.

HP Embedded Web Server

Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic) supports the HP Embedded Web Server (HP EWS). Use the

HP LaserJet Utility to control features that are not available in the driver. Use the HP EWS to perform the following tasks:

Name the product, assign it to a zone on the network, and change product settings.

Set a password for the product.

From the computer, lock out functions on the control panel to prevent unauthorized access (see the printing-software help).

Install notes

This text file contains important information about product features, instructions for installing the printingsystem software, and technical assistance.

Online help

This HTML-based help system replaces the Apple Guide help system that was provided with

Mac OS 9.x HP products. The help system is in English only, and can be viewed through a browser or in the Macintosh OS Help Center.

316 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW

Screen fonts

The printing-system software for Macintosh operating systems no longer includes a font installer. The

HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer uses previously installed system fonts when it is installed on a Macintosh computer.

ENWW Macintosh component descriptions 317

Installing the Macintosh printing system

On a Macintosh computer, the installation procedures are basically the same for a network administrator, a network client, and a single user. Install the software on any computer that has access rights to the printer.

NOTE

If the computer is connected to the printer by a LocalTalk (printer port) or EtherTalk connection, you must configure the AppleTalk (or network) control panel for the correct connection to communicate with the product. You must set up the HP Color LaserJet 3000, connect it to the computer or network, and turn it on before the software is installed. Macintosh operating systems do not support parallel connections.

The Macintosh partition contains an installer program for each language. Find the appropriate language for the operating system that is being used, and then use the installer program for that language.

NOTE

Detailed installation steps can be found in Mac OS X Classic installation or

Mac OS X installation

.

Installing the HP LaserJet printing-system software for the

Macintosh OS

1.

Insert the Macintosh printing-system software CD into the CD-ROM drive.

NOTE

If the CD screen does not open automatically, double-click the hp color LaserJet

3000 CD-ROM icon on the desktop to open the CD-ROM window.

2.

Double-click the icon for your OS. For instance, if you are installing the printer in any version of

Mac OS X, double-click the Mac OS X icon. If you are installing the printer in Mac Classic or any version of Mac OS 9, click the Mac OS 9 icon.

NOTE

The Continue button appears only after you type the "admin" password in the

Authenticate dialog box (Mac OS X, V10.1.5 and later only).

3.

The main Installer dialog box appears. Click Install and then follow the onscreen instructions to complete the software installation.

NOTE

If you are installing the printing-system software on a Macintosh OS X system, be patient. The installer must perform an initial search of the computer for up to 1 minute. During this time the installer might appear to be stalled.

4.

When software installation is complete, click Quit. Select one of the following options to finish setting up the product:

● Set up an AppleTalk networked printer with Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic).

Set up a printer with Mac OS X.

The software program that you use to finish setting up the printer varies by operating system. The following table shows the print setup tools that are available.

318 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW

Table 6-1

Adding a printer in Macintosh operating systems

Operating System

Mac OS 9 V9.2.2

(Mac OS X Classic)

Mac OS X V10.1.5

Mac OS X V10.2.8

Mac OS X V10.3.9

Mac OS X V10.4.1

HP LaserJet Utility

x

LaserWriter 8

x x x x

Print Center

x x

Printer Setup Utility

Setting up an AppleTalk networked printer with Mac OS 9. V9.2.2

(Mac OS X Classic)

1.

Open the Chooser from within the Apple Menu.

2.

Click the appropriate print setup tool (see

Table 6-1 Adding a printer in Macintosh operating systems ) on the left side of the Chooser dialog box.

3.

Click the appropriate Zone to select it, if required.

4.

Click your product name from the list that appears on the right side of the Chooser dialog box, and then click Create. For the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer, the selection is HP Color LaserJet

470014.

ENWW Installing the Macintosh printing system 319

Setting up a printer with Mac OS X V10.4

1.

In the Applications folder, open the Utilities Folder, and then run the Printer Browser or the Printer

Setup Utility, depending on the version of the Macintosh operating system.

Figure 6-1

Printer Browser screen

320 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW

2.

Select the product and click Add. The Installable Options screen appears.

ENWW

Figure 6-2

Installable Options screen

3.

If the product has the optional 500-sheet tray 3, select Installed in the Tray 3 drop-down menu.

4.

In the Memory Configuration: drop-down menu, select the amount of memory that is installed in the product:

64 MB RAM

96 MB RAM

128 MB RAM

160 MB RAM

192 MB RAM

Installing the Macintosh printing system 321

256 MB RAM

288 MB RAM

320 MB RAM

384 MB RAM

512 MB RAM

5.

If the product has a duplex unit (a standard feature on the HP Color LaserJet 3000dn and the

HP Color LaserJet 3000dtn models), select the Duplex Unit check box.

6.

In the Printer Disk: drop-down menu, select the appropriate option:

None

RAM Disk

Hard Disk (A hard disk is an optional feature for all HP Color LaserJet 3000 models.)

7.

In the Paper Matching: drop-down menu, select one of the following options:

Prompt User for correct size

Nearest Size & Scale

Nearest Size & Crop

8.

After you have selected the settings in the Installable Options screen, click Continue. The Printer

Browser screen shows the following tabs:

Default Browser

IP Printer

322 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW

ENWW

Figure 6-3

Printer Browser screen – Default Browser tab

9.

In the Name: field, type a name for the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer.

10.

In the Location: field, type the product location.

11.

In the Print Using: field, select one of the following options:

Auto Select (This is the default setting.)

Generic PostScript Printer

Other (Select the appropriate brand name.)

12.

Click Add to save the settings.

Installing the Macintosh printing system 323

13.

If you want to search for additional printers, click More Printers. The Printer Browser search dialog box opens.

Figure 6-4

More Printers screen

14.

Use the drop-down menus to change the search settings. Select the printer that you want to install and click Add.

To cancel the search, click Cancel.

324 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW

15.

To connect the printer through its TCP/IP address, click the IP Printer tab.

ENWW

Figure 6-5

IP Printer tab

16.

In the Search field in the upper-right corner, select one of the following options:

All (this is the default setting)

AppleTalk

Bonjour

FireWire®

Open Directory

Shared

USB

17.

In the Protocol: drop-down menu, select one of the following options:

Internet Printing Protocol – IPP

Line Printer Daemon – LPD

HP Jet Direct – Socket

Installing the Macintosh printing system 325

18.

If you know the host name or TCP/IP address of the product, type it in the Address: field. (It might also be available on the drop-down menu.)

19.

If you know the queue path of the printer, type it in the Queue: field.

20.

In the Name: field, type a name for the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer.

21.

In the Location: field, type the product location.

22.

In the Print Using: field, select one of the following options:

Auto Select (This is the default setting.)

Generic PostScript Printer

Other (Select the appropriate brand name.)

23.

Click Add to save the settings. The product name appears in the Printer List.

Figure 6-6

Printer List screen

326 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW

24.

Click the product name to open the Select Printer screen and verify that the product has been installed.

ENWW

Figure 6-7

Select Printer screen

Setting up a printer with Mac OS X V10.3

1.

In the Applications folder, open the Utilities folder, and then run the Printer Setup Utility.

2.

Click Add Printer (in Mac OS X V10.1), or click Add (Mac OS X V10.2), or click Printers and then click Add Printer (Mac OS X V10.2.8 or later).

3.

When the New Printer drivers detected pop-up box appears, click OK.

4.

From the top pop-up menu, select the appropriate connection type for the product.

5.

Select or type in any other information as indicated for the type of connection for the product. For example, if you are using an AppleTalk connection, select the product zone; or if you are using IP

Printing, type a TCP/IP address in the Printer Address field. In the Printer Model drop-down menu, select HP. In the Model Name drop-down menu, select HP Color LaserJet 3000.

NOTE

If the automatic selection fails, or if you want to manually select a .PPD file, click the Printer Model pop-up menu, select HP, and then select the .PPD file that you want to add.

6.

Click Add. The HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer appears in the Printer List.

7.

To configure installable options in Mac OS X V10.2 and later, such as a duplexing unit or optional paper trays, click Show Info? and select Installable Options in the drop-down menu.

Installing the Macintosh printing system 327

NOTE

This step is necessary only for network connections and USB connections that use

Rendezvous/Bonjour. AppleTalk automatically configures the installable options.

8.

Configure the options, click Apply Changes, and then close the Printer List dialog box.

Setting up an IP/LPR networked Printer with Mac OS 9.x

1.

Run the Apple Desktop Printer utility.

2.

Click Printer (LPR), and then click OK.

3.

Click Change in the LPR Printer Selection area.

4.

Click the appropriate TCP/IP address and queue, and then click OK.

5.

Click Change and scroll through the list of products.

6.

Click the correct product, and then click Select.

7.

Click Create.

328 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW

Uninstalling the Macintosh printing system

To uninstall the Macintosh Printing System, drag the PPDs and the unwanted component(s) to Trash.

ENWW Uninstalling the Macintosh printing system 329

In-box disk layout

The Macintosh printing-system software consists of the following folders: the HP LaserJet Installer-

Integrated installer program for Mac OS X and for Mac OS 9, and a PDF folder for manuals. The folders are named as follows:

Mac OS X

( the HP LaserJet Installer)

Mac OS 9 (the integrated installer program for Mac OS X V10.1.5 or later and for Mac OS 9 V9.2.2)

PDF (manuals)

330 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW

Mac OS X Classic installation

This section provides information about the various installation dialog box sequences for the Mac OS X

Classic.

Main Install dialog-box sequence

This section provides information about the installation dialog-box sequence for the Easy Install (the typical installation option) in Macintosh operating environments.

A Custom Installation is not available in Mac OS 9 for the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer.

1.

Insert the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printing-system software CD in the CD-ROM drive.

If the CD screen does not open automatically, double-click the hp LaserJet 3000 CD-ROM icon on the desktop to open the installer folder.

The hp LaserJet for Macintosh dialog box opens.

2.

Click Continue to open the HP LaserJet Installer dialog box.

If you want to install the files in a location other than the default "Macintosh HD," click Install

Location: to specify a location.

3.

Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk.

Click Quit to quit the Installer without making changes to the system.

The Installing dialog box shows installation progress. No action is required unless you want to stop the installation. Click Stop to interrupt the installation file-copy process.

The Installation was successful dialog box appears.

4.

If you want to perform additional installations, click Continue in the Installation was successful dialog box to return to the HP LaserJet Installer.

If you want to set up the printer, click Quit on the Installation was successful dialog box.

The Mac OS 9 readme opens. Follow the instructions to continue setting up the printer.

ENWW Mac OS X Classic installation 331

Mac OS X installation

This section provides information about the various installation dialog-box sequences for the Mac OS X operating system.

Main Install dialog box sequence

This section provides information about the Macintosh installation dialog-box sequence for the Easy

Install (the typical installation option).

Insert the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printing-system software CD in the CD-ROM drive.

If the CD screen does not open automatically when the CD is put into the CD-ROM drive, double-click the hp LaserJet 3000 CD-ROM icon on the desktop to open the installer folder.

Figure 6-8

hp LaserJet 3000 CD-ROM icon

The hp LaserJet Software dialog box opens.

Figure 6-9

hp LaserJet Software screen

In the hp LaserJet Software pane, double-click the Mac OS X folder to open it.

In the Mac OS X folder, double-click the HP Color LaserJet v.5.5.0.040 icon. This begins the install process.

Figure 6-10

HP Color LaserJet v.5.5.0.040 icon

332 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW

If you are installing the product on Mac OS X V10.1 or later, the Authenticate dialog box appears.

Figure 6-11

Authenticate dialog box

Type the correct “admin” password and click OK to continue. The installer startup screen appears.

Click Cancel to exit the installation.

ENWW

Figure 6-12

HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer startup-screen dialog box

Click Continue. The License dialog box appears.

Mac OS X installation 333

Figure 6-13

License dialog box

Click Print… to open the Page Setup dialog box for your default printer and print a copy of the license agreement.

Click Save As… to open the system Save dialog box and save the license agreement to disk.

Click Decline to end the installation process and close the installer.

Read the software-license agreement and then click Accept to continue the installation. The Easy

Install dialog box appears.

Figure 6-14

Easy Install dialog box

334 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW

The default option in the drop-down menu at the top of the screen is Easy Install. You can also select

Custom Install in the same menu.

Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk

Click Quit to quit the Installer without making changes to the system.

Figure 6-15

HP LaserJet Installer dialog box (custom install)

Click Select All to install all of the options that are available on the printing-system software CD, or use the check boxes on the list to install the components that you want to install.

Click the I icon to the right of each item in the list to open a pop-up screen that describes the component.

Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk. The files are installed in the Library folder on the Macintosh CD.

Click Quit to quit the Installer without making any changes to the system.

ENWW

Figure 6-16

Installing dialog box

The Installing dialog box shows installation progress. No action is required unless you want to stop the installation.

Click Stop to interrupt the install file copy process.

When installation is complete, the LASERJET README.RTF file opens and the LaserJet

ReadMe.rtf icon appears on the desktop. Follow these instructions to set up a printer queue for your

HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer.

Mac OS X installation 335

Figure 6-17

LaserJet ReadMe icon

A pop-up message stating that the installation was successful also appears.

Figure 6-18

Installation success message

Click Quit to exit the installer.

Click Continue to return to the HP LaserJet Installer.

336 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW

7 Engineering Details

Introduction

This chapter presents engineering detail for the following topics:

File to E-mail utility

HP Easy Printer Care

Media attributes

Remote firmware update

Printing print-ready documents

Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems

ENWW Introduction 337

File to E-mail utility

The File to E-mail utility is a standalone Microsoft Foundation Class (MFC) program that reads an .INI

file to detect where the HP LaserJet product software is installed. The program then attaches relevant log or history files to an e-mail that can be sent to HP Customer Support to assist troubleshooting. The utility runs on the computer, but does not interact with your HP LaserJet product.

The tool is included on the installer CD, but is not copied to the computer during the software installation.

HP Customer Support can also send the utility to you through e-mail or by posting it to an HP web page.

The tool is compatible with Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, and Windows XP.

The File to E-mail utility runs with any MAPI-compliant e-mail programs. It does not run with Web-based e-mail services such as Yahoo, Hotmail, or AOL.

Depending on the speed of the computer, it might take several seconds for the utility to gather the log files and attach them to an e-mail message.

The File to E-mail utility consists of two files that are located on the HP Color LaserJet 3000 software

CD:

● <CD-ROM drive>util\CCC\FiletoEmail\FileToEmail.exe

<CD-ROM drive>util\CCC\FiletoEmail\FileToEmail.ini

To use the File to E-mail utility, copy these files to the desktop, navigate to them in Explorer, and then double-click FileToEmail.exe to open the utility. The utility generates files, opens an e-mail message, and attaches the files so that you can send them to an IT administrator, as shown in the following figure.

NOTE

The figure is provided as an example only. The actual files attached will vary, depending on your product.

338 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

ENWW

Figure 7-1

File to E-mail – sample e-mail message with files attached

If the File to E-mail utility fails for any reason (for instance, if you cancel the new message), all the files are copied to a folder on the desktop that is named CCC, possibly with strings of 0's attached to the end. You can zip these files and e-mail them separately.

File to E-mail utility 339

HP Easy Printer Care

This section contains information about the following topics:

Availability

Uninstall options

HP Software Update

Availability

Uninstall options

After a printing-system installation, click the uninstall icon in the HP Color LaserJet 3000 program group to select and remove any or all of the HP printing-system components. Follow these instructions to remove the HP Easy Printer Care and HP Device Communications Services in a Windows XP operating environment.

NOTE

To uninstall the HP Easy Printer Care software only, use the Windows Add/Remove

Programs feature.

1.

Click Start.

2.

Select Hewlett-Packard.

3.

Select HP Easy Printer Care.

4.

Click Uninstall and follow the onscreen instructions.

Whether you uninstall HP Easy Printer Care from the Program menu or by using the Windows Add/

Remove feature, the installer informs you if HP Easy Printer Care is still managing any products. At this point, the following options are available:

Cancel

Uninstall

Continue

If you select Continue, then HP Easy Printer Care is uninstalled. The installer then checks to see if the

Printer Usage Reports plug-in (PUR) is present and removes it. The uninstall process then removes

HP Device Communications Services, if HP Device Communications Services is not supporting programs or products other than HP Easy Printer Care. If HP Device Communications Services is supporting other applications, then its Add/Remove Program entries appear in the Add/Remove

Program list. HP Software Update is not uninstalled.

HP Software Update

HP Software Update, a utility which can check the HP Web site for updates to your HP software, is installed together with HP Easy Printer Care if the system has an older version or does not carry it.

To uninstall HP Software Update, use the Windows Add/Remove Programs feature.

340 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

Media attributes

This section includes the following information about media attributes:

Media sources and destinations

Media-source commands

Driver-supported media sizes

Driver-supported media types

Custom paper sizes

Media-type commands

Media sources and destinations

The following table indicates the standard and optional media sources and destinations for the

HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer.

Table 7-1

HP Color LaserJet 3000 media sources and destinations

Media sources

Media destinations

100-sheet multipurpose tray (tray 1)

250-sheet paper tray (tray 2)

500-sheet paper tray (tray 3)

Standard 250-sheet top bin

Standard

Standard

Optional; standard on the HP Color

LaserJet 3000dtn printer model

Standard

Media-source commands

The PCL 6 attribute for paper source is ubyte # MediaSource

or ubyte_array "string"

MediaSource

. See the following table for values of #. For example, " ubyte 4 MediaSource

" is the command for tray 2.

The PCL 5 escape sequence for media source is

Esc&l#H

(the "l" is a lowercase "L" rather than the numeral "1"). See the following table for values of #. For example,

Esc&l1H

is the command fortray 2.

Table 7-2

Media-source commands

Media source

Manual feed in tray 1

Tray 1 (100-sheet)

Tray 2 (250-sheet)

2

3

4

PCL 6 PCL 5 ubyte # MediaSource or ubyte_array

"string"

MediaSource

1

Esc&l#H

2

4

1

PostScript

/MediaPosition # /

ManualFeed true | false

or null

3 true

3 false

0 false

ENWW Media attributes 341

Table 7-2

Media-source commands (continued)

Media source PCL 6 PCL 5 PostScript ubyte # MediaSource or ubyte_array

"string"

MediaSource

1

Esc&l#H /MediaPosition # /

ManualFeed true | false

or null

Tray 3 (500-sheet)

Automatically Select (HP unidrivers)

5

NA

5

NA

1 false

NA

1

Automatically Select (HP traditional PCL drivers) or

Printer Auto Select (HP unidrivers)

7 1 null false

For the string value, you must use include the quotation marks around the variable. For example, ubyte_array "TRAY2"

MediaSource

is the PCL 6 command for tray 2.

Driver-supported media sizes

The following table lists the features and attributes of various media listed under the Size Is: drop-down menu on the Paper tab. The list order can vary, depending on the product and operating system. The list contains all of the following sizes, and might contain sizes from other drivers.

Table 7-3

Supported media sizes and attributes

Paper sizes

1

Letter

PCL 6

2

"LETTER"

Statement

16K

8.5 x 13

A4

A5

B5 (JIS)

Double Postscard (JIS)

Double Japan Postscard

Rotated

Width

216 mm

(8.5 inches)

215.9 mm

(8.5 inches)

197 mm

(7.75 inches)

216 mm

(8.5 inches)

210 mm

(8.27 inches)

148 mm

(5.83 inches)

182 mm

(7.17 inches)

100 mm

(3.94 inches)

148 mm

Height

279 mm

(11.0 inches)

139.7 mm

(5.5 inches)

273 mm

(10.75 inches)

330 mm

(13 inches)

297 mm

(11.69 inches)

210 mm

(8.27 inches)

257 mm

(10.12 inches)

200 mm

(7.87 inches)

200 mm

(7.87 inches)

"STATEMENT"

"ROC16K"

"8.5x13"

"A4"

"A5"

"JIS B5"

"JPOSTD"

“Double Postcard (JIS)”

342 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

ENWW

Table 7-3

Supported media sizes and attributes (continued)

Paper sizes 1

Width Height

PCL 6 2

Envelope #10

Envelope B5

Envelope C5

Envelope DL

Envelope Monarch

(5.83 inches)

105 mm

(4.13 inches)

176 mm

(6.93 inches)

162 mm

(6.38 inches)

110 mm

(4.33 inches)

99 mm

241 mm

(9.5 inches)

250 mm

(9.84 inches)

229 mm

(9.02 inches)

220 mm

(8.66 inches)

190 mm

"COM10"

"B5 ENV"

"C5"

"DL"

"MONARCH"

Executive

Executive (JIS)

Legal

Custom

(3.88 inches)

185 mm

(7.25 inches)

216 mm

(8.5 inches)

216 mm

(8.5 inches)

Minimum:

127 mm

(5.0 inches)

(7.5 inches)

266 mm

(10.5 inches)

330 mm

(12.99 inches)

355 mm

(14.0 inches)

Minimum:

76.2 mm

(3.0 inches)

"EXEC"

"JISEXEC"

"LEGAL"

4

Maximum:

215.9 mm

Maximum:

355.6 mm

1

2

4

(8.5 inches) (14.0 inches)

For all paper sizes, the PCL 6 margins are 100 dots, at 600 dots per inch.

The PCL 6 command for paper size is ubyte_array “String” MediaSize. The values in this column are the values for "String."

For custom sizes, the PCL 6 Driver specifies actual dimensions, for example, for 8 by 9 inch custom size, "real32_xy 8.0 9.0

CustomMediaSize ubyte eInch CustomMediaSizeUnits."

Driver-supported media types

The following table shows the media types that the HP Color LaserJet 3000 print-drivers support.

Table 7-4

Supported input media types

Media types

(command string)

Unspecified

Tray 1/top bin/stacker bin

Tray 2 (250-sheet) Trays 3 (500sheet)

Y Y Y

Duplexing unit

Y

Manual duplexing

Y

Media attributes 343

Table 7-4

Supported input media types (continued)

Media types

(command string)

Tray 1/top bin/stacker bin

Tray 2 (250-sheet) Trays 3 (500sheet)

Duplexing unit Manual duplexing

Plain

Preprinted

Letterhead

Transparency

Prepunched

Labels

Bond

Recycled

Color

Light (60–75 g/m 2 , or

16.4–20.5 lb)

Intermediate (90–

104 g/m 2 , or 24.7–

28.5 lb)

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y Y

Heavy (105–120 g/m

2

, or 28.8–32.9 lb)

Extra Heavy (120–163 g/m 2 , or 32.9–44.7 lb)

Y

Y

Cardstock (164–220 g/ m 2 , or 45–60.3 lb)

Y

Rough (90–105 g/m 2 , or 24.7–28.8 lb)

Glossy

1

(75–120 g/m 2 , or 20.5–32.9 lb)

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Tough Paper

1 (Glossy

Film)

Y Y Y N Y

1

Envelope Y N N N N

Use only HP LaserJet glossy media. Using HP Inkjet glossy media can cause permanent damage to the printer.

N

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Custom paper sizes

The following table shows custom paper sizes that are available for the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer.

Table 7-5

PCL 6 custom media sizes

Tray

Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose)

Tray 2 (250-sheet)

Dimensions

Width

Height

Width

Minimum

76.2 mm (3.0 inches)

127.0 mm (5.0 inches)

148.0 mm (5.83 inches)

Maximum

215 mm (8.5 inches)

355.6 mm (14.0 inches)

215.9 mm (8.5 inches)

344 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

ENWW

Table 7-5

PCL 6 custom media sizes (continued)

Tray Dimensions

Height

Tray 3 (500-sheet)

Duplexing unit

Width

Height

Width

Height

Minimum

210.0 mm (8.26 inches)

148.0 mm (5.83 inches)

210.0 mm (8.26 inches)

148.0 mm (5.83 inches)

210.0 mm (8.26 inches)

Maximum

355.6 mm (14.0 inches)

215.9 mm (8.5 inches)

355.6 mm (14.0 inches)

215.9 mm (8.5 inches)

355.6 mm (14.0 inches)

Media-type commands

The PCL 5 escape sequence for paper type is "Esc&n#Wdpapertype", where "n#" is the number of characters in the paper type plus 1. For example, in the sequence "Esc&n6WdPlain", "Plain" has 5 letters plus 1, for a total of 6.

Table 7-6

Media-type commands

Esc& n# Wd Paper type

Esc&

Esc&

Esc&

Esc&

Esc&

Esc&

Esc&

Esc&

Esc&

Esc&

Esc&

Esc&

Esc&

Esc&

Esc&

6

11

11

13

11

7

5

9

6

6

13

6

12

11

6

Wd

Wd

Wd

Wd

Wd

Wd

Wd

Wd

Wd

Wd

Wd

Wd

Wd

Wd

Wd

Plain

Preprinted

Letterhead

Transparency

1

Prepunched

Labels

Bond

Recycled

Color

Light

Intermediate

Heavy

Extra Heavy

Cardstock

Rough

2

Esc&

Esc&

7

12

Wd

Wd

Glossy

Tough Paper

1

2

Esc& 9 Wd Envelope

You must spell out the word "Transparency" in the string, although it is abbreviated as TRNSPRNCY on the control panel.

The correct command for cardstock is "Esc&n11WdCard Stock", with a space between the "d" and the "S", and with an uppercase "S".

Media attributes 345

Remote firmware update

The HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer features remote firmware update (RFU) capability. The method for downloading remote firmware updates from the Web site is similar to that used to download the latest printing-system software and print drivers.

The process for remotely upgrading firmware involves three steps:

1.

Determine the current level of firmware that is installed on the product.

2.

Go to the HP Web site and download the latest firmware to the computer.

3.

Download the new firmware to the product.

Determining the current level of firmware

To determine the current level of firmware, view the configuration page. To print a configuration page, follow these instructions.

1.

Press (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus.

2.

Press and to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press .

3.

Press and to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION.

4.

Press to print the configuration page.

5.

Look in the "Printer Information" section on the configuration page for the firmware date code. The firmware date code looks something like this: 20051002 07.000.0.

Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site

The remote firmware update (.RFU) file and an associated readme file are packaged together as a selfextracting .EXE file. For detailed instructions about how to download the .EXE file, go to the following

URL: www.hp.com/go/clj3000_firmware

The .EXE file consists of a readme file and the .RFU file.

NOTE

For UNIX systems, the remote firmware update file is a .TAR file.

Downloading the new firmware to the product

For support information about downloading new firmware from the Web, go to www.hp.com/support/ clj3000 .

The product can receive an RFU update to a product when the product is in a READY state. The product waits for all of the I/O channels to become idle before performing the update.

NOTE

If the firmware update involves a change in the format of nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM), any menu settings that are changed from the default settings will return to default settings. The settings must be changed again if you want them to be different from the defaults. Examples of settings that are affected in this way are tray types, default symbol sets, and Web-access alerts.

346 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

ENWW

The elapsed time for an update depends on the I/O transfer time, as well as the time that it takes for the product to reinitialize. The I/O transfer time depends on a number of things, including the speed of the host computer that is sending the update and the I/O method (parallel or network). The reinitialization time depends on the specific hardware configuration of the product, such as the number of EIO devices installed, the presence of external paper-handling devices, and the amount of memory that is installed.

Finally, any print jobs that are ahead of the RFU job in the queue are printed before the update is processed.

Use one of the methods described in this manual to update the printer firmware.

Printer messages during the firmware update

The following table lists the causes and results of possible interruptions to the firmware update.

Table 7-7

Troubleshooting a firmware update

Cause Result

The job was cancelled from the control panel.

No update has occurred.

A break in the I/O stream occurred during send (for example, the parallel cable was removed).

No update has occurred.

No update has occurred.

A power cycle occurred during the RECEIVING UPGRADE process.

A power cycle occurred during the PERFORMING

UPGRADE process.

A power cycle occurred during the INITIALIZING process.

No update has occurred. Resend the update through a parallel port.

The update has been completed.

Print jobs that are sent to the product while an update is in process do not interrupt the update.

All HP LaserJet products leave the factory with the most recent firmware version installed. If a remote firmware update fails in a Windows OS, the .RFU file must be resent. For more information, see

Table

7-9 Update messages .

If a remote firmware update fails in a Macintosh OS, contact support from an HP Customer Care Center.

The following table lists possible reasons for the failure of a remote firmware update and the corrective action required for each situation.

Table 7-8

Troubleshooting a firmware update failure

Reason for firmware update failure

The .RFU file is corrupted.

The wrong product is contained in the .RFU file.

Corrective action

The product recognizes that the file is corrupted and rejects the update. Download the file again and send the new file to the product. Download the file from www.hp.com/go/clj3000_firmware .

The product recognizes the printer mismatch and rejects the update. Download the correct file and send it to the product. Download the file from www.hp.com/go/ clj3000_firmware .

Remote firmware update 347

Table 7-8

Troubleshooting a firmware update failure (continued)

Reason for firmware update failure Corrective action

The upgrade was interrupted.

A flash hardware failure occurred.

See

Table 7-9 Update messages

.

Although it is extremely unlikely, the product might have a hardware failure. Call technical support to address the problem (see the flyer that came with the product for a local telephone support list).

Three messages appear during a normal update process; a fourth (RESEND UPGRADE) appears only if the update process does not succeed.

Table 7-9

Update messages

Printer message

RECEIVING UPGRADE

PERFORMING UPGRADE

INITIALIZING

RESEND UPGRADE

RFU LOAD ERROR

SEND RFU UPGRADE

ON PARALLEL PORT

Explanation

This message appears from the time the product recognizes the beginning of an .RFU update until the time the product has verified the validity and integrity of the .RFU update.

NOTE

If the remote firmware update process is interrupted before the firmware is downloaded (while RECEIVING UPGRADE appears on the control-panel display), the firmware file must be sent again. No message appears on the product control panel to indicate that the update was interrupted.

This message appears while the product is actually reprogramming the firmware.

NOTE

If power is lost during the flash DIMM update (while

PERFORMING UPGRADE appears on the control-panel display), the update is interrupted and the message RESEND UPGRADE appears on the control-panel display.

This message appears from the time the product has finished reprogramming the

DIMM until the product reinitializes.

This message appears (in English only) if the firmware update fails because the

RFU process is interrupted. It can also occur if firmware for accessories (such as the duplex unit or an output device becomes is corrupted. Perform another update by any means that is supported by the printer, regardless of the connection

(network, parallel, or USB).

This message appears (in English only) if the firmware update fails because the print-engine firmware is corrupted.

If this message appears, the update must now be sent only by a computer that is attached to the parallel port of the product.

NOTE

To verify that the firmware update succeeded, print a new configuration page from the control panel and verify that the firmware date code on the configuration page has changed.

Downloading custom color profiles

Obtain custom color profiles just as you would any other remote-firmware update, using the procedures described in these sections.

Custom color-profile .RFU files are named as follows:

348 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

ENWW clj####_<what>_<version>.RFU

where:

#### is the printer-model number of the color table

<what> is a one-word description of what the table does

<version> is a two-part version number consisting of a major and a minor value

The custom color-profile .RFU tiles that are available include:

A simulation of the color settings for the HP LaserJet 4650 printer:

*clj4650_*.RFU

A simulation of the color settings for the HP LaserJet 9500 printer:

*clj9500_*.RFU

A remote-firmware-update file that resets your printer to its original state:

*reset_*.RFU

While every care is taken to ensure a close match with the colors available on the product, several factors can affect the outcome of the match:

Differences between printers within and between a given model line

Media type

● The age and state of the custom-profile printer and the product to which the profile is to be downloaded

The use or non-use of genuine HP supplies

● Environmental conditions

Remote firmware update by using FTP through a browser

Complete the following steps to update the printer firmware by using file transfer protocol (FTP) through a browser.

NOTE

The following instructions can be used on Windows or Macintosh operating systems.

1.

Make note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO-Jetdirect page. The EIO-Jetdirect page is the second

page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining the current level of firmware

2.

Open a browser window.

3.

In the address line of the browser, type ftp://<IPADDRESS>

, where <IPADDRESS> is the TCP/

IP address of your product. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type

FTP://

192.168.0.90

4.

Locate the downloaded .RFU file for the product.

5.

Drag and drop the .RFU file onto the PORT1 icon or onto any open space in the browser window.

Remote firmware update 349

NOTE

If the PORT1 icon does not appear as a folder name, you might have to enable folder viewing for FTP sites in your Web browser. In Microsoft Internet Explorer, use the following procedure to enable the folder view.

a.

Select Tools, then select Internet Options, and then select the Advanced tab.

b.

Select the Enable folder view for FTP sites.

c.

Click OK to save the setting.

6.

The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The messages described in the section

Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the

control panel.

NOTE

The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message.

7.

Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.

Remote firmware update by using FTP on a direct network connection

If the HP Color LaserJet 3000 uses a direct network connection, use file transfer protocol (FTP) to update the firmware. Complete the following steps for your operating system.

Windows operating systems

1.

Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see

Determining the current level of firmware

NOTE

Before connecting to the product, make sure that the product is not in Powersave mode. Also make sure that any error messages are cleared from the control-panel display.

2.

Open a command window on the computer.

3.

Type ftp <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS>

. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type

ftp 192.168.0.90

.

4.

Press Enter on the keyboard.

5.

When prompted for the user name, press Enter .

6.

When prompted for the password, press Enter .

7.

Type bin

at the command prompt.

8.

Press Enter . The message 200 Type set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files appears in the command window.

350 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

ENWW

9.

Type put <FILENAME>

, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file that was downloaded from the Web, including the path. For example, type put C:\LJ\3000FW.RFU

, and then press

Enter .

NOTE

If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type the following path: put "c:\My Documents\LJ\3000fw.rfu"

The following series of messages appears in the command window:

200 PORT command successful

150 Opening BINARY mode data connection

226 Ready

226 Processing Job

226 Transfer complete

After these messages appear, a message containing transfer-speed information appears.

10.

The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The

messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the

control panel.

NOTE

The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message.

11.

Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.

12.

At the command prompt, type bye

to exit the FTP command.

13.

At the command prompt, type exit

to return to the Windows interface.

Macintosh operating systems

1.

Make a note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO-Jetdirect page. The EIO-Jetdirect page is the second

page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining the current level of firmware .

2.

Open a Terminal window on the computer. You can find the Terminal program on the computer hard drive in the Applications/Utilities folder.

3.

Type

FTP <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS>

For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type

FTP 192.168.0.90

4.

Press Enter on the keyboard.

5.

When prompted for a user name and password, press Enter .

Remote firmware update 351

6.

Type put <path>

, where <path> is the location where the .RFU file was downloaded from the

Web, including the path. For example, type put /username/desktop/3000fw.rfu

, and then press Enter .

NOTE

If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type put "/user name/desktop/3000FW.RFU".

To ensure that the entire path to the .RFU file is placed in the put

command, type put

and a space, and then drag and drop the .RFU file onto the terminal window. The complete path to the file is automatically placed after the put

command.

7.

The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The messages described in the section

Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the

control panel.

NOTE

The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message.

8.

Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.

Remote firmware update through a local Windows port

If the product is connected through a local port (parallel), then you can send the .RFU file directly to the product by using a

COPY

command from a command prompt or an MS-DOS window. At the command prompt, perform the following steps for your operating system.

Windows 98 or Windows Me

1.

From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type the following:

Mode lpt1:,,p

NOTE

If the product is attached to a parallel port other than LPT1, then substitute the correct LPT port number in the mode command.

2.

Press Enter on the keyboard. The response you receive should be similar to these examples:

> LPT1 Not Rerouted

> Resident portion of MODE loaded

> Infinite retry on parallel printer time-out

3.

At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>

, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate product port (such as LPT1). For example, type the following:

C:\>copy /b c:\3000fw.rfu lpt1

352 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

ENWW

NOTE

If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type

C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\3000fw.rfu" lpt1

4.

Press Enter on the keyboard.

5.

The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The

messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the

control panel.

NOTE

The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message.

6.

Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.

7.

Type exit

at the command prompt to close the command window.

Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003

The .RFU file can be sent directly to the product by typing a copy command at a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window.

Windows NT 4.0 does not support the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer drivers, but it is possible to update the printer firmware in Windows NT 4.0.

1.

At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>

, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate printer port (such as LPT1). For example, type the following:

C:\>copy /b c:\3000fw.rfu lpt1

NOTE

If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type

C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\3000fw.rfu" lpt1

2.

Press Enter on the keyboard.

3.

The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The

messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the

control panel.

NOTE

The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message.

4.

Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.

5.

At the command prompt, type exit

to close the command window.

Remote firmware update 353

Remote firmware update through a USB port

If the product is connected over a USB connection, follow these instructions:

1.

From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type copy /b <FILENAME>\

\<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME>

, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file (including the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer from which the product is being shared, and <SHARENAME> is the product share name. For example, type the following: copy /b 3000fw.rfu\\your_computer\clj3000

NOTE

If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type

C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\3000fw.rfu"

\\your_computer\clj3000

2.

Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages described in the section

Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel. The message 1 file(s) copied appears on the

computer screen.

3.

The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The messages described in the section

Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the

control panel.

NOTE

The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message.

4.

Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.

Remote firmware update through a Windows network

If the product is shared on a Windows network, follow these instructions:

1.

From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type copy /b <FILENAME> \

\<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME>

, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file (including the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer from which the product is being shared, and <SHARENAME> is the product share name. For example, type the following:

C:\>copy /b c:\3000fw.rfu \\your_server\your_computer

NOTE

If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type

C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\3000fw.rfu"

\\your_server\your_computer

2.

Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages described in the section

Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel. The message 1 file(s) copied appears on the

computer screen.

3.

The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The messages described in the section

Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the

control panel.

354 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

ENWW

NOTE

The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message.

4.

Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.

Remote firmware update for UNIX systems

For UNIX systems, any command method that delivers the .TAR file to the product is acceptable, including the following:

1.

At the command prompt, type cp /home/yourmachine/FILENAME /dev/parallel>

, where

</home/yourmachine/FILENAME> is the location of the .TAR file.

2.

The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The

messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the

control panel.

NOTE

The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message.

3.

Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.

Remote firmware update by using the HP Printer Utility

Make sure that you have the tools and files that are necessary for the update. You will need the

HP Printer Utility and the 3000FW.RFU file, which is the firmware file for the product. The HP Printer

Utility is a software program that is available only for Mac OS X V10.2 or later.

The HP Printer Utility can be found on the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printing-system software CD-ROM that came with the product. If you do not have the CD-ROM, you can obtain the HP Printer Utility by downloading the latest product installer from www.hp.com/go/clj3000_software .

The firmware file (3000FW.RFU) can be downloaded from the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/clj3000_firmware

See

Downloading the new firmware to the product for more information.

After you have the firmware file and the HP Printer Utility, you are ready to begin the update process.

Complete the following steps:

1.

Open the HP Printer Utility.

2.

Select Update Firmware, click Choose, browse to firmware upgrade file, and then click Open.

3.

On the Update Firmware screen, click Update.

Remote firmware update 355

NOTE

You might receive an error message on the screen indicating that the printer is offline. Verify that the printer is turned on. If it is, ignore the message. The Updating screen appears and the update proceeds as expected.

4.

The update process can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with

the product or the computer. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel.

NOTE

The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message.

5.

Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.

Remote firmware update by using the HP LaserJet Utility

(Mac OS 9.x only)

Make sure that you have the tools and files that are necessary for the update. You will need the

HP LaserJet Utility and the 3000FW.RFU file, which is the firmware file for the product.

The firmware file (3000FW.RFU) can be downloaded from the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/clj3000_firmware

See

Downloading the new firmware to the product

for more information.

After you have the firmware file and the HP LaserJet Utility, you are ready to begin the update process.

Complete the following steps:

1.

Open the HP LaserJet Utility.

2.

Click Select Printer, select the product that you want to update on the network, and then click

OK. An information dialog box for the printer appears.

3.

On the left side of the information dialog box, click Files. A dialog box appears where you can select a file to be downloaded to the product.

4.

Click Select File.

5.

Locate the 3000FW.RFU file on your hard disk, and click the file name to highlight it. Click

Select. The Files dialog boxes are updated to show the 3000FW.RFU file under File to download.

6.

Click Download.

7.

The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. A progress bar in the HP LaserJet Utility shows how much of the file has been downloaded. The messages described in the section

Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the

control panel.

356 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

ENWW

NOTE

The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message.

8.

Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.

Remote firmware update by using the LPR command

NOTE

This remote firmware update method is for use in Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,

Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003.

Complete the following steps to update the firmware by using the LPR command.

1.

From a command window, type lpr -P <IPADDRESS> -S <IPADDRESS> -o l

<FILENAME>

-OR- lpr -S <IPADDRESS> -Pbinps <FILENAME>

, where <IPADDRESS> can be either the TCP/IP address or the hostname of the product, and where <FILENAME> is the filename of the .RFU file.

NOTE

The parameter (-o l) consists of a lowercase "O", not a zero, and a lowercase "L", not the numeral 1. This parameter sets the transport protocol to binary mode.

2.

Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages described in the section

Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel.

3.

The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The

messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the

control panel.

NOTE

The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message.

4.

Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.

5.

Type exit

at the command prompt to close the command window.

Remote firmware update through HP Web Jetadmin

This procedure requires that you install HP Web Jetadmin V7.8 or later on the computer. Complete the following steps to update a single product through HP Web Jetadmin after downloading the .RFU file from the HP Web site.

1.

Start HP Web Jetadmin.

2.

Type the TCP/IP address or IP host name of the product in the Quick Device Find field, and then click Go. The product Status window opens.

3.

Open the Device Management folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel. Navigate to the Device Lists folder.

Remote firmware update 357

4.

Expand the Device Lists folder and select All Devices. Locate the product that you want to update in the list of products, and click to select it.

5.

Locate the drop-down box for Device Tools in the upper-right corner of the window. Select Update

Printer Firmware from the choose action list.

6.

If the name of the .RFU file is not listed in the All Available Images dialog box, click Browse in the Upload New Firmware Image dialog box and navigate to the location of the .RFU file that you downloaded from the Web at the start of this procedure. If the filename is listed, select it.

7.

Click Upload to move the .RFU file from your hard drive to the HP Web Jetadmin server.

8.

Refresh the browser.

9.

Select the .RFU file from the Printer Firmware Update drop-down menu.

10.

Click Update Firmware. HP Web Jetadmin sends the selected .RFU file to the product.

11.

The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The messages described in the section

Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the

control panel.

NOTE

The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message.

12.

Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.

HP Web Jetadmin V7.8 and later can also be used to perform multiple or unattended installations.

Complete the following steps for multiple or unattended installations.

1.

Start HP Web Jetadmin.

2.

Create a device group. A simple way to do this is to follow these steps: a. Click Device Management, and then click All Devices.

-or-

b. Shift-click to select products that you want to be included in the group, and then click OK.

-or-

c. When prompted, type a name for the new device group, and then click OK.

3.

To modify several products in a group, click the group name, and then click Open.

4.

The drop-down menu for Device Group Tools appears on the right side of the window. Scroll if necessary to view it.

5.

In the Device Group Tools drop-down box, select an action. Type the appropriate information.

Click Return to Device Group when finished.

358 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

Printing print-ready documents

Several methods are available for printing documents independently of the original software program that was used to create the document. Normally, the document is printed by opening the original application and printing it to a file, or is printed by means of a distribution method such as internet downloading. The following print-ready file formats can be sent directly to the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer without first opening the original software program:

HP LaserJet Printer Control Language (.PCL)

Portable Document Format (.PDF)

Postscript (.PS)

Text (.TXT)

Use one of the following methods to send print-ready files to your product.

NOTE

The examples that are used in this section are for printing .PDF documents. However, any print-ready file type can be substituted.

Print-ready file printing by using FTP through a browser

Complete the following steps to print print-ready files directly by using FTP through a browser.

NOTE

The following instructions can be used on Windows or Macintosh operating systems.

1.

Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see

Determining the current level of firmware

.

2.

Open a browser window.

3.

In the address line of the browser, type ftp://<IPADDRESS>

. For example, if the TCP/IP address of your product is 192.168.0.90, type the following:

FTP:// 192.168.0.90

4.

Locate the print-ready file for the product.

5.

Drag and drop the print-ready file onto the PORT1 icon in the browser window.

NOTE

If the PORT1 icon does not appear as a folder name, you might have to enable folder viewing for FTP sites in your Web browser. In Microsoft Internet Explorer, use the following procedure to enable the folder view.

1.

Select Tools, then select Internet Options, and then select the Advanced tab.

2.

Select the Enable folder view for FTP sites.

3.

Click OK to save the setting.

Print-ready file printing by using FTP on a direct network connection

If the HP Color LaserJet 3000 uses a direct network connection, use file transfer protocol (FTP) to print a print-ready file. Complete the following steps for the operating system:

ENWW Printing print-ready documents 359

Windows operating systems

1.

Take note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect page is the second page of the Configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see

Determining the current level of firmware .

2.

Open a command window on the computer.

3.

Type ftp <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS>

. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type the following: ftp 192.168.0.90

4.

Press Enter on the keyboard.

5.

When prompted for the user name, press Enter .

6.

When prompted for the password, press Enter .

7.

Type bin

at the command prompt.

8.

Press Enter . The message 200 Types set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files appears in the command window.

9.

Type put <FILENAME>

, where <FILENAME> is the name of the print-ready file to be printed, including the path. For example, type the following: put C:\LJ\3000FW.PDF

NOTE

If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type put "c:\My Documents\LJ\3000FW.PDF"

The following series of messages appears in the command window:

200 PORT command successful

150 Opening BINARY mode data connection

226 Ready

226 Processing Job

10.

Press Enter on the keyboard.

11.

The print-ready file prints.

12.

At the command prompt, type bye

to exit the FTP command.

13.

At the command prompt, type exit

to return to the Windows interface.

360 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

ENWW

Macintosh operating systems

1.

Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see

Determining the current level of firmware

.

2.

Open a Terminal window on your Macintosh. You can find the Terminal program on the computer hard drive in the following folder:

System/Applications/Utilities/Terminal

3.

Type

FTP <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS>

. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type the following:

FTP 192.168.0.90

4.

Press Enter on the keyboard.

5.

When prompted for a user name and password, press Enter .

6.

You can drag and drop the firmware file into the Terminal folder (System/Applications/Utilities/

Terminal). Alternatively, you can type put <path>

, where <path> is the location where the printready file was downloaded from the Web. For example, type the following: put /username/desktop/3000FW.PDF

NOTE

If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type put "/user name/desktop/3000FW.PDF"

To ensure that the entire path to the print-ready file is placed in the put

command, type put

and a space, and then click and drag the print-ready file onto the terminal window. The complete path to the file is automatically placed after the put

command.

7.

Press Enter .

8.

The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take about five minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or computer.

9.

The product automatically turns off and on again to activate the update.

Print-ready printing by using a local Windows port

To print directly by using a local Windows port, follow the instructions in this section for your operating system.

Printing print-ready documents 361

Windows 98 or Windows Me

1.

From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type the following:

Mode lpt1:,,p

NOTE

If the product is attached to a parallel port other than LPT1, then substitute the correct LPT port number in the mode

command.

2.

Press Enter on the keyboard. The response you receive should be similar to these examples:

> LPT1 Not Rerouted

> Resident portion of MODE loaded

> Infinite retry on parallel printer time-out

3.

At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>

, where <FILENAME> is the name of the print-ready file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate printer port (such as LPT1). For example, at the c:\>

command prompt, type the following: copy /b c:\3000FW.PDF lpt1

NOTE

If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type

C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\3000FW.PDF"

4.

Press Enter on the keyboard. The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel, and the job prints.

5.

At the command prompt, type exit

to close the command window.

Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003

The print-ready file can be sent directly to the product by typing a copy

command at a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window.

1.

At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>

, where <FILENAME> is the name of the print-ready file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate printer port (such as LPT1). For example, type the following:

C:\>copy /b c:\3000FW.PDF lpt1

2.

Press Enter on the keyboard.

NOTE

If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type

C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents

\3000FW.PDF"

. The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel, and the job prints.

3.

At the command prompt, type exit

to close the command window.

362 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

ENWW

Print-ready file printing in a Windows network

If the product is shared on a Windows network, complete the following steps.

1.

From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type copy /b <FILENAME> \

\<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME>

, where <FILENAME> is the name of the print-ready file

(including the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer from which the product is being shared, and <SHARENAME> is the product share name. For example, type the following:

C:\>copy /b c:\3000FW.PDF \\your_server\sharename

NOTE

If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type

C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\3000FW.PDF"

\\your_server\sharename

2.

Press Enter on the keyboard. The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel, and the job prints. The message 1 file(s) copied appears on the computer screen.

Print-ready file printing in UNIX systems

For UNIX systems, any command method that delivers the print-ready file to the product is acceptable, including the following:

At the command prompt, type cp </home/yourmachine/FILENAME/ dev/parallel>

, where </home/yourmachine/FILENAME> is the location of the print-ready file.

Print-ready file printing by using the LPR command

NOTE

This direct printing method is for use in Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003.

Complete the following steps to print a print-ready file by using the LPR command.

1.

Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see

Determining the current level of firmware

.

2.

From a command window, type the following: lpr -P IPADDRESS -S IPADDRESS -o l FILENAME lpr -S <IPADDRESS> -Pbinps

<FILENAME> where IPADDRESS can be either the TCP/IP address or the host name of the product, and where

FILENAME is the file name of the print-ready file.

NOTE

The parameter (-o l) consists of a lowercase "O", not a zero, and a lowercase "L", not the numeral 1. This parameter sets the transport protocol to binary mode.

3.

The file prints, but no messages appear in the command prompt window.

4.

Type exit

at the command prompt to close the command window.

Printing print-ready documents 363

Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems

The following tables detail the software features that are available for each driver type and for operating system that supports the HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer. The printing-system drivers for Windows 98 and Windows Me are the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver, HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver, and PS Emulation

Driver. The printing-system drivers for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 are the new HP unidrivers, with a user interface look and feel that is consistent across the HP PCL 6 Unidriver,

HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and PS Emulation Unidriver.

For more information about the HP traditional PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation drivers, see

HP traditional print drivers for Windows . For more information about the HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and

PS emulation unidrivers, see

HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows .

NOTE

HP Color LaserJet 3000 print driver features are supported in Windows XP (both 32-bit and 64-bit) and Windows XP (both 32-bit and 64-bit ) operating systems.

HP Color LaserJet 3000 print driver features are supported in Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X

Classic) and Mac OS X V10.1.5 or later, except as otherwise noted.

Job-stream output

Table 7-10

Driver support for the job-stream output feature

Operating system

Driver type

Driver

PCL 5 support

PCL 6 support

PCL 6 pass-through support

PCL 6 XL Color

Postscript 3

Postscript 1, 2 x x x

Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

HP unidriver

PCL6 PCL 5 x

PS Emulation

x

Windows 98, Me

x x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation x

x

Macintosh

x x

Macintosh

Postscript

PCL 6 raster compression

Table 7-11

PCL 6 color raster compression support

Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

Driver type

Driver

PCL 6 color raster compression x

HP unidriver

PCL6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

Windows 98, Me

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x

Macintosh

Macintosh

Postscript

364 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

PJL/PJL Encoding

Table 7-12

Printer Job Language (PJL) and PJL encoding

Operating system

Driver type

Driver

PJL support

UTF-8 encoding for PJL

(Unicode to 8-bit) x x

Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x

PS Emulation

x x

Windows 98, Me

x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x x

Macintosh

Macintosh

Postscript

Job tracking

Table 7-13

Driver support for job tracking

Operating system

Driver type

Driver

.PRN file driver identification

Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x

PS Emulation

x

Job accounting information

Job accounting enhancements

(UUID)

Job accounting enhancements

(color) x

Reliable Time Services – born on date (PJL DMINFO) x x Job Timestamp – born on date

(PJL TIMESTAMP)

Born on date (PJL DMINFO) x x Sending user name with every job

Driver hooks for job ticket consumption x

Driver hooks for event extensions for UI control data x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Windows 98, Me

x x x x x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x x x x x x

Macintosh

Macintosh

Postscript

x x (Mac OS X only)

ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 365

Connectivity/Printing

Table 7-14

Driver support for connectivity features

Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

Driver type

Driver

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

Parallel (direct connect)

Network – TCP/IP (wired)

Network – TCP/IP (wireless

USB (Direct Connect) through

7.1.2 Port Monitor (MS USB

Print) (bidirectional)

USB (Direct Connect) through

1284.4 Port Monitor (HP DOT4 /

7.1.3 ) (bidirectional) x

USB (Direct Connect) through

1284.4 Port Monitor (MS DOT4 /

7.1.3) (bidirectional) –

Windows XP only x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

USB (Direct Connect) through

7.1.2 (Apple USB Print)

(bidirectional)

USB (Direct Connect) through

1284.4 (HP Hose DOT4 / 7.1.3 )

(bidirectional)

USB (Direct Connect) through

1284.4 (HP CIA DOT4 / 7.1.3 )

(bidirectional)

Rendezvous

Windows 98, Me

x x x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x x x x x x x

Macintosh

Macintosh

Postscript

x x x x (Mac OS 9 only) x (Mac OS X only) x only)

Bidirectional communication

Table 7-15

Driver support for the bidirectional communication features

Windows 98, Me Operating System Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

Driver type

Driver

Autoconfiguration through EAC x

Autoconfiguration through direct connect – parallel - LPT - DOT4 stack x

Network – TCP/IP x

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x x

PS Emulation

x x x x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x x

Macintosh

Macintosh

Postscript

366 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

Table 7-15

Driver support for the bidirectional communication features (continued)

Operating System Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

Windows 98, Me Macintosh

Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh

Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript

Automatic Configuration (other than EAC) x

Autoconfiguration through EAC over USB (DOT4)

Update Now x x x x x x x x x x

1

Language Monitor

1

x x

MasterMon is a pseudo-language monitor that is used for all HP LaserJet products for the duplex communication channel with bidirectional communication products. It inserts PJL commands into the job stream. It loads TCPMON for TCP/IP ports.

HP Driver Preconfiguration

Table 7-16

Driver support for HP Driver Preconfiguration

Operating system

Driver type

Driver

HP Driver Preconfiguration

Feature lockout

Continuous export x x x

Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x x

PS Emulation

x x x

Windows 98, Me

x x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x

Macintosh

Macintosh

Postscript

Bundle support

Table 7-17

Bundle support

Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

Driver type

Driver

Printer bundle in driver UI

Bundle support thorugh installer x

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x

PS Emulation

x

Windows 98, Me

x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x

Macintosh

Macintosh

Postscript

ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 367

Tray and paper assignment

Table 7-18

Tray and paper assignment

Operating system

Driver type

Driver

Assign paper size to tray

Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x

PS Emulation

x

Windows 98 and Windows Me

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x

Macintosh

Macintosh

Postscript

Installable options

Table 7-19

Driver support for installable options

Operating system

Driver type

Driver

Duplexing unit

Manual duplex enable

Printer hard disk x x x

Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x x

PS Emulation

x x x

Total memory x x x

DWS (available memory)

Additional source trays

Font DIMM/compact flash support

Font DIMM Installer

Mopier enabled

Job-storage feature enabled

Postscript passthrough x x x x x x x x x x x x

Windows 98, Me

x x x x x x x x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Macintosh

x x x

Macintosh

Postscript

x

368 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

Printer services

Table 7-20

Printer services (Services tab)

Operating system

Driver type

Driver

Internet Services Links/Launch product support Web site

Launch HP EWS features through TCP/IP port x

Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x

PS Emulation

x x x

Windows 98, Me

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

Macintosh

Macintosh

Postscript

x x

UI features

Table 7-21

Driver support for UI features

Operating system Windows XP,Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

Driver type

Driver

UI tabs ("Panels" in Macintosh) x

UI extensions x x Page preview images

Printer image bitmaps with hot spots

Paper size dimensions

Device settings notification

About … x

Accessibility/Disability (JAWS)

Accessibility architecture x x x

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x x x x x x

PS Emulation

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Windows 98, Me

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x

Macintosh

Macintosh

Postscript

x (Mac OS X only) x x x x x x x x x x x x (Mac OS X only)

Help features

Table 7-22

Driver support for Help features

Operating system

Driver type

Driver

What's this? Help (F1)

Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x

PS Emulation

x

Windows 98, Me

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x

Macintosh

Macintosh

Postscript

ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 369

Table 7-22

Driver support for Help features (continued)

Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

Driver type

Driver

Help button

Bubble Help

MS Windows "?" Help

Constraint Help x x

HP unidriver

PCL 6

x

PCL 5

x x x x x

PS Emulation

x

Windows 98, Me

HP traditional driver

PCL 6

x x x x

PCL 5

x x x x

PS Emulation

x x

Macintosh

Macintosh

Postscript

Print Task Quick Sets

Table 7-23

Driver support for Print Task Quick Sets

Operating system

Driver type

Driver

Print Task Quick Sets

User Defined Quick Sets x x

Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x

PS Emulation

x x

Windows 98, Me

x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x

Macintosh

x

Macintosh

Postscript

Media sizes

Table 7-24

Driver support for media sizes

Operating system

Driver type

Driver

Media Size selection

User-defined custom media

Custom media-size dialog through driver UI x x x

Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x x

PS Emulation

x x x

Windows 98, Me

x x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x x x x

Macintosh

x x x

Macintosh

Postscript

370 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

Media types

Table 7-25

Driver support for media types

Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

Driver type

Driver

Media types appear in one list

User Defined Media Types

Combined Media Types &

Sources in program. (Always

ON, NO driver UI switch)

Combined Media Types and sources in program (optional, driver UI switch)

Combined Media Types and sources in program (in driver UI)

Alternative Letterhead mode x x x x

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x x x

PS Emulation

x x x x x x

Windows 98, Me

x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x x

Macintosh

x

Macintosh

Postscript

x x x x

Job storage

Table 7-26

Driver support for the job-storage features

Operating system

Driver type

Driver

Proof and hold

Private job

Quick Copy

Stored Job

Job name

User name

PIN to print (for private jobs)

PIN to print (for stored jobs)

Job-storage pop-up

Automatic job and user name

Job-storage override x x x x x x x x x x x

Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x x x x x x x x x x x x

PS Emulation

x x x x x x x x

Windows 98, Me

x x x x x x x x x x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Macintosh

x x x x x x x x

Macintosh

Postscript

ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 371

Print quality and resolution

Table 7-27

Print-quality and resolution features

Operating system

Driver type

Driver

Print-quality options

Windows XP,Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x

PS Emulation

x

Print-quality – custom options recall

Print optimizations

Rendering mode (automatic)

Send graphics as vector

Send graphics as raster x x

Send page as raster

Color REt

1

x

Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG)

Image Mode x

HP Digital Photograph x

1

PCL 5 Immediate Graphics

Mode

Activated through the Edge Control option x x x x x x x

Windows 98, Me

x x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Macintosh

Macintosh

Postscript

x

Reordering Options

Table 7-28

Driver support for the reordering options

Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

Driver type

Driver

Page order (based on output bin) x

Page order (reordering for job) x

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x

PS Emulation

x x

Windows 98, Me

x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x

Macintosh

Macintosh

Postscript

x (Mac OS X only) x (Mac OS X only)

372 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

Resizing options

Table 7-29

Resizing options

Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

Driver type

Driver

Print Document On

Scale to Fit

Allow Scaling from Large Paper x

% of Normal Size x

Rotate by 180 degrees x x x

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x x x x

PS Emulation

x x x x x

Windows 98, Me

x x x x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x x x x x x x

Macintosh

Macintosh

Postscript

Color settings

Table 7-30

Color settings

Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

Driver type

Driver

Color Options x

Manual/automatic color options x

CMYK inks

Print in Grayscale

Color/monochrome switching

ICM Method x x x x x

ICM Intent

Print in Grayscale blocked

(HP PCL 6 Unidriver [Black] only) sRGB (ColorSmart for legacy

HP LaserJet printers)

CMYK color management x

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x x x x x x x

PS Emulation

x x x x x x x x

Windows 98, Me

x x x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x x x x x x x

Mac

x x x x

Mac

Postscript

x x

ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 373

Watermarks

Table 7-31

Driver support for watermarks feature

Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

Windows 98, Me

Driver type

Driver

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

Watermarks on/off

First page only

Custom watermark definition

Watermark angle

Watermark font name

Watermark font color x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Watermark font shading

Watermark font size x x x x x x

Watermark font style x x x x

1

Locally defined watermarks x x x

Mac OS 9 (Mac OS X Classic) only; not supported by Mac OS X or later.

x x x x x x x x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Macintosh 11

x x x x x x x x x

Macintosh

Postscript

Alternative source/paper type

Table 7-32

Driver support for the alternate source/paper type feature

Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

Driver type

Driver

All pages the same x

Use different paper (UI control) x

Front Cover (Blank Front Cover

Inserted)

First Page x

Other pages

Last Page x

Back Cover – Blank Back Cover

Inserted x x x

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x x x x x x

PS Emulation

x x x x x x x

Windows 98, Me

x x x x x x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x x x x x x x x

Macintosh

x x

Macintosh

Postscript

374 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

Printing destination

Table 7-33

Driver support for the printing-destination feature

Operating system

Driver type

Driver

Paper Destinations

Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x

PS Emulation

x

Windows 98, Me

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x

Macintosh

Macintosh

Postscript

x

Finishing options and duplexing

Table 7-34

Duplexing

Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

Driver type

Driver

Auto duplex/print on both sides x

Manual duplex x

Mixed duplex and simplex in single job x

Long Edge/Short Edge (Flip On) x

Pages per sheet (N-up)

Page borders on/off

Page order (N-Up)

Booklet Printing (layout through software)

Booklet Target Size x x x x x

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x x x x x x x x

PS Emulation

x x x x x x x x x

Windows 98, Me

x x x x x x x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Macintosh

x x

Macintosh

Postscript

x x x x x (Mac OS X only)

Other document options

Table 7-35

Other document options

Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

Driver type

Driver

Orientation (portrait/landscape) x

Number of copies x

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x

PS Emulation

x x

Windows 98, Me

x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x x

Macintosh

x x

Macintosh

Postscript

ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 375

Table 7-35

Other document options (continued)

Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

Driver type

Driver

Ignore application collation

Collate

Collate – feature in driver UI

Collate through mopy

Advanced printing features

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x

PS Emulation

x x x x x

x x x

Windows 98, Me

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x x x x x

x x x

Macintosh

Macintosh

Postscript

x x x x

Font support

Table 7-36

Font support

Operating system

Driver type

Driver

General device font support

Font substitution

Font DIMM (on/off)

Send TrueType as Bitmap

TrueType Fonts (UI option)

Print Text as Black x x x

Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x x

PS Emulation

x x x x x x

Windows 98, Me

x x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x x x x x x

Macintosh

x x

Macintosh

Postscript

Postscript-specific features

Table 7-37

Driver support for postscript-specific features

Operating system

Driver

Postscript memory

Output protocol

Send CTRL-D before each job

Send CTRL-D after each job

Windows XP

HP unidriver

x x x x

PS Emulation

Unidriver

Windows 98, Me

x x x x

PS Emulation

Driver

Macintosh

Postscript

Postscript

376 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

Table 7-37

Driver support for postscript-specific features (continued)

Operating system Windows XP

Driver

Convert gray text to postscript gray

Convert gray graphics to postscript gray

Add euro currency symbol

Job timeout

Wait timeout

Minimum font size to download as outline

Minimum font size to download as bitmap

Printing Preferences

CMYK Inks

Postscript Language Level

Send postscript error handler

Fit to Page

Output options

Optimize for speed

Optimize for portability

Encapsulated postscript (EPS)

Archive format

Fit to Page

TrueType font download option

Automatic

Outline

Bitmap

Native TrueType x x x x x x x x x x x x

HP unidriver

x x x x x x x

PS Emulation

Unidriver

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Windows 98, Me

PS Emulation

Driver

Macintosh

Postscript

Postscript

x

ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 377

378 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

Index

Symbols/Numerics

% of Normal Size setting

PCL traditional drivers 122

unidrivers 230

A

About button

PCL traditional drivers 152

PS Emulation Driver 173

About tab, unidrivers 268

accessibility

documentation 19

drivers 369

accessories, automatic

configuration 31

ADA (Americans with Disabilities

Act) compliance 19

Add Printer installation 299

Additional Drivers dialog box,

Windows 296

Additional Software dialog box,

Customization Wizard 308

Additional Software dialog box,

Windows 292

Adobe Acrobat Reader

installing 26

printing PDF files without 359

viewing documentation 18

Adobe RGB

PS Emulation Driver 185

unidrivers 255

Adobe Web site 169

Advanced Printing Features setting,

unidrivers 205, 206

Advanced tab, unidrivers 203

alerts, e-mail

HP Embedded Web Server

65, 66

Macintosh 88

Allow Scaling from Large Paper,

PCL traditional drivers 166

Alternative Letterhead Mode

PCL traditional drivers 166

unidrivers 207

alternative source support 374

Americans with Disabilities Act

(ADA) compliance 19

AppleTalk networks 319

application settings

traditional drivers 99

unidrivers 197

ASCII output protocol, PS

Emulation Unidriver 262

autoconfiguration, driver

PCL traditional drivers 167

support for 31

unidrivers 264

autoconfiguration, Enterprise

about 31

Windows support 32

Automatic color settings

PCL traditional drivers 155

unidrivers 252

automatic two-sided printing

PS Emulation Driver 173

autorun CD-ROM, Windows 25

B

Back button, Windows installation

dialog boxes 277

Back Cover settings

PCL traditional drivers 136,

139

unidrivers 219, 224

Back to Front printing, unidrivers

208

Basic Installation

choosing 25

dialog boxes, Windows 278

Basics tab, PCL traditional drivers

150

bidirectional communication

about 31

driver support 366

Enterprise AutoConfiguration

31

binary output protocol, PS

Emulation Unidriver 262

binding settings

PCL traditional drivers 112

unidrivers 239

bins

custom paper sizes 133, 216

driver support 368

black, printing all text as

PCL traditional drivers 117,

119

unidrivers 207

booklet printing settings

PCL traditional drivers 113

unidrivers 239

both sides, printing on

PCL traditional driver settings

110

PS Emulation Driver 173

unidrivers 236

Bubble help 104

bundle support 367

C

Cancel button, Windows installation

dialog boxes 277

cardstock, paper type commands

345

CD-ROM directory structure, Macintosh

12

directory structure, Windows

11

ENWW Index 379

documentation 18, 26

installer, Windows printing-

system software 24

installing Macintosh printing-

system software 318

installing Windows printing-

system software 276

languages 12

Change TCP/IP Settings dialog

box, Windows 290

Check Printer Connection dialog

box, Windows 287

CHM files, viewing 19

CMYK settings, PS Emulation

Driver 185

collation settings

PCL traditional drivers 163,

166

PS Emulation Driver 184

unidrivers 204, 266

Color Control, PS Emulation Driver

175

Color Options, PS Emulation Driver

185

color printing

driver support 373

ICC profiles 40

Image Color Management (ICM)

205

PANTONE color profiles 41

restricting from control panel

38

restricting from HP Embedded

Web Server 69

restricting from Macintosh 92

settings, controlling 38

Color tab

PCL traditional drivers 154

unidrivers 251

Color Themes

PCL traditional drivers 158

PS Emulation Driver 185

unidrivers 254

Color Usage log, Macintosh 85

command-line printing, Windows

359

command-line silent install for

Windows 313

commands, paper

size 343

source 341

type 345

common installer, features 26

Configuration Page, HP Embedded

Web Server 62

Configure Device page, HP

Embedded Web Server 65

Configure tab, PCL traditional

drivers 160

Confirm Changing Setting dialog

box, Windows 286

Confirm Network Settings dialog

box, Windows 285

connectivity bidirectional communication

support 31

driver support 366

features 6

Printer Connection dialog box,

Windows 280

Searching dialog box, Windows

281

constraint messages

PCL traditional drivers 103

unidrivers 201

context-sensitive help

PCL traditional drivers 103

PS Emulation Driver 169

unidrivers 201

continuous export 36

control panel settings

traditional drivers 99

unidrivers 197

Copy Count settings

PCL traditional drivers 151

PS Emulation Driver 172

unidrivers 204, 266

covers, use different paper settings

PCL traditional drivers 136

unidrivers 219

Ctrl-D settings 196, 263

Custom Installation

choosing 25

dialog boxes, Windows 278

Custom Installer Location dialog box, Windows

Customization Wizard 309

custom paper sizes

PCL traditional drivers 130,

344

PCL unidrivers 215, 344

customer support 61

Customization Wizard

dialog boxes 300

D

default Print Task Quick Sets

PCL traditional drivers 106

unidrivers 210

default printer, setting 314

deleting job-storage jobs 149

destinations, paper 341

Device Information page, HP

Embedded Web Server 60, 65

Device Installer Customization

Wizard

dialog boxes 300

Device Options tab, PS Emulation

Driver 179

Device Settings tab, unidrivers

258

Device Status page, HP Embedded

Web Server 61

diagnostics 37, 256

dialog boxes, printing-system software installation

Mac OS X 332

Mac OS X Classic 331

Windows 278

Windows Customization Wizard

300

Digital Imaging Options, unidrivers

225

DIMMs, fonts

PCL traditional driver settings

165

unidriver settings 260

direct printing

FTP, Windows 359

local port, Windows 361

LPR 363 networks, Windows 363

UNIX 363

direct-connect installation 278

directory structure, software CD-

ROM

Macintosh 12

Windows 11

disabling

driver features 35

380 Index ENWW

disk. See hard disk disk space requirements

Macintosh and Linux 7

Windows 7

Document Options

PCL traditional drivers 109

unidrivers 205, 236

document preview image

PCL traditional drivers 116,

122, 140, 152, 159

unidrivers 225, 230, 241, 255

documentation

Help feature support 369

HP Embedded Web Server User

Guide 20

HP Jetdirect Administrator's

Guide 21

install notes 20

localized versions 13

Print Task Quick Set for use guide, HP Traditional

PCL traditional drivers 109

Print Task Quick Set for use

guide, unidriver 213

User Guide 19

viewing 18, 26

double-sided printing

PCL traditional driver settings

110

PS Emulation Driver 173

unidriver settings 236

downloading

firmware 346

printing-system software 9

Driver Work Space (DWS) 166

drivers

accessibility support 369

accessory configuration 31

Add Printer installation 299

availability by operating system

10

bidirectional communication

support 366

bins supported 368

bundle support 367

color options 373

connectivity support 366

continuous export feature 36

destination support 375

diagnostics 37

Enterprise AutoConfiguration

31

finishing options 375

font support 376

Help feature support 369

HP Driver Preconfiguration

support 36, 367

included 27

installable options support

368

job stream output support 364

job tracking 365

job-storage support 371

Linux operating systems 8

lockable features 35, 87

Macintosh 30

media supported 341

network preconfiguration 34

paper source commands 341

paper supported 370

PCL 6 color raster compression

support 364

PJL encoding 365, 374

Point and Print installation

313

Postcript-specific features 376

Print Quality options 116

Print Task Quick Sets support

370

PS Emulation Driver features

168

quality settings 372 reordering options 372

resizing options support 373

Services support 369

settings 99, 197

standalone 8

tray assignment 368

UNIX operating systems 9

user interface support 369

watermarks support 374

Drivers dialog box, Customization

Wizard 306

Drivers dialog box, Windows 291

duplexing unit

custom paper sizes 133, 216

media supported 343

models including 5

PCL traditional driver settings

110, 162

print modes 111

PS Emulation Driver settings

173, 191

unidriver configuration 265

unidriver settings 236

DWS (Driver Work Space) 166

E

e-mail alerts

HP Embedded Web Server

65, 66

Macintosh 88

E-mail Server page, HP Embedded

Web Server 65

Easy Printer Care

about 42

accessing 43

availiability 340

Find Other Printers 44

Maintenance Tools pane 55

My HP Printers screen 49

Printer Usage Report 56

Support tab 53

Troubleshooting Tools pane

58

uninstallation 340

Update screen 57

Edge Control settings

PCL traditional drivers 156

PS Emulation Driver 186

unidrivers 253

Edit Other Links page, HP

Embedded Web Server 65

Effects tab

PCL traditional drivers 120

unidrivers 228

Embedded Jetdirect page, printing

59

embedded Web server. See HP

Embedded Web Server

Energy Star compliance 5

Enterprise AutoConfiguration

about 31

Novell NetWare operating

systems supported 33

Windows operating systems

supported 32

envelopes, paper type commands

345

escape sequences

ENWW Index 381

paper source 341

paper type 345

event log 60

EWS. See HP Embedded Web

Server

exporting driver parameters 36

External Fonts settings, PCL

unidrivers 260

F

features 4

File to E-mail utility 338

File Upload, Macintosh 83

Find Other Printers, HP Easy

Printer Care 44

Finish dialog box, Customization

Wizard 312

Finish dialog box, Windows 297

finishing options 375

Finishing tab

PCL traditional drivers 105

unidrivers 235

Firewall Detected dialog box,

Windows 282

firewalls dialog box, Windows

282

firmware

determining current level 346 downloading 346

FTP updates, Windows 350

HP Web Jetadmin updates

357

LPR command updates 357

Macintosh updates 85, 351,

355

messages during update 347 troubleshooting updates 347

UNIX updates 355

updating remotely 346

verifying installation 348

Windows network updates

354

Windows, local port update

352

first page out 4

First Page paper settings

PCL traditional drivers 137

unidrivers 220

Fit to Page settings

PCL Traditional Drivers 121

PS Emulation Driver 185

Flip Pages Up

PCL traditional drivers 112

unidriver settings 239

Font Substitution Table, PS

Emulation Unidriver 259

fonts

DIMM settings, PCL traditional

drivers 165

DIMM settings, unidrivers 260

driver support 376

External, PCL unidrivers 260

features 5

Macintosh 317

PS 3 emulation 168

PS Emulation Driver settings

177

PS Emulation Unidriver 264

Send TrueType as Bitmap, PCL

traditional drivers 117, 118

Send TrueType as Bitmap, PCL

unidrivers 207

substitution table, PS Emulation

Driver 177

substitution table, unidrivers

260

TrueType download option

377

unidriver settings 205

Upload Fonts, HP Printer Utility

83

watermarks 125

Windows 270, 272

Form to Tray Assignment,

unidrivers 259

Front Cover settings

PCL traditional drivers 136

unidrivers 219

FTP

direct printing, Windows 359

Windows firmware updates

350

Full Installation

choosing 25

dialog boxes, Windows 278

G

Graphic settings

PCL traditional drivers 117,

118

unidrivers 205

Graphics tab, PS Emulation Driver

174

grayscale printing

PCL traditional drivers 157

PS Emulation Driver 184

guides. See documentation

H

Halftone settings

PCL traditional drivers 157

PS Emulation Driver 176, 186

unidrivers 254

hard disk

features 4 models including 4

printer 265

PS Emulation Driver settings

191

unidriver settings 265

heavy paper, paper type commands

345

help

Bubble 104

Macintosh 316

operating systems supported

369

PCL traditional drivers 103

PS Emulation Driver 169

unidrivers 201

Help button, Windows installation

dialog boxes 277

HP Device Installer Customization

Wizard

dialog boxes 300

HP Digital Imaging Options,

unidrivers 225

HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check

Tool 37

HP Driver Preconfiguration

driver support 367

operating systems and drivers

supported 36

status, PCL traditional drivers

153

HP Easy Printer Care

about 42

accessing 43

availiability 340

Find Other Printers 44

382 Index ENWW

Maintenance Tools pane 55

My HP Printers screen 49

Printer Usage Report 56

Support tab 53

Troubleshooting Tools pane

58

uninstallation 340

Update screen 57

HP Embedded Web Server

about 59

alerts page 65

AutoSend page 65

Configuration Page 62

Configure Device page 65

Device Information page 60,

65

Device Status page 61

documentation 20

E-mail Server page 65

HP Printer Utility, accessing

from 96

HP Web Jetadmin 59

Information tab 60

language, setting 65 links 61, 65

Macintosh support 316

navigation 60

Networking tab 70

Security page 65, 68

Settings tab 64

time settings 65

user guide 59

HP Instant Support 61

HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide

21

HP Jetdirect page, printing 59

HP LaserJet Utility, Macintosh

firmware updates 356

HP Network Registry Agent

(HPNRA) 31

HP PCL traditional drivers. See PCL traditional drivers

HP PCL unidrivers. See PCL unidrivers

HP Printer Utility, Macintosh

about 73 accessing 73

Color Usage log 85

Device Information 80

E-mail Alerts 88

Embedded Web Server access

96

File Upload 83

HP Support 81

Lock Resources 87

Network Settings 89

Rendezvous Setting 91

Restrict Color 92

Supplies Management 92

Supplies Status 77

Tray Configuration 86

Update Firmware 85

Upload Fonts 83

HP PS 3 Emulation Unidriver. See

PS Emulation Unidriver

HP Registration dialog box,

Windows 299

HP Software License Agreement

dialog box, Windows 280

HP Toolbox, not supported 23

HP Traditional Postscript 3

Emulation Driver. See PS

Emulation Driver

HP Web Jetadmin

downloading 26, 97

Driver Preconfiguration Plugin

34

firmware updates 357

HP Embedded Web Server

59

HPNRA (HP Network Registry

Agent) 31

HPPJL Encoding 182

HTML files, viewing 19

I

ICC color profiles 40

Ignore Application Collation, PCL

traditional drivers 163, 166

Image Color Management (ICM)

205

inches, settings 134

Include types in application source

list option in drivers 167

Incompatible Print Settings messages. See constraint messages

Information tab, HP Embedded

Web Server 60

input trays. See trays

install notes 20

Installable Options

PS Emulation Driver 190

PS Emulation Unidriver 264

installation

Add Printer 299

Adobe Acrobat Reader 26

command-line silent 313

Customization Wizard for

Windows 300

dialog boxes, Mac OS X 332

dialog boxes, Mac OS X Classic

331

File to E-mail utility 338

Macintosh printing-system

software 318

Point and Print 313

pre-existing, modifying 278

system requirements for

Macintosh and Linux operating

systems 7

system requirements for

Windows operating systems

7

Windows printing-system

software 276

Installation Type dialog box,

Windows 290

installers availability by operating system

10

common, features 26

customizing 300

localized versions 13

Windows 24

Installing dialog box, Customization

Wizard 312

Installing dialog box, Windows

296

Instant Support 61

International Color Consortium profiles

viewing 40

IP address, locating 59

J

Jetadmin. See HP Web Jetadmin

Jetdirect Administrator's Guide

21

Job Notification Options

ENWW Index 383

PCL traditional drivers 147

Job storage enabling in PCL traditional

drivers 164

Macintosh 87

operating systems supported

371

PCL traditional drivers 142

PS Emulation Driver 182, 192

unidriver settings 243, 265

job stream output support 364

Job Timeout settings 194, 263

job tracking 365

L

landscape orientation settings

PCL traditional drivers 112,

151

PS Emulation Driver 172

unidrivers 239, 241

Language Selection dialog box,

Customization Wizard 301, 302

Language Selection dialog box,

Windows 278

languages

CD-ROMs 12

HP Embedded Web Server

65

Language Selection dialog box,

Windows 278

large paper, allowing scaling 166

Last Page settings

PCL traditional drivers 138

unidrivers 222

Layout Options, unidrivers 208

letterhead, alternative mode

PCL traditional drivers 166

unidrivers 207

license agreement dialog box,

Windows 280

links

HP Embedded Web Server

61, 65

Linux operating systems

driver availability 8

system requirements 7

local port command line printing,

Windows 361

localized CD-ROMs 12

lockable features, drivers 35, 87

LPR commands

firmware updates 357

printing PDF files 363

M

Macintosh operating systems availability of software

components 10

Classic support 30

Color Usage log 85

components, software 316

Device Information 80

dialog boxes, Mac OS X Classic printing-system software

installation 331

dialog boxes, Mac OS X printingsystem software installation

332

direct printing 359

directory structure, software CD-

ROM 12

driver versions 30

e-mail alerts 88

File Upload command 83

firmware upgrades 351, 355

fonts supported 317

HP Embedded Web Server

316

HP Printer Utility 73

install notes 316

installers 10

installing printing-system

software 318

locking driver features 87

network settings 89

network setup 318, 328

online help 316

PDEs 316

PPDs 316

Rendezvous Setting 91

Restrict Color 92

setting up products with Mac OS

X 327

stored jobs 87

Supplies Management 92

supplies status 77

supported 8

system requirements 7

tray configuration 86

uninstalling printing-system

software 329

Update Firmware 85

Upload Fonts 83

Maintenance Tools pane, HP Easy

Printer Care 55

Manual color settings

PCL traditional drivers 155

unidrivers 252

manuals. See documentation margins

PCL 6 driver 343

PS Emulation Driver 172

measurement units 134

media. See paper memory

base 4

installation requirements for

Macintosh and Linux operating

systems 7

installation requirements for

Windows operating systems

7

PCL traditional driver settings

166

PS Emulation Driver settings

181

PS Emulation Unidriver settings

262

unidriver settings 265

messages, constraint

PCL traditional drivers 103

unidrivers 201

Microsoft Point and Print installation

313

millimeters, settings 134

mirror image, PS Emulation Driver

176

model scripts, UNIX 9

models

features 4

PCL traditional driver settings

161

moire effect, handling 117, 119

Mopier settings

PCL traditional drivers 163

PS Emulation Driver 191

unidriver 265

More Configuration Options, PCL

traditional drivers 164

384 Index ENWW

My HP Printers screen, HP Easy

Printer Care 49

N

negative image, PS Emulation

Driver 176

Networking tab, HP Embedded

Web Server 70

networks bidirectional communication

support 366

color printing, restricting 38

direct printing 363

Embedded Jetdirect page,

printing 59

firewalls 282

firmware updates 354

HP Driver Preconfiguration 34

HP Jetdirect Administrator's

Guide 21

HP Web Jetadmin, downloading

97

Macintosh settings 89

Macintosh setup 318, 319,

328

Point and Print installation

313

settings 72

TCP/IP Settings, Windows

installation dialog box 290

Windows printing-system

software installation 276

Neutral Grays settings

PCL traditional drivers 157

PS Emulation Driver 186

unidrivers 254

Next steps dialog box, Windows

297

Novell NetWare operating systems,

Enterprise AutoConfiguration

support 33

number of copies, setting

PCL traditional drivers 151

PS Emulation Driver 172

unidrivers 204, 266

O

online help. See help operating systems availability of software

components 10

bidirectional communication

support 366

bins supported 368

Enterprise AutoConfiguration

support 32

Help feature support 369

HP Driver Preconfiguration

support 367

PCL 6 color raster compression

support 364

Postscript feature support 376

Services tab support 369

standalone drivers 8 supported 8

user interface support 369

Optimizations option, PCL

unidrivers 206

Optional Paper Sources, PCL

traditional drivers 163

ordering supplies 26, 51

orientation settings

PCL traditional drivers 112,

151

PS Emulation Driver 172

unidrivers 239, 241

Other Pages paper settings

PCL traditional drivers 138

unidrivers 222

output bins. See bins

Output Protocol settings, PS

Emulation Unidriver 262

Output Settings, PCL traditional

drivers 117, 119

P

Page Order settings

PCL traditional drivers 115

unidrivers 208, 240

page orientation settings

PCL traditional drivers 112,

151

PS Emulation Driver 172

unidrivers 239, 241

Page Setup tab, PS Emulation

Driver 169

pages per minute 4

Pages per Sheet settings

PCL traditional drivers 114

unidrivers 240

PANTONE color profiles 41

paper

Allow Scaling from Large 166

Alternative Letterhead Mode

166, 207

custom sizes, PCL driver

support 344

custom sizes, PCL traditional

driver settings 130

custom sizes, PCL unidriver

settings 215

driver support 370

Include types in application

source list setting 167

margins 343

Pages per Sheet settings, PCL

traditional drivers 114

Pages per Sheet settings,

unidrivers 240

Print Document On settings,

PCL traditional drivers 121

Print Document On settings,

unidrivers 229

Print on Both Sides settings,

unidrivers 236

Print on Both Sides, PCL

traditional drivers 110

PS Emulation Driver settings

170

size commands 343

Size is settings, PCL traditional

drivers 129

Size is settings, unidrivers

215

sizes supported 5

source commands 341

Source is settings, PCL

traditional drivers 134

Source is settings, unidrivers

217

sources and destinations 341

type commands 345

Type is: settings, PCL traditional

drivers 135

Type is: settings, unidrivers

218

types and sizes supported

341

types supported 343

ENWW Index 385

Paper Handling Options, PCL

traditional drivers 162

Paper Options

PCL traditional drivers 129

unidrivers 214

Paper tab, PCL traditional drivers

128

Paper/Output settings, unidrivers

204

Paper/Quality tab, unidrivers 209

parallel port direct-connect

installation 278

PCL 6 raster compression support

364

PCL documents, printing 60

PCL files, command-line printing

359

PCL traditional drivers

About button 152

accessing 101

Allow Scaling from Large Paper

166

Alternative Letterhead Mode

166

alternative source support

374

Basics tab 150

bidirectional communication

support 366

bins supported 368

Booklet Printing 113

bundle support 367

Color tab 154

Color Themes box 158

Configuration Status 153

Configure tab 160

connectivity support 366

custom paper sizes 344

destination support 375

Document Options 109

document preview image

116, 122, 140, 152, 159

duplexing unit settings 162

Effects tab 120

finishing options 375

Finishing tab 105

Fit to Page settings 121

font support 376

Graphic settings 117, 118

grayscale printing 157

Help feature support 369

Help system 103

HP Driver Preconfiguration

support 36

Ignore Application Collation

166

Include types in application

source list setting 167

included 27

installable options support

368

Job Storage, enabling 164

job stream output support 364

job tracking 365

Job-storage settings 142

job-storage support 371

localized versions 13

margins 343

media supported 341

memory settings 166

Mopier Enabled settings 163

More Configuration Options

164

operating systems supported

10

Optional Paper Sources 163

Output Settings 117, 119

Paper Handling Options 162

Paper Options 129

paper size commands 343

paper source commands 341

paper supported 370

Paper tab 128

paper type commands 345

PCL 6 color raster compression

support 364

PJL encoding 365

preconfiguration support 367

Print Quality Details settings

116, 117

Print Quality group box 116

Print Task Quick Sets 106

Print Task Quick Sets support

370

Printer Model box 161

product image 140

quality settings 372 reordering options 372

resizing options support 373

RGB Color settings 158

Scale to Fit 121

Services tab 369

tray assignment 368

Update Now button 167

user interface support 369

Watermarks settings 123

watermarks support 374

PCL unidrivers

% of Normal Size 230

About tab 268

accessing 199

Advanced Printing Features

205

Advanced tab 203

Alternative Letterhead Mode

207

alternative source support

374

Automatic Configuration 264

bidirectional communication

support 366

bins supported 368

booklets 239

bundle support 367

Color tab 251

Color Themes 254

connectivity support 366

Copy Count settings 204

custom paper sizes 344

destination support 375

Device Settings tab 258

Document Options 205, 236

document preview image

225, 230, 241, 255

duplexing 236

Edge Control 253

Effects tab 228

External Fonts settings 260

features 197

finishing options 375

Finishing tab 235

Flip Pages Up 239

Font DIMM Installer 260

Font Substitution Table 260

font support 376

Form to Tray Assignment 259

Graphic setting 205

Halftone settings 254

Help feature support 369

Help system 201

386 Index ENWW

HP Digital Imaging Options

225

HP Driver Preconfiguration

support 36

Image Color Management (ICM)

205

included 27

Installable Options settings

264

installable options support

368

job stream output support 364

job tracking 365

Job-storage settings 243

job-storage support 371

Layout Options 208

localized versions 13

media supported 341

Mopier settings 265

Neutral Grays 254

operating systems supported

10

Pages per Sheet 240

Paper Options 214

paper size commands 343

paper supported 370

paper type commands 345

Paper/Output settings 204

Paper/Quality tab 209

PCL 6 color raster compression

support 364

PJL encoding 365

preconfiguration support 367

Print Optimizations option 206

Print Task Quick Sets 210

Print Task Quick Sets support

370

Printer Features 207

Printing Preferences tab 199

Properties tab 200

quality settings 372

raster compression 208

reordering options 372

Resizing Options settings 229

resizing options support 373

Scale to Fit 229

Services tab 256, 369

tray assignment 368

TrueType font settings 205

user interface support 369

Watermarks settings 231

watermarks support 374

PDEs (Printer Dialog Extensions)

316

PDF files

command-line printing 359

installing Adobe Acrobat Reader

26

LPR commands, printing 363

Macintosh, File Upload

command 83

printing using HP Embedded

Web Server 60

viewing 19

Percentage of Normal Size setting

PCL traditional drivers 122

unidrivers 230

PINs, private jobs

PCL traditional drivers 147

PS Emulation Driver 183

unidrivers 247, 248

PJL encoding 365

Point and Print installation,

Windows printing-system

software 313

Port Creation Options dialog box,

Customization Wizard 306

port selection dialog box, Windows

Customization Wizard 303

portrait orientation settings

PCL traditional drivers 112,

151

PS Emulation Driver 172

unidrivers 239, 241

ports, included 6

PostScript Device settings, PS

Emulation Unidriver 262

postscript documents, printing 60

PostScript Options, unidrivers

206

PostScript Passthrough 266

Postscript printer description (PPD)

files 316

PostScript tab

Advanced button 194

bitmap compression 195

Ctrl-D settings 196 data format 196

error information 194 header 194

language level 195

output format 193

PS Emulation Driver 192

timeout value 194

PPD (postscript printer description)

files 316

pre-existing installation, modifying

278

preconfiguration, driver 34

preview image, document

PCL traditional drivers 116,

122, 140, 152, 159

unidrivers 241, 255

Print All Text as Black

PCL traditional drivers 117,

119

unidrivers 207

Print Document On settings

PCL traditional drivers 121

unidrivers 229

print modes 111

Print on Both Sides

PCL traditional driver settings

110

PS Emulation Driver 173

unidriver settings 236

Print Optimizations option, PCL

unidrivers 206

Print Page Borders settings

PCL traditional drivers 115

unidrivers 240

Print Quality Details, PCL traditional

drivers 116, 117

Print Task Quick Sets, PCL traditional drivers

about 106 defaults 106

use guide 109

Print Task Quick Sets, unidrivers

about 210

custom 214

defaults 210

use guide 213

print-ready files

command-line printing 359 printing by FTP 359

printing by local WIndows port

361

printing by Windows network

363

ENWW Index 387

printing in UNIX systems 363

printing using HP Embedded

Web Server 60

printing with LPR command

363

Printer Connection dialog box, Full

Installation 280

printer control panel settings

traditional drivers 99

unidrivers 197

Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs)

316

Printer Driver Test Page dialog box,

Windows 298

Printer Features, unidrivers 207

Printer Found dialog box, Windows

284, 285

Printer Model

features 4

PCL traditional driver settings

161

Printer Not Found dialog box,

Windows 283

Printer Port dialog box,

Customization Wizard 303

Printer Properties dialog box,

Customization Wizard 310

Printer Properties dialog box,

Windows 294

Printer Settings dialog box,

Windows 288

printer, setting default 314

printing direct in a Windows network

363 direct in UNIX 363

direct using FTP 359

direct using local Windows port

361

direct using LPR command

363

files using HP Embedded Web

Server 60

User Guide 19

Printing Preferences tabs 199

Private job settings

PCL traditional drivers 145

PS Emulation Driver 183

unidrivers 247

PRN files, printing 60

product image 140

product support 61

Proof and Hold job settings

PCL traditional drivers 145

PS Emulation Driver 183

unidrivers 246

Properties tabs 200

protocols

configuring 72

PS Emulation Unidriver 262

Windows installation dialog box

290

PS 3 font emulation 168

PS Emulation Driver

About 173

alternative source support

374

bidirectional communication

support 366

bins supported 368

bundle support 367

collation settings 184

Color Control 175

Color Options 185

connectivity support 366

context-sensitive help 169

copies, number of 172

destination support 375

Device Options tab 179

Edge Control 186

features 168, 376

finishing options 375

Fit to Page 185

font support 376

Fonts tab 177

Graphics tab 174

grayscale printing 184

halftone settings 176, 186

Help feature support 369

Help system 169

HP Driver Preconfiguration

support 36

HPPJL Encoding 182

included 27

Installable Options 190

installable options support

368

job stream output support 364

job tracking 365

job-storage settings 182, 192

job-storage support 371

localized versions 13

media supported 341

memory settings 181

mirror image, printing 176

Mopier Mode 191

More Options 173

negative image, printing 176

Neutral Grays 186

operating systems supported

10

Page Setup tab 169

paper supported 370

PJL encoding 365

PostScript tab 192

preconfiguration support 367

Print Quality group box 116

Print Task Quick Sets support

370

Printer features group box

181

Printing on Both Sides 173

PS 3 font emulation 168

quality settings 372 reordering options 372

resizing options support 373

resolution settings 175

Scaling control 176

Services tab 369

tray assignment 368

tray settings 172

Unprintable Area 172

user interface support 369

Watermark settings 187

Watermarks settings 187

watermarks support 374

Window duplexing unit settings

191

PS emulation fonts 272

PS Emulation Unidriver

% of Normal Size 230

About tab 268

accessing 199

Advanced Printing Features

205

Advanced tab 203

Alternative Letterhead Mode

207

alternative source support

374

388 Index ENWW

Automatic Configuration 264

bidirectional communication

support 366

bins supported 368

booklets 239

bundle support 367

Color tab 251

Color Themes 254

connectivity support 366

Copy Count settings 204

Ctrl-D settings 263

destination support 375

Device Settings tab 258

Document Options 205, 236

document preview image

225, 230, 241, 255

duplexing 236

Edge Control 253

Effects tab 228

features 197, 376

finishing options 375

Finishing tab 235

Flip Pages Up 239

Font DIMM Installer 260

font settings 264

Font Substitution Table 259

font support 376

Form to Tray Assignment 259

Graphic setting 205

Halftone settings 254

Help feature support 369

Help system 201

HP Digital Imaging Options

225

HP Driver Preconfiguration

support 36

Image Color Management (ICM)

205

included 27

Installable Options settings

264

installable options support

368

job stream output support 364

job tracking 365

Job-storage settings 243

job-storage support 371

Layout Options 208

localized versions 13

media supported 341

Mopier settings 265

Neutral Grays 254

operating systems supported

10

Output Protocol settings 262

Pages per Sheet 240

Paper Options 214

paper supported 370

Paper/Output settings 204

Paper/Quality tab 209

PJL encoding 365

PostScript Device settings

262

PostScript Memory settings

262

PostScript Options 206

PostScript Passthrough 266

preconfiguration support 367

Print Task Quick Sets 210

Print Task Quick Sets support

370

Printer Features 207

Printing Preferences tabs 199

Properties tabs 200

quality settings 372

raster compression 208

reordering options 372

Resizing Options settings 229

resizing options support 373

Scale to Fit 229

Services tab 256, 369

timeout settings 263

tray assignment 368

TrueType font settings 205

user interface support 369

Watermarks settings 231

watermarks support 374

PS files, command-line printing

359

Q

quality, driver support 372

Quick Copy job settings

PCL traditional drivers 146

PS Emulation Driver 183

unidrivers 247

Quick Sets. See Print Task Quick

Sets

R

raster compression

PCL unidrivers 208

PS Emulation Unidriver 208

Ready to Create Installer dialog box

309

Ready to Install dialog box,

Windows 294

regional versions, CD-ROMs 12

Registration dialog box, Windows

299

releasing job-storage jobs 148,

190, 250

remote firmware updates

about 346

determining current firmware

level 346 downloading 346

FTP, Windows 350

HP Web Jetadmin 357

LPR commands 357

Macintosh 85, 351, 355

messages 347 troubleshooting 347

UNIX 355

verifying installation 348

Windows network 354

Windows, using local port 352

Rendezvous Setting, Macintosh

91

reordering options 372

Resizing Options

driver support 373

unidriver settings 229

resolution

driver support 372

PCL traditional driver settings

117, 119

PS Emulation Driver settings

175

Restrict Color screen, HP Printer

Utility 92

Restrict Color, HP Embedded Web

Server 69

RFU. See remote firmware updates

RGB settings

PCL traditional drivers 158

PS Emulation Driver 185

unidrivers 255

RTF files, viewing 19

ENWW Index 389

S

Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) feature

117, 119

Scale to Fit setting

PCL traditional drivers 121

unidrivers 229

Scaling control, PS Emulation

Driver 176

screen-readable documentation

19

Searching dialog box, Windows

281

Security page, HP Embedded Web

Server 65, 68

Send Ctrl-D settings 196, 263

Send TrueType as Bitmaps

PCL traditional drivers 117,

118

PCL unidrivers 207

serial number 60

Services tab 256, 369

Set Port Name dialog box, Windows

289

settings

continuous export 36

locking 35

overriding 99, 197

Print Task Quick Sets,

PCL traditional drivers 106

Print Task Quick Sets, unidrivers

210

Settings tab, HP Embedded Web

Server 64

silent installation

command-line 313

Customization Wizard 300

sizes, paper

commands 343

custom 344

margins 343

PCL Traditional Driver settings

129

Print on Both Sides settings,

unidrivers 236

Print on Both sides, PCL

traditional drivers 110

PS Emulation Driver settings

170

supported 341

unidriver settings 215

sleep mode 4

smart duplexing 236

Source is settings

PCL traditional drivers 134

PS Emulation Driver 172

unidrivers 217

sources, paper. See trays

Specify Printer dialog box, Windows

287

speed specifications 4

sRGB settings

PS Emulation Driver 185

unidrivers 255

standalone drivers 8

status

devices 61

Macintosh supplies 77, 92

supplies 60

storage, job enabling in PCL traditional

drivers 164

Macintosh 87

operating systems supported

371

PCL traditional drivers 142

PS Emulation Driver 182, 192

unidriver settings 243, 265

Stored job settings

PCL traditional drivers 146

unidrivers 247

substitution table for fonts, PS

Emulation Driver 177

supplies

AutoSend page, HP Embedded

Web Server 65

features 6

Macintosh status 77, 92

ordering 26, 51

usage AutoSend page 65

viewing status 60

Support tab, HP Easy Printer Care

53

Support tab, HP Printer Utility 81

support, product 61

system requirements

Macintosh and Linux 7

Windows 7

T

TBCP output protocol, PS

Emulation Unidriver 262

TCP/IP address, locating 59

Test Page dialog box, Windows

298

text files, command-line printing

359

text, printing all as black

PCL traditional drivers 117,

119

unidriver 207

time settings, HP Embedded Web

Server 65

timeout settings 194, 263

Toolbox, not supported 23

traditional drivers. See PCL traditional drivers; PS Emulation

Driver transparencies, paper type

commands 345

trays

Alternative Letterhead Mode

166, 207

autoconfiguration 31

custom paper sizes 133, 216

driver support 368

included 6, 341

Installable Options, PS

Emulation Driver 190

Macintosh configuration 86

media supported 5, 343

paper source commands 341

paper type commands 345

PCL traditional driver settings

163

PS Emulation Driver settings

172

Source is settings, PCL

traditional drivers 134

Source is settings, unidrivers

217

unidriver configuration 265

unidriver Form to Tray

Assignment 259

troubleshooting

File to E-mail utility 338

firmware upgrades 347

HP driver Diagnostic Printer

Check Tool 37

390 Index ENWW

Services tab, unidrivers 256

Troubleshooting Tools pane, HP

Easy Printer Care 58

TrueType font settings

PS Emulation Unidriver 264

Send as Bitmap, PCL traditional

drivers 117, 118

Send as Bitmap, PCL unidrivers

207

substitution table, PS Emulation

Driver 177

unidrivers 205

two-sided printing

PCL traditional driver settings

110

PS Emulation Driver 173

unidriver settings 236

TXT files, command-line printing

359

Type is settings

PCL traditional drivers 135

unidrivers 218

types, paper

Include in application source list

setting 167

PCL traditional drivers settings

135

Print on Both Sides settings,

unidrivers 236

Print on Both sides, PCL

traditional drivers 110

supported 343

unidriver settings 218

U

unattended installation

command-line 313

Customization Wizard 300

unidrivers

% of Normal Size 230

About tab 268

accessing 199

Advanced Printing Features

205

Advanced tab 203

Alternative Letterhead Mode

207

alternative source support

374

Automatic Configuration 264

automatic configuration 33

bidirectional communication

support 366

bins supported 368

booklets 239

bundle support 367

Color tab 251

Color Themes 254

connectivity support 366

constraint messages 201

Copy Count settings 204

custom paper sizes 344

destination support 375

Device Settings tab 258

Document Options 205, 236

document preview image

225, 230, 241, 255

duplexing 236

Edge Control 253

Effects tab 228

features 197

finishing options 375

Finishing tab 235

Flip Pages Up 239

Font DIMM Installer 260 font settings 260

Font Substitution Table 260

font support 376

Form to Tray Assignment 259

Graphic setting 205

Halftone settings 254

Help feature support 369

Help system 201

HP Digital Imaging Options

225

HP Driver Preconfiguration 36

Image Color Management (ICM)

205

Installable Options settings

264

job stream output support 364

job tracking 365

Job-storage settings 243

job-storage support 371

Layout Options 208

media supported 341

Mopier settings 265

Neutral Grays 254

operating systems supported

10

Pages per Sheet 240

Paper Options 214

paper size commands 343

paper supported 370

paper type commands 345

Paper/Output settings 204

Paper/Quality tab 209

PCL 6 color raster compression

support 364

PJL encoding 365

PostScript Options 206

PostScript Passthrough 266

preconfiguration support 367

Print Task Quick Sets 210

Print Task Quick Sets support

370

Printer Features 207

Printing Preferences tabs 199

Properties tabs 200

quality settings 372 reordering options 372

Resizing Options settings 229

resizing options support 373

Scale to Fit 229

Services tab 256, 369

tray assignment 368

TrueType font settings 205

user interface support 369

Watermarks settings 231

watermarks support 374

uninstallation

HP Easy Printer Care 340

Macintosh printing system

329

units of measurement 134

UNIX operating systems

direct printing 363

driver availability 9

print-ready printing 363

remote firmware update 355

Web site for 8

Unprintable Area, PS Emulation

Driver 172

Unsupported Operating System

dialog box, Windows 279

Update Now feature 32, 33, 167

Update screen, HP Easy Printer

Care 57

updating firmware remotely. See remote firmware update

ENWW Index 391

usage page 60

Usage Report, HP Easy Printer

Care 56

USB direct-connect installation

278

Use Different Paper, PCL traditional

drivers 136

Use Different Paper/Covers,

unidrivers 219

User Guide 19

User Name 147, 248

W

Wait Timeout settings 194, 263

wake time, setting 4

Watermarks settings

drivers supported 374

PCL traditional drivers 123

PS Emulation Driver 187

unidrivers 231

Web Jetadmin. See HP Web

Jetadmin

Web sites

Adobe 169

downloading software 9

firmware download 346

HP Embedded Web Server links

61, 65

HP Embedded Web Server user

guide 59

Linux product support 7

support links 26

UNIX model scripts 9

UNIX support 8

Welcome dialog box,

Customization Wizard 302

Welcome dialog box, Windows

Full Installation 279

What's this? Help

PS Emulation Driver 169

unidrivers 201

Windows operating systems

Add Printer installation 299

availability of software

components 10

CD-ROM, print system 24

default printer, setting 314

dialog boxes 278

direct printing, FTP 359

direct printing, local port 361

direct printing, networks 363

directory structure, software CD-

ROM 11

driver versions 28

Enterprise AutoConfiguration

support 32

fonts supported 270

HP Driver Preconfiguration

support 36

Installer Customization Wizard

300

installers 10

installing printing software

276

LPR commands 363

Point and Print installation

313

PS Emulation Driver features

168

PS emulation fonts supported

272

remote firmware update 352

supported 8

system requirements 7

unidriver features 197

392 Index ENWW

© 2005 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.

www.hp.com

advertisement

Related manuals

advertisement

Table of contents